ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZAAABACADAEAFAGAHAIAJAKALAMANAOAPAQARASATAUAVAWAXAYAZBABBBCBDBEBFBGBHBIBJBKBLBMBNBOBPBQBRBW
1
Print books for Liberal Arts Major - Use the code LAM24BKS to get 70% off the listed prices. Special discount only for Springer Nature business partners and valid from February 1 - March 31, 2024
2
qtysubject_clusterrecommendedisbnauthoreditor1_lastnameauthoreditorsauthoreditors_affiliationtitlesubtitlebibliographic_informationaddi_bibliographic_infoedition_numbercopyright_yearprice_statusprice_eursale_price_eurprice_eur_brsale_price_eur_brprice_gbpsale_price_gbpprice_usdsale_price_usdcover_typeadditional_softcoverseries_titlevolume_numbersubject_collectionproduct_categorymediumnr_of_arabic_pagesbic_code1bic_code2imprintpublisher_namekey_book_for_librariessales_highlightdelivery_statuspub_date_actualpub_date_actual_sec_locpub_date_planned_first_releasepub_date_planned_sec_locdistribution_information
translation_method
lasteditioncopyright_year_former_edsisbn_predecessor_editiontable_of_contents_shortback_cover_copyinfo_textusp_editorialabout_the_authorpublication_classdiscount_group_nydiscount_group_sdcebook_package_codeebook_packageebook_info_no_e_rightsopen_accesseansnt_discipline1snt_discipline2snt_discipline3snt_discipline4snt_discipline5snt_discipline6weightcontains_esmsignifier_multimediamore_media_appisbn_successor_edition
3
Social Sciences978-3-030-10306-4ÅkessonLisa ÅkessonLisa Åkesson, University of Gothenburg, Gothenburg, SwedenPostcolonial Portuguese Migration to AngolaMigrants or Masters?XI, 154 p.12018final49.9915.0053.4916.0544.9913.5054.9916.50Soft cover1Migration, Diasporas and CitizenshipSocial SciencesBrief/PivotBook (Paperback Initiative)154JFFNJHBLPalgrave MacmillanSpringer International Publishing0Available2019-01-122019-01-112019-03-012019-03-291Chapter 1: Introduction: Setting the scene.- Chapter 2: Postcolonial encounters in a lusotropical world.- Chapter 3: Mobile subjects.- Chapter 4: Changing relations of power and the party-state.- Chapter 5: The power in and of labour relations.- Chapter 6: Identities at work.- Chapter 7: Conclusions: Continuity, rupture and hybridity.<div>
</div><div>
</div><div>
</div>		Grounded in extensive and original ethnographic fieldwork, this book makes a novel contribution to migration studies by examining a European labour migration to the Global South, namely contemporary Portuguese migration to Angola in a postcolonial context. In doing so, it explores everyday encounters at work between the Portuguese migrants and their Angolan “hosts”, and it analyses how the Luso-African postcolonial heritage interplays with the recent Portuguese-Angolan migration in the (re-)construction of power relations and identities. Based on ethnographic interviews, the book describes the Angolan-Portuguese relationship as characterized not only by hierarchies of power, but also by ambivalence and hybridity. This research demonstrates that the identities of the ex-colonized Angolan and the Portuguese ex-colonizer are shaped by a history of unequal and violent power relations. Further, it reveals how this history has produced a sense of intimacy between the two, and the often fraught nature of this relationship. Combining a strong connection to the field of migration studies with a postcolonial perspective, this original work will appeal to students and scholars of migration, postcolonial studies, the sociology of work and African Studies. <div>
</div><div>
</div><div>
</div>		Grounded in extensive and original ethnographic fieldwork, this book makes a novel contribution to migration studies by examining a European labour migration to the Global South, namely contemporary Portuguese migration to Angola in a postcolonial context. In doing so, it explores everyday encounters at work between the Portuguese migrants and their Angolan “hosts”, and it analyses how the Luso-African postcolonial heritage interplays with the recent Portuguese-Angolan migration in the (re-)construction of power relations and identities. Based on ethnographic interviews, the book describes the Angolan-Portuguese relationship as characterized not only by hierarchies of power, but also by ambivalence and hybridity. This research demonstrates that the identities of the ex-colonized Angolan and the Portuguese ex-colonizer are shaped by a history of unequal and violent power relations. Further, it reveals how this history has produced a sense of intimacy between the two, and the often fraught nature of this relationship. Combining a strong connection to the field of migration studies with a postcolonial perspective, this original work will appeal to students and scholars of migration, postcolonial studies, the sociology of work and African Studies.<p>Represents a significant contribution to current migration debates</p><p>Carves a new path in the debate on North-South migration</p><p>Sheds light on postcolonial power relations in Angola</p>Lisa Åkesson is Associate Professor in Anthropology at the School of Global Studies, the University of Gothenburg, and Senior Researcher at the Nordic Africa Institute, Sweden.SciencePalgrave Standard US (P5)Palgrave Standard (P5)EBOP41176Social Sciences009783030103064Human MigrationSociology of WorkEthnographyAfrican PoliticsImperialism and ColonialismSocial Structure454000
4
Social Sciences978-3-319-73051-6ÅkessonLisa ÅkessonLisa Åkesson, University of Gothenburg, Gothenburg, SwedenPostcolonial Portuguese Migration to AngolaMigrants or Masters?XI, 154 p.12018final49.9915.0053.4916.0543.9913.2054.9916.50Hard cover0Migration, Diasporas and CitizenshipSocial SciencesBrief/PivotBook154JFFNJHBLPalgrave MacmillanSpringer International Publishing0Available2018-03-012018-02-192018-03-092018-03-091Chapter 1: Introduction: Setting the scene.- Chapter 2: Postcolonial encounters in a lusotropical world.- Chapter 3: Mobile subjects.- Chapter 4: Changing relations of power and the party-state.- Chapter 5: The power in and of labour relations.- Chapter 6: Identities at work.- Chapter 7: Conclusions: Continuity, rupture and hybridity.<div>
</div><div>
</div><div>
</div>		Grounded in extensive and original ethnographic fieldwork, this book makes a novel contribution to migration studies by examining a European labour migration to the Global South, namely contemporary Portuguese migration to Angola in a postcolonial context. In doing so, it explores everyday encounters at work between the Portuguese migrants and their Angolan “hosts”, and it analyses how the Luso-African postcolonial heritage interplays with the recent Portuguese-Angolan migration in the (re-)construction of power relations and identities. Based on ethnographic interviews, the book describes the Angolan-Portuguese relationship as characterized not only by hierarchies of power, but also by ambivalence and hybridity. This research demonstrates that the identities of the ex-colonized Angolan and the Portuguese ex-colonizer are shaped by a history of unequal and violent power relations. Further, it reveals how this history has produced a sense of intimacy between the two, and the often fraught nature of this relationship. Combining a strong connection to the field of migration studies with a postcolonial perspective, this original work will appeal to students and scholars of migration, postcolonial studies, the sociology of work and African Studies. <div>
</div><div>
</div><div>
</div>		Grounded in extensive and original ethnographic fieldwork, this book makes a novel contribution to migration studies by examining a European labour migration to the Global South, namely contemporary Portuguese migration to Angola in a postcolonial context. In doing so, it explores everyday encounters at work between the Portuguese migrants and their Angolan “hosts”, and it analyses how the Luso-African postcolonial heritage interplays with the recent Portuguese-Angolan migration in the (re-)construction of power relations and identities. Based on ethnographic interviews, the book describes the Angolan-Portuguese relationship as characterized not only by hierarchies of power, but also by ambivalence and hybridity. This research demonstrates that the identities of the ex-colonized Angolan and the Portuguese ex-colonizer are shaped by a history of unequal and violent power relations. Further, it reveals how this history has produced a sense of intimacy between the two, and the often fraught nature of this relationship. Combining a strong connection to the field of migration studies with a postcolonial perspective, this original work will appeal to students and scholars of migration, postcolonial studies, the sociology of work and African Studies.<p>Represents a significant contribution to current migration debates</p><p>Carves a new path in the debate on North-South migration</p><p>Sheds light on postcolonial power relations in Angola</p>Lisa Åkesson is Associate Professor in Anthropology at the School of Global Studies, the University of Gothenburg, and Senior Researcher at the Nordic Africa Institute, Sweden.SciencePalgrave Standard US (P5)Palgrave Standard (P5)EBOP41176Social Sciences009783319730516Human MigrationSociology of WorkEthnographyAfrican PoliticsImperialism and ColonialismSocial Structure454000
5
Social Sciences978-1-349-48104-0AlanenL. Alanen; E. Brooker; B. MayallL. Alanen; E. Brooker; B. MayallChildhood with BourdieuX, 225 p.12015final49.9915.0053.4916.0544.9913.5054.9916.50Soft cover0Studies in Childhood and YouthPalgrave Social Sciences CollectionMonographBook225GTFJHBKPalgrave MacmillanPalgrave Macmillan UK0Available2015-01-012015-01-012013-12-312013-12-3111. Introduction; Leena Alanen, Liz Brooker and Berry Mayall 2. Intergenerational Relations: Embodiment over Time; Berry Mayall 3. Cultural Capital in the Preschool Years: Can the State 'Compensate' for the Family?; Liz Brooker 4. Between Young Children and Adults: Practical Logic in Families' Lives; Pascale Garnier 5. Early Childhood Education as a Social Field: Everyday Struggles and Practices of Dominance; Mari Vuorisalo and Leena Alanen 6. 'A Fish in Water?' Social Lives and Local Connections: the Case of Young People who Travel Outside their Local Areas to Secondary School; Abigail Knight 7. Childhood in Africa between Local Powers and Global Hierarchies; Geraldine Andre and Mathieu Hilgers 8. 'Those who are good to us, we call them friends': Social Support and Social Networks for Children Growing up in Poverty in Rural Andhra Pradesh, India; Virginia Morrow and Uma Vennam 9. Struggling to Support: Genesis of the Practice of Using Support Persons in the Finnish Child Welfare Field; Johanna Moilanen, Johanna Kiili and Leena Alanen 10. Decision-making Processes in Review Meetings for Children in Care: a Bourdieusian Analysis; Karen WinterThis collection is an engaging exploration of how Bourdieu's key concepts - field, habitus and capital - help us re-think the status of childhood. The authors are committed to improving the social status and well-being of childhood in social, economic and political worlds that too often fail to accord children respect for their human rights.Géraldine André, National Fund for Scientific Research, Belgium Mathieu Hilgers, Université Libre de Bruxelles, Belgium Johanna Kiili, University of Jyväskylä, Finland Abigail Knight, Institute of Education, University of London, UK Johanna Moilanen, University of Jyväskylä, Finland Virginia Morrow, University of Oxford, UK Uma Vennam, Sri Padmavati Mahila Visvavidyalam, India Mari Vuorisalo, University of Jyväskylä, Finland Karen Winter, Queen's University Belfast, Northern IrelandSciencePalgrave Standard US (P5)Palgrave Monograph (P6)EBOP41146Palgrave Social Sciences Collection009781349481040Development StudiesSociology of Family, Youth and AgingSociology of EducationSocial TheoryBehavioral Sciences and Psychology2921000
6
Social Sciences978-1-137-38473-7AlanenL. Alanen; E. Brooker; B. MayallL. Alanen; E. Brooker; B. MayallChildhood with BourdieuX, 225 p.12015final49.9915.0053.4916.0544.9913.5054.9916.50Hard cover0Studies in Childhood and YouthPalgrave Social Sciences CollectionMonographBook225GTFJHBKPalgrave MacmillanPalgrave Macmillan UK0Available2015-01-222015-01-222015-01-222015-01-2211. Introduction; Leena Alanen, Liz Brooker and Berry Mayall 2. Intergenerational Relations: Embodiment over Time; Berry Mayall 3. Cultural Capital in the Preschool Years: Can the State 'Compensate' for the Family?; Liz Brooker 4. Between Young Children and Adults: Practical Logic in Families' Lives; Pascale Garnier 5. Early Childhood Education as a Social Field: Everyday Struggles and Practices of Dominance; Mari Vuorisalo and Leena Alanen 6. 'A Fish in Water?' Social Lives and Local Connections: the Case of Young People who Travel Outside their Local Areas to Secondary School; Abigail Knight 7. Childhood in Africa between Local Powers and Global Hierarchies; Geraldine Andre and Mathieu Hilgers 8. 'Those who are good to us, we call them friends': Social Support and Social Networks for Children Growing up in Poverty in Rural Andhra Pradesh, India; Virginia Morrow and Uma Vennam 9. Struggling to Support: Genesis of the Practice of Using Support Persons in the Finnish Child Welfare Field; Johanna Moilanen, Johanna Kiili and Leena Alanen 10. Decision-making Processes in Review Meetings for Children in Care: a Bourdieusian Analysis; Karen WinterThis collection is an engaging exploration of how Bourdieu's key concepts - field, habitus and capital - help us re-think the status of childhood. The authors are committed to improving the social status and well-being of childhood in social, economic and political worlds that too often fail to accord children respect for their human rights.Géraldine André, National Fund for Scientific Research, Belgium Mathieu Hilgers, Université Libre de Bruxelles, Belgium Johanna Kiili, University of Jyväskylä, Finland Abigail Knight, Institute of Education, University of London, UK Johanna Moilanen, University of Jyväskylä, Finland Virginia Morrow, University of Oxford, UK Uma Vennam, Sri Padmavati Mahila Visvavidyalam, India Mari Vuorisalo, University of Jyväskylä, Finland Karen Winter, Queen's University Belfast, Northern IrelandSciencePalgrave Standard US (P5)Palgrave Monograph (P6)EBOP41146Palgrave Social Sciences Collection009781137384737Development StudiesSociology of Family, Youth and AgingSociology of EducationSocial TheoryBehavioral Sciences and Psychology3894000
7
Social Sciences978-3-319-88953-5AmbrosiniMaurizio AmbrosiniMaurizio Ambrosini, University of Milan, Milan, ItalyIrregular Immigration in Southern EuropeActors, Dynamics and GovernanceIX, 164 p. 5 illus. in color.12018final59.9918.0064.1919.2654.9916.5064.9919.50Soft cover1Migration, Diasporas and CitizenshipSocial SciencesBrief/PivotBook (Paperback Initiative)164JFFNJPQBPalgrave MacmillanSpringer International Publishing0Available2019-06-042019-06-042019-01-312019-02-281Chapter 1. Introduction: Illegal immigration as a selective and dynamic process in different settings.- Chapter 2. Dealing with irregular immigration in Southern and Western Europe.- Chapter 3. The European Union and asylum seekers: between human rights and national sovereignty.- Chapter 4. Irregular immigrants as social actors.- Chapter 5. NGOs and civil societies.- Chapter 6. Civil servants and street level bureaucracies.<div>Focusing on the dynamics of irregular immigration in Southern EU Member States, this book analyses how the phenomenon is managed at national and local levels in different legal and political systems. In doing so, it answers vital policy questions regarding the continued existence of irregular migration, pathways to legality, and relations between unauthorized migrants and receiving societies. </div><div>
</div><div>The author argues that while the economic crisis and migrant flows coming from the South and East of the Mediterranean Sea have called this regime into question, it is the needs of labour markets in Southern Europe and compliance with European Union rules that has had a more dominant effect. The particular manner in which labour markets, political actors, social institutions, and migrants’ networks intersect are shown to be distinctive features of the migration regime in this region. </div><div>
</div><div>Describing bordering and debordering practices, from the island of Lampedusa to local communities in distant regions, this book brings fresh insights to urgent areas of debate within the field. It analyses why many irregular immigrants are socially accepted, such as women who perform domestic and care activities, whereas others are rejected and marginalized, as is often the case for asylum seekers, despite having permission to reside.</div><div>
</div><div>Drawing together twenty years of research and addressing the current crisis, it will appeal to policy-makers, students and scholars of migration.</div>		<div>Focusing on the dynamics of irregular immigration in Southern EU Member States, this book analyses how the phenomenon is managed at national and local levels in different legal and political systems. In doing so, it answers vital policy questions regarding the continued existence of irregular migration, pathways to legality, and relations between unauthorized migrants and receiving societies. </div><div>
</div><div>The author argues that while the economic crisis and migrant flows coming from the South and East of the Mediterranean Sea have called this regime into question, it is the needs of labour markets in Southern Europe and compliance with European Union rules that has had a more dominant effect. The particular manner in which labour markets, political actors, social institutions, and migrants’ networks intersect are shown to be distinctive features of the migration regime in this region. </div><div>
</div><div>Describing bordering and debordering practices, from the island of Lampedusa to local communities in distant regions, this book brings fresh insights to urgent areas of debate within the field. It analyses why many irregular immigrants are socially accepted, such as women who perform domestic and care activities, whereas others are rejected and marginalized, as is often the case for asylum seekers, despite having permission to reside.</div><div>
</div>Drawing together twenty years of research and addressing the current crisis, it will appeal to policy-makers, students and scholars of migration.<div>
</div>		<p>Provides a timely contribution to our understanding of the current refugee crisis in Europe</p><p>Sheds light on the fine line that separates legal and irregular migration</p><p>Offers significant policy insights for a Europe that lacks a common approach to immigration</p><p>Provides an illuminating case study for comparative research on migration regimes in the global North</p><div>Maurizio Ambrosini is Professor of Sociology of Migration at the University of Milan and chargé d’enseignement at the University of Nice-Sophia Antipolis, France. In addition to writing several books in Italian and articles in various languages, he is the author of Irregular Immigration and Invisible Welfare (Palgrave 2013) and edited Europe: No Migrants land? (ISPI, 2016).
</div>		SciencePalgrave Standard US (P5)Palgrave Standard (P5)EBOP41176Social Sciences009783319889535Human MigrationSocial PolicySocial StructureEuropean Politics454000
8
Social Sciences978-3-319-70517-0AmbrosiniMaurizio AmbrosiniMaurizio Ambrosini, University of Milan, Milan, ItalyIrregular Immigration in Southern EuropeActors, Dynamics and GovernanceIX, 164 p. 5 illus. in color.12018final59.9918.0064.1919.2654.9916.5064.9919.50Hard cover0Migration, Diasporas and CitizenshipSocial SciencesBrief/PivotBook164JFFNJPQBPalgrave MacmillanSpringer International Publishing0Available2018-01-312018-01-082018-01-232018-01-231Chapter 1. Introduction: Illegal immigration as a selective and dynamic process in different settings.- Chapter 2. Dealing with irregular immigration in Southern and Western Europe.- Chapter 3. The European Union and asylum seekers: between human rights and national sovereignty.- Chapter 4. Irregular immigrants as social actors.- Chapter 5. NGOs and civil societies.- Chapter 6. Civil servants and street level bureaucracies.<div>Focusing on the dynamics of irregular immigration in Southern EU Member States, this book analyses how the phenomenon is managed at national and local levels in different legal and political systems. In doing so, it answers vital policy questions regarding the continued existence of irregular migration, pathways to legality, and relations between unauthorized migrants and receiving societies. </div><div>
</div><div>The author argues that while the economic crisis and migrant flows coming from the South and East of the Mediterranean Sea have called this regime into question, it is the needs of labour markets in Southern Europe and compliance with European Union rules that has had a more dominant effect. The particular manner in which labour markets, political actors, social institutions, and migrants’ networks intersect are shown to be distinctive features of the migration regime in this region. </div><div>
</div><div>Describing bordering and debordering practices, from the island of Lampedusa to local communities in distant regions, this book brings fresh insights to urgent areas of debate within the field. It analyses why many irregular immigrants are socially accepted, such as women who perform domestic and care activities, whereas others are rejected and marginalized, as is often the case for asylum seekers, despite having permission to reside.</div><div>
</div><div>Drawing together twenty years of research and addressing the current crisis, it will appeal to policy-makers, students and scholars of migration.</div>		<div>Focusing on the dynamics of irregular immigration in Southern EU Member States, this book analyses how the phenomenon is managed at national and local levels in different legal and political systems. In doing so, it answers vital policy questions regarding the continued existence of irregular migration, pathways to legality, and relations between unauthorized migrants and receiving societies. </div><div>
</div><div>The author argues that while the economic crisis and migrant flows coming from the South and East of the Mediterranean Sea have called this regime into question, it is the needs of labour markets in Southern Europe and compliance with European Union rules that has had a more dominant effect. The particular manner in which labour markets, political actors, social institutions, and migrants’ networks intersect are shown to be distinctive features of the migration regime in this region. </div><div>
</div><div>Describing bordering and debordering practices, from the island of Lampedusa to local communities in distant regions, this book brings fresh insights to urgent areas of debate within the field. It analyses why many irregular immigrants are socially accepted, such as women who perform domestic and care activities, whereas others are rejected and marginalized, as is often the case for asylum seekers, despite having permission to reside.</div><div>
</div>Drawing together twenty years of research and addressing the current crisis, it will appeal to policy-makers, students and scholars of migration.<div>
</div>		<p>Provides a timely contribution to our understanding of the current refugee crisis in Europe</p><p>Sheds light on the fine line that separates legal and irregular migration</p><p>Offers significant policy insights for a Europe that lacks a common approach to immigration</p><p>Provides an illuminating case study for comparative research on migration regimes in the global North</p><div>Maurizio Ambrosini is Professor of Sociology of Migration at the University of Milan and chargé d’enseignement at the University of Nice-Sophia Antipolis, France. In addition to writing several books in Italian and articles in various languages, he is the author of Irregular Immigration and Invisible Welfare (Palgrave 2013) and edited Europe: No Migrants land? (ISPI, 2016).
</div>		SciencePalgrave Standard US (P5)Palgrave Standard (P5)EBOP41176Social Sciences009783319705170Human MigrationSocial PolicySocial StructureEuropean Politics454000
9
Social Sciences978-3-319-69382-8ArnoldAnnika ArnoldAnnika Arnold, Universität Stuttgart, Stuttgart, GermanyClimate Change and StorytellingNarratives and Cultural Meaning in Environmental CommunicationXI, 136 p.12018final59.9918.0064.1919.2654.9916.5064.9919.50Hard cover0Palgrave Studies in Environmental Sociology and PolicySocial SciencesBrief/PivotBook136JHBJPalgrave MacmillanSpringer International Publishing0Available2018-01-302018-01-192018-02-052018-02-0511. Introduction: Why Narratives Matter in Climate Change Communication .- 2. Climate Change Communication Studies: Inquiries into Beliefs, Information and Stories .- 3. How to Understand the Role of Narratives in Environmental Communication: Cultural Narrative Analysis .- 4. Telling the Stories of Climate Change: Structure and Content .- 5. Conclusion: Pitfalls and the Power of Narratives.Climate change is as much a cultural phenomenon as it is a natural one. This book is about those cultural patterns that surround our perception of the environmental crisis and which are embodied in the narratives told by climate change advocates. It investigates the themes and motifs in those narratives through the use of narrative theory and provides a framework for narrative analysis from a cultural perspective.Developing a framework for cultural narrative analysis, Climate Change and Storytelling draws on qualitative interviews with stakeholders, activists and politicians in the USA and Germany to identify motifs and the relationships between heroes, villains and victims, as told by the messengers of the narrative.This book will provide academics and practitioners with insights into the structure of climate change communication among climate advocates and the cultural fabric that informs it.Climate change is as much a cultural phenomenon as it is a natural one. This book is about those cultural patterns that surround our perception of the environmental crisis and which are embodied in the narratives told by climate change advocates. It investigates the themes and motifs in those narratives through the use of narrative theory and cultural sociology.Developing a framework for cultural narrative analysis, Climate Change and Storytelling draws on qualitative interviews with stakeholders, activists and politicians in the USA and Germany to identify motifs and the relationships between heroes, villains and victims, as told by the messengers of the narrative.This book will provide academics and practitioners with insights into the structure of climate change communication among climate advocates and the cultural fabric that informs it. <div>
</div>		<p>Emphasises the need for narrative analysis in understanding the current political and public debate surrounding climate change</p><p>Suggests an analytical scheme for investigating cultural narratives with the help of narrative and literary theory</p><p>Presents the findings of the author’s narrative analyses of interviews with climate change advocates in the USA and Germany</p>Annika Arnold is Senior Researcher at the Center for Interdisciplinary Risk and Innovation Studies (ZIRIUS), Stuttgart University, Germany. She is an environmental and cultural sociologist whose research focuses on topics of sustainable development and environmental communication, largely from a cultural perspective.
SciencePalgrave Standard US (P5)Palgrave Standard (P5)EBOP41176Social Sciences009783319693828Environmental Social SciencesEnvironmental SciencesPhysical GeographyClimate Sciences454000
10
Social Sciences978-981-32-9724-1BarnsSarah BarnsSarah Barns, Sitelines Media, Sydney, NSW, AustraliaPlatform UrbanismNegotiating Platform Ecosystems in Connected CitiesXVII, 232 p. 5 illus., 3 illus. in color.12020final79.9924.0085.5925.6869.9921.0089.9927.00Hard cover0Geographies of MediaSocial SciencesMonographBook232RGCRPCPalgrave MacmillanSpringer Nature Singapore0Available2020-01-022019-12-072019-12-302019-12-301<div>Chapter 1: Introduction.- Chapter 2: When digital became platform.- Chapter 3: City reverberations.- Chapter 4: The Uberisation of Everything.- Chapter 5: Making sense of platform intermediation.- Chapter 6: Platform intermediation as recombinatory urban governance.- Chapter 7: Intimate entanglements.- Chapter 8: City bricolage: Imagining the city as a platform.- Chapter 9: Conclusion: Rethinking public value in an era of platform scale.
</div>		<div>This book reflects on what it means to live as urban citizens in a world increasingly shaped by the business and organisational logics of digital platforms. Where smart city strategies promote the roll-out of internet of things (IoT) technologies and big data analytics by city governments worldwide, platform urbanism responds to the deep and pervasive entanglements that exist between urban citizens, city services and platform ecosystems today. </div><div> </div><div>Recent years have witnessed a backlash against major global platforms, evidenced by burgeoning literatures on platform capitalism, the platform society, platform surveillance and platform governance, as well as regulatory attention towards the market power of platforms in their dominance of global data infrastructure. </div><div> </div><div>This book responds to these developments and asks: How do platform ecosystems reshape connected cities? How do urban researchers and policy makers respond to the logics of platform ecosystems and platform intermediation? What sorts of multisensory urban engagements are rendered through platform interfaces and modalities? And what sorts of governance challenges and responses are needed to cultivate and champion the digital public spaces of our connected lives.</div><div>This book reflects on what it means to live as urban citizens in a world increasingly shaped by the business and organisational logics of digital platforms. Where smart city strategies promote the roll-out of internet of things (IoT) technologies and big data analytics by city governments worldwide, platform urbanism responds to the deep and pervasive entanglements that exist between urban citizens, city services and platform ecosystems today. </div><div> </div><div>Recent years have witnessed a backlash against major global platforms, evidenced by burgeoning literatures on platform capitalism, the platform society, platform surveillance and platform governance, as well as regulatory attention towards the market power of platforms in their dominance of global data infrastructure. </div><div> </div><div>This book responds to these developments and asks: How do platform ecosystems reshape connected cities? How do urban researchers and policy makers respond to the logics of platform ecosystems and platform intermediation? What sorts of multisensory urban engagements are rendered through platform interfaces and modalities? And what sorts of governance challenges and responses are needed to cultivate and champion the digital public spaces of our connected lives.</div><p>Uniquely examines digital disruption and cities through the lens of platform strategy, combining business, technology, and data strategy and interaction design to produce 'platform ecosystems'</p><p>The first book to argue that the principles governing and shaping the development of successful digital platforms are becoming increasingly powerful in the design, experience and governance of cities</p><p>Spans the fields of urban cultural geography, digital strategy, urban policy and media history, which shapes a multi-disciplinary approach to the study and understanding of the challenges that platform ecosystems present cities</p><p>Raises awareness of the significance of platform ecosystems in driving major disruptions to many aspects of our urban spaces and places</p>Sarah Barns is a digital strategist, policy researcher, practitioner and scholar, with a career-long commitment to cultivating digital public spaces in connected cities. Having worked as policy adviser, digital strategist, urban consultant and creative producer, Sarah completed a PhD on the history of digital urbanism in 2010, using mobile media as a platform for experiential histories of urban activism. In 2014 Sarah was awarded an Urban Studies Foundation Postdoctoral Fellowship for her project ‘Platform Urbanism: data infomediaries, city labs and open data experiments in urban governance’, based at Western Sydney University and Australia’s national data science agency Data61. Today Sarah develops urban data policy and strategy for a range of public and private organisations, as well as being one half of Sydney digital placemaking practice Esem Projects.SciencePalgrave Standard US (P5)Palgrave Monograph (P6)EBOP41176Social Sciences009789813297241Human GeographyUrban Sociology457000
11
Social Sciences978-981-32-9727-2BarnsSarah BarnsSarah Barns, Sitelines Media, Sydney, NSW, AustraliaPlatform UrbanismNegotiating Platform Ecosystems in Connected CitiesXVII, 232 p. 5 illus., 3 illus. in color.12020final79.9924.0085.5925.6870.5021.1589.9927.00Soft cover1Geographies of MediaSocial SciencesMonographBook232RGCRPCPalgrave MacmillanSpringer Nature Singapore0Available2021-08-262019-12-072021-01-022021-01-021<div>Chapter 1: Introduction.- Chapter 2: When digital became platform.- Chapter 3: City reverberations.- Chapter 4: The Uberisation of Everything.- Chapter 5: Making sense of platform intermediation.- Chapter 6: Platform intermediation as recombinatory urban governance.- Chapter 7: Intimate entanglements.- Chapter 8: City bricolage: Imagining the city as a platform.- Chapter 9: Conclusion: Rethinking public value in an era of platform scale.
</div>		<div>This book reflects on what it means to live as urban citizens in a world increasingly shaped by the business and organisational logics of digital platforms. Where smart city strategies promote the roll-out of internet of things (IoT) technologies and big data analytics by city governments worldwide, platform urbanism responds to the deep and pervasive entanglements that exist between urban citizens, city services and platform ecosystems today. </div><div> </div><div>Recent years have witnessed a backlash against major global platforms, evidenced by burgeoning literatures on platform capitalism, the platform society, platform surveillance and platform governance, as well as regulatory attention towards the market power of platforms in their dominance of global data infrastructure. </div><div> </div><div>This book responds to these developments and asks: How do platform ecosystems reshape connected cities? How do urban researchers and policy makers respond to the logics of platform ecosystems and platform intermediation? What sorts of multisensory urban engagements are rendered through platform interfaces and modalities? And what sorts of governance challenges and responses are needed to cultivate and champion the digital public spaces of our connected lives.</div><div>This book reflects on what it means to live as urban citizens in a world increasingly shaped by the business and organisational logics of digital platforms. Where smart city strategies promote the roll-out of internet of things (IoT) technologies and big data analytics by city governments worldwide, platform urbanism responds to the deep and pervasive entanglements that exist between urban citizens, city services and platform ecosystems today. </div><div> </div><div>Recent years have witnessed a backlash against major global platforms, evidenced by burgeoning literatures on platform capitalism, the platform society, platform surveillance and platform governance, as well as regulatory attention towards the market power of platforms in their dominance of global data infrastructure. </div><div> </div><div>This book responds to these developments and asks: How do platform ecosystems reshape connected cities? How do urban researchers and policy makers respond to the logics of platform ecosystems and platform intermediation? What sorts of multisensory urban engagements are rendered through platform interfaces and modalities? And what sorts of governance challenges and responses are needed to cultivate and champion the digital public spaces of our connected lives.</div><p>Uniquely examines digital disruption and cities through the lens of platform strategy, combining business, technology, and data strategy and interaction design to produce 'platform ecosystems'</p><p>The first book to argue that the principles governing and shaping the development of successful digital platforms are becoming increasingly powerful in the design, experience and governance of cities</p><p>Spans the fields of urban cultural geography, digital strategy, urban policy and media history, which shapes a multi-disciplinary approach to the study and understanding of the challenges that platform ecosystems present cities</p><p>Raises awareness of the significance of platform ecosystems in driving major disruptions to many aspects of our urban spaces and places</p>Sarah Barns is a digital strategist, policy researcher, practitioner and scholar, with a career-long commitment to cultivating digital public spaces in connected cities. Having worked as policy adviser, digital strategist, urban consultant and creative producer, Sarah completed a PhD on the history of digital urbanism in 2010, using mobile media as a platform for experiential histories of urban activism. In 2014 Sarah was awarded an Urban Studies Foundation Postdoctoral Fellowship for her project ‘Platform Urbanism: data infomediaries, city labs and open data experiments in urban governance’, based at Western Sydney University and Australia’s national data science agency Data61. Today Sarah develops urban data policy and strategy for a range of public and private organisations, as well as being one half of Sydney digital placemaking practice Esem Projects.SciencePalgrave Standard US (P5)Palgrave Monograph (P6)EBOP41176Social Sciences009789813297272Human GeographyUrban Sociology336000
12
Social Sciencesx978-1-4939-2015-0BarthF. Diane BarthF. Diane Barth, New York, NY, USAIntegrative Clinical Social Work PracticeA Contemporary PerspectiveXVII, 166 p. 1 illus.12014final84.9925.5090.9427.2874.9922.5099.9930.00Soft cover0Essential Clinical Social Work SeriesSocial SciencesMonographBook166JKSNMMJTSpringerSpringer New York0Available2014-08-212014-09-022014-09-302014-09-301Preface.- Integration or Eclecticism: Rationale for an Integrative Theory.- Contemporary Psychodynamic Models.- Developmental Models.- Cognitive and Behavioral Models.- The Body-Mind Connection.- Making Assessments and Choosing Interventions.- An Integrative Approach to Therapeutic Relationships.- Small Steps and Manageable Goals.- Building and Working with an Integrative Team.- Working on and Working through.In recent history the practice of medicine and mental health  has been increasingly  eclectic, as more and more practitioners harness seemingly disparate therapies and techniques to arrive at clinical breakthroughs. But while social work professionals have been involved in integrative practice informally and intuitively for years, resources to bring structure to this therapeutic concept have been few and far between.In response, Integrative Social Work Practice offers innovative ways of conceptualizing cases, communicating with clients, and making better therapeutic use of client individuality. Rich in research, evidence-based and clinical material from a variety of settings, the book begins with the basic organizing principles behind effective integrative practice. Real-world examples flesh out the theoretical rationales, and psychodynamic, cognitive, behavioral, and developmental methods are shown in practical context. The author also demonstrates how to balance flexibility and boundaries, and manage diverse and even conflicting theories, while providing clear guidelines on: Integrating key psychotherapeutic approaches into social work.Using somatic knowledge to enhance therapy.Making assessments and choosing interventions.Applying an integrative approach to therapeutic relationships.Creating manageable goals based on small steps.Building and working with an integrative team.An important step forward in both professional development and the larger therapeutic picture, Integrative Social Work Practice benefits researchers and practitioners as well as supervisors and students in social work and counseling.In recent history the practice of medicine and mental health has been increasingly eclectic as more and more practitioners harness seemingly disparate therapies and techniques to arrive at clinical breakthroughs. But while social work professionals have been involved in integrative practice informally and intuitively for years, resources to bring structure to this therapeutic concept have been few and far between.In response, Integrative Social Work Practice offers innovative ways of conceptualizing cases, communicating with clients and making better therapeutic use of client individuality. Rich in research, evidence-based and clinical material from a variety of settings, the book begins with the basic organizing principles behind effective integrative practice. Real-world examples flesh out the theoretical rationales and psychodynamic, cognitive, behavioral and developmental methods are shown in practical context. The author also demonstrates how to balance flexibility and boundaries and manage diverse and even conflicting theories, while providing clear guidelines on:Integrating key psychotherapeutic approaches into social work.Using somatic knowledge to enhance therapy.Making assessments and choosing interventions.Applying an integrative approach to therapeutic relationships.Creating manageable goals based on small steps.Building and working with an integrative team.An important step forward in both professional development and the larger therapeutic picture, Integrative Social Work Practice benefits researchers and practitioners as well as supervisors and students in social work and counseling.<p>Provides a unifying theory of social work practice</p><p>Reviews existing clinical and research literature on integrated approaches</p><p>Offers practical guidelines to inform treatment, supervision and training of clinicians</p><p>Includes supplementary material: sn.pub/extras</p>ProfessionalsProfessional Books (2)Standard (0)EBOP11648Humanities, Social Sciences and Law009781493920150Social WorkCounseling PsychologyPsychotherapy2876000
13
Social Sciencesx978-1-4939-0350-4BarthF. Diane BarthF. Diane Barth, New York, NY, USAIntegrative Clinical Social Work PracticeA Contemporary PerspectiveXVII, 166 p. 1 illus.12014final119.9936.00128.3938.52109.9933.00129.9939.00Hard cover0Essential Clinical Social Work SeriesSocial SciencesMonographBook166JKSNMMJTSpringerSpringer New York0Available2014-02-182014-03-052014-03-312014-03-311Preface.- Integration or Eclecticism: Rationale for an Integrative Theory.- Contemporary Psychodynamic Models.- Developmental Models.- Cognitive and Behavioral Models.- The Body-Mind Connection.- Making Assessments and Choosing Interventions.- An Integrative Approach to Therapeutic Relationships.- Small Steps and Manageable Goals.- Building and Working with an Integrative Team.- Working on and Working through.In recent history the practice of medicine and mental health  has been increasingly  eclectic, as more and more practitioners harness seemingly disparate therapies and techniques to arrive at clinical breakthroughs. But while social work professionals have been involved in integrative practice informally and intuitively for years, resources to bring structure to this therapeutic concept have been few and far between.In response, Integrative Social Work Practice offers innovative ways of conceptualizing cases, communicating with clients, and making better therapeutic use of client individuality. Rich in research, evidence-based and clinical material from a variety of settings, the book begins with the basic organizing principles behind effective integrative practice. Real-world examples flesh out the theoretical rationales, and psychodynamic, cognitive, behavioral, and developmental methods are shown in practical context. The author also demonstrates how to balance flexibility and boundaries, and manage diverse and even conflicting theories, while providing clear guidelines on: Integrating key psychotherapeutic approaches into social work.Using somatic knowledge to enhance therapy.Making assessments and choosing interventions.Applying an integrative approach to therapeutic relationships.Creating manageable goals based on small steps.Building and working with an integrative team.An important step forward in both professional development and the larger therapeutic picture, Integrative Social Work Practice benefits researchers and practitioners as well as supervisors and students in social work and counseling.In recent history the practice of medicine and mental health has been increasingly eclectic as more and more practitioners harness seemingly disparate therapies and techniques to arrive at clinical breakthroughs. But while social work professionals have been involved in integrative practice informally and intuitively for years, resources to bring structure to this therapeutic concept have been few and far between.In response, Integrative Social Work Practice offers innovative ways of conceptualizing cases, communicating with clients and making better therapeutic use of client individuality. Rich in research, evidence-based and clinical material from a variety of settings, the book begins with the basic organizing principles behind effective integrative practice. Real-world examples flesh out the theoretical rationales and psychodynamic, cognitive, behavioral and developmental methods are shown in practical context. The author also demonstrates how to balance flexibility and boundaries and manage diverse and even conflicting theories, while providing clear guidelines on:Integrating key psychotherapeutic approaches into social work.Using somatic knowledge to enhance therapy.Making assessments and choosing interventions.Applying an integrative approach to therapeutic relationships.Creating manageable goals based on small steps.Building and working with an integrative team.An important step forward in both professional development and the larger therapeutic picture, Integrative Social Work Practice benefits researchers and practitioners as well as supervisors and students in social work and counseling.<p>Provides a unifying theory of social work practice</p><p>Reviews existing clinical and research literature on integrated approaches</p><p>Offers practical guidelines to inform treatment, supervision and training of clinicians</p><p>Includes supplementary material: sn.pub/extras</p>ProfessionalsProfessional Books (2)Standard (0)EBOP11648Humanities, Social Sciences and Law009781493903504Social WorkCounseling PsychologyPsychotherapy4026000
14
Social Sciences978-1-4899-7580-5BettingerRobert L. Bettinger; Raven Garvey; Shannon TushinghamRobert L. Bettinger, University of California, Davis, CA, USA; Raven Garvey, Univeristy of Michigan, Ann Arbor, MI, USA; Shannon Tushingham, Washington State University, Pullman, WA, USAHunter-GatherersArchaeological and Evolutionary TheoryXV, 304 p. 25 illus.22015final79.9924.0085.5925.6869.9921.0089.9927.00Hard cover0Interdisciplinary Contributions to ArchaeologySocial SciencesGraduate/advanced undergraduate textbookBook304HDJHMSpringerSpringer US0Available2015-07-012015-07-102015-07-312015-07-311,978-1-4899-0660-1,978-0-306-43650-5,978-1-4899-0659-5,978-1-4899-0658-8Part I. Historical Approaches to Hunter-Gatherers.- Chapter 1: Progressive Social Evolution and Hunter-Gatherers.- Chapter 2: The History of Americanist Hunter-Gatherer Research.- Part II. Theories of Limited Sets.- Chapter 3: Middle-Range Theory and Hunter-Gatherers.- Chapter 4: Hunter-Gatherers as Optimal Foragers.- Chapter 5: More Complex Models of Optimal Behavior among Hunter-Gatherers.- Part III. Theories of General Sets.- Chapter 6: Marxist and Structural Marxist Perspectives of Hunter-Gatherers.- Chapter 7: Neo-Darwinian Theory and Hunter-Gatherers.- Chapter 8: Hunter-Gatherers and Neo-Darwinian Cultural Transmission.- Chapter 9: Hunter-Gatherers: Problems in Theory.Hunter-gatherer research has played a historically central role in the development of anthropological and evolutionary theory. Today, research in this traditional and enduringly vital field blurs lines of distinction between archaeology and ethnology, and seeks instead to develop perspectives and theories broadly applicable to anthropology and its many subdisciplines. In the groundbreaking first edition of Hunter-Gatherers: Archaeological and Evolutionary Theory (1991), Robert Bettinger presented an integrative perspective on hunter-gatherer research and advanced a theoretical approach compatible with both traditional anthropological and contemporary evolutionary theories.Hunter-Gatherers remains a well-respected and much-cited text, now over 20 years since initial publication. Yet, as in other vibrant fields of study, the last two decades have seen important empirical and theoretical advances.  In this second edition of Hunter-Gatherers, co-authors Robert Bettinger, Raven Garvey, and Shannon Tushingham offer a revised and expanded version of the classic text, which includes a succinct and provocative critical synthesis of hunter-gatherer and evolutionary theory, from the Enlightenment to the present. New and expanded sections relate and react to recent developments—some of them the authors’ own—particularly in the realms of optimal foraging and cultural transmission theories.      An exceptionally informative and ambitious volume on cultural evolutionary theory, Hunter-Gatherers, second edition, is an essential addition to the libraries of anthropologists, archaeologists, and human ecologists alike.Hunter-gatherer research has played a historically central role in the development of anthropological and evolutionary theory. Today, research in this traditional and enduringly vital field blurs lines of distinction between archaeology and ethnology, and seeks instead to develop perspectives and theories broadly applicable to anthropology and its many sub disciplines. In the groundbreaking first edition of Hunter-Gatherers: Archaeological and Evolutionary Theory (1991), Robert Bettinger presented an integrative perspective on hunter-gatherer research and advanced a theoretical approach compatible with both traditional anthropological and contemporary evolutionary theories.Hunter-Gatherers remains a well-respected and much-cited text, now over 20 years since initial publication. Yet, as in other vibrant fields of study, the last two decades have seen important empirical and theoretical advances. In this second edition of Hunter-Gatherers, co-authors Robert Bettinger, Raven Garvey, and Shannon Tushingham offer a revised and expanded version of the classic text, which includes a succinct and provocative critical synthesis of hunter-gatherer and evolutionary theory, from the Enlightenment to the present. New and expanded sections relate and react to recent developments—some of them the authors’ own—particularly in the realms of optimal foraging and cultural transmission theories.An exceptionally informative and ambitious volume on cultural evolutionary theory, Hunter-Gatherers, second edition, is an essential addition to the libraries of anthropologists, archaeologists, and human ecologists alike.<p>Builds upon Hunter-Gatherers 1st Edition by expanding and revising previous chapters, especially in the areas of diet and Neo-Darwinism theory</p><p>Includes an entirely new section about gender theory and hunter-gatherers</p><p>Explores evolutionary and materialist perspectives in hunter gatherer research</p><p>Includes supplementary material: sn.pub/extras</p>Robert L. Bettinger is an archaeologist and professor of anthropology at the University of California, Davis. His research is grounded in quantitative ecological models of behavior and centers on hunter-gatherer adaptations to marginal environments including the North American Great Basin and parts of China, Siberia, and Argentina.  He has played a central role in the development of hunter-gatherer foraging theory, a contribution acknowledged by such awards as the Society for American Archaeology’s Award for Excellence in Archaeological Analysis (2007) and the Society for California Archaeology’s Martin A. Baumhoff Special Achievement Award ( 2007).Raven Garvey is an assistant professor of anthropology at the University of Michigan and an assistant curator at the University of Michigan Museum of Anthropological Archaeology.  Her research in Patagonia explores interactions between prehistoric hunter-gatherers and their environments to better understand the relative importance of ecological and cultural factors in shaping behavioral and technological adaptations to changed conditions.Shannon Tushingham is the Assistant Director of the Museum of Anthropology at Washington State University in Pullman, Washington. Her research program focuses on understanding evolutionary trends in human-environmental dynamics over the long term historical record and includes projects developed in collaboration with Native American descendant communities in the Pacific Northwest Coast and California. Guided by models from evolutionary ecology, this work involves examining some of the ideas and assumptions of interpretive frameworks that evaluate the productivity and potential of certain resources or environmental zones. She is also a specialist in the development of chemical residue extraction techniques, studies which are directed at understanding the ritual, medicinal and recreational use of psychoactive plants by worldwide human cultures.StudentsProfessional Books (2)Standard (0)EBOP11648Humanities, Social Sciences and Law009781489975805ArchaeologyAnthropologyEvolutionary Biology6033000
15
Social Sciences978-1-4899-7718-2BettingerRobert L. Bettinger; Raven Garvey; Shannon TushinghamRobert L. Bettinger, University of California, Davis, CA, USA; Raven Garvey, Univeristy of Michigan, Ann Arbor, MI, USA; Shannon Tushingham, Washington State University, Pullman, WA, USAHunter-GatherersArchaeological and Evolutionary TheoryXV, 304 p. 25 illus.22015final49.9915.0053.4916.0544.9913.5054.9916.50Soft cover1Interdisciplinary Contributions to ArchaeologySocial SciencesGraduate/advanced undergraduate textbookBook (Paperback Initiative)304HDJHMSpringerSpringer US0Available2016-10-182016-10-182016-10-212016-10-211,978-1-4899-0660-1,978-0-306-43650-5,978-1-4899-0659-5,978-1-4899-0658-8Part I. Historical Approaches to Hunter-Gatherers.- Chapter 1: Progressive Social Evolution and Hunter-Gatherers.- Chapter 2: The History of Americanist Hunter-Gatherer Research.- Part II. Theories of Limited Sets.- Chapter 3: Middle-Range Theory and Hunter-Gatherers.- Chapter 4: Hunter-Gatherers as Optimal Foragers.- Chapter 5: More Complex Models of Optimal Behavior among Hunter-Gatherers.- Part III. Theories of General Sets.- Chapter 6: Marxist and Structural Marxist Perspectives of Hunter-Gatherers.- Chapter 7: Neo-Darwinian Theory and Hunter-Gatherers.- Chapter 8: Hunter-Gatherers and Neo-Darwinian Cultural Transmission.- Chapter 9: Hunter-Gatherers: Problems in Theory.Hunter-gatherer research has played a historically central role in the development of anthropological and evolutionary theory. Today, research in this traditional and enduringly vital field blurs lines of distinction between archaeology and ethnology, and seeks instead to develop perspectives and theories broadly applicable to anthropology and its many subdisciplines. In the groundbreaking first edition of Hunter-Gatherers: Archaeological and Evolutionary Theory (1991), Robert Bettinger presented an integrative perspective on hunter-gatherer research and advanced a theoretical approach compatible with both traditional anthropological and contemporary evolutionary theories.Hunter-Gatherers remains a well-respected and much-cited text, now over 20 years since initial publication. Yet, as in other vibrant fields of study, the last two decades have seen important empirical and theoretical advances.  In this second edition of Hunter-Gatherers, co-authors Robert Bettinger, Raven Garvey, and Shannon Tushingham offer a revised and expanded version of the classic text, which includes a succinct and provocative critical synthesis of hunter-gatherer and evolutionary theory, from the Enlightenment to the present. New and expanded sections relate and react to recent developments—some of them the authors’ own—particularly in the realms of optimal foraging and cultural transmission theories.      An exceptionally informative and ambitious volume on cultural evolutionary theory, Hunter-Gatherers, second edition, is an essential addition to the libraries of anthropologists, archaeologists, and human ecologists alike.Hunter-gatherer research has played a historically central role in the development of anthropological and evolutionary theory. Today, research in this traditional and enduringly vital field blurs lines of distinction between archaeology and ethnology, and seeks instead to develop perspectives and theories broadly applicable to anthropology and its many sub disciplines. In the groundbreaking first edition of Hunter-Gatherers: Archaeological and Evolutionary Theory (1991), Robert Bettinger presented an integrative perspective on hunter-gatherer research and advanced a theoretical approach compatible with both traditional anthropological and contemporary evolutionary theories.Hunter-Gatherers remains a well-respected and much-cited text, now over 20 years since initial publication. Yet, as in other vibrant fields of study, the last two decades have seen important empirical and theoretical advances. In this second edition of Hunter-Gatherers, co-authors Robert Bettinger, Raven Garvey, and Shannon Tushingham offer a revised and expanded version of the classic text, which includes a succinct and provocative critical synthesis of hunter-gatherer and evolutionary theory, from the Enlightenment to the present. New and expanded sections relate and react to recent developments—some of them the authors’ own—particularly in the realms of optimal foraging and cultural transmission theories.An exceptionally informative and ambitious volume on cultural evolutionary theory, Hunter-Gatherers, second edition, is an essential addition to the libraries of anthropologists, archaeologists, and human ecologists alike.<p>Builds upon Hunter-Gatherers 1st Edition by expanding and revising previous chapters, especially in the areas of diet and Neo-Darwinism theory</p><p>Includes an entirely new section about gender theory and hunter-gatherers</p><p>Explores evolutionary and materialist perspectives in hunter gatherer research</p><p>Includes supplementary material: sn.pub/extras</p>Robert L. Bettinger is an archaeologist and professor of anthropology at the University of California, Davis. His research is grounded in quantitative ecological models of behavior and centers on hunter-gatherer adaptations to marginal environments including the North American Great Basin and parts of China, Siberia, and Argentina.  He has played a central role in the development of hunter-gatherer foraging theory, a contribution acknowledged by such awards as the Society for American Archaeology’s Award for Excellence in Archaeological Analysis (2007) and the Society for California Archaeology’s Martin A. Baumhoff Special Achievement Award ( 2007).Raven Garvey is an assistant professor of anthropology at the University of Michigan and an assistant curator at the University of Michigan Museum of Anthropological Archaeology.  Her research in Patagonia explores interactions between prehistoric hunter-gatherers and their environments to better understand the relative importance of ecological and cultural factors in shaping behavioral and technological adaptations to changed conditions.Shannon Tushingham is the Assistant Director of the Museum of Anthropology at Washington State University in Pullman, Washington. Her research program focuses on understanding evolutionary trends in human-environmental dynamics over the long term historical record and includes projects developed in collaboration with Native American descendant communities in the Pacific Northwest Coast and California. Guided by models from evolutionary ecology, this work involves examining some of the ideas and assumptions of interpretive frameworks that evaluate the productivity and potential of certain resources or environmental zones. She is also a specialist in the development of chemical residue extraction techniques, studies which are directed at understanding the ritual, medicinal and recreational use of psychoactive plants by worldwide human cultures.StudentsProfessional Books (2)Standard (0)EBOP11648Humanities, Social Sciences and Law009781489977182ArchaeologyAnthropologyEvolutionary Biology4861000
16
Social Sciences978-981-10-9570-2BhanaDeevia BhanaDeevia Bhana, University of KwaZulu-Natal School of Education, Durban, South AfricaGender and Childhood Sexuality in Primary SchoolXII, 229 p.12016final49.9915.0053.4916.0544.9913.5054.9916.50Soft cover1Perspectives on Children and Young People3Social SciencesMonographBook (Paperback Initiative)229JFSPJFSJSpringerSpringer Nature Singapore0Available2018-06-292018-06-302018-10-212018-11-181Introduction.- Children are children gender doesn’t matter.- Boys will be boys: What do teachers have to do with it?.- “…they don’t say that men and women are equal”: Culture, materiality and gender.- Teachers are mothers: Can men teach young children?.- Boys rule, Girls drool.' Masculinities, femininities and the fight for power.- Boys, violence and the gendered negotiation of masculinities.- Girls hit!’ Constructing and negotiating violent African femininities.- Kiss and tell: Boys, girls and sexualities.- “Emma and Dave sitting on a tree, K I S S I N G” Boys, girls at play.- Conclusion.This book is an ethnography of teachers and children in grades 1 and 2, and presents arguments about why we should take gender and childhood sexuality seriously in the early years of South African primary schooling. Taking issue with dominant discourses which assumes children’s lack of agency, the book questions the epistemological foundations of childhood discourses that produce innocence. It examines the paradox between teachers’ dominant narratives of childhood innocence and children’s own conceptualisation of gender and sexuality inside the classroom, with peers, in heterosexual games, in the playground and through boyfriend-girlfriend relationships. It examines the nuances and finely situated experiences which draw attention to hegemonic masculinity and femininity where boys and girls challenge and contest relations of power. The book focuses on the early makings of gender and sexual harassment and shows how violent gender relations are manifest even amongst very young boys and girls. Attention is given to the interconnections with race, class, structural inequalities, as well as the actions of boys and girls as navigate gender and sexuality at school. The book argues that the early years of primary schooling are a key site for the production and reproduction of gender and sexuality. Gender reform strategies are vital in this sector of schooling.This book is an ethnography of teachers and children in grades 1 and 2, and presents arguments about why we should take gender and childhood sexuality seriously in the early years of South African primary schooling. Taking issue with dominant discourses which assumes children’s lack of agency, the book questions the epistemological foundations of childhood discourses that produce innocence. It examines the paradox between teachers’ dominant narratives of childhood innocence and children’s own conceptualisation of gender and sexuality inside the classroom, with peers, in heterosexual games, in the playground and through boyfriend-girlfriend relationships. It examines the nuances and finely situated experiences which draw attention to hegemonic masculinity and femininity where boys and girls challenge and contest relations of power. The book focuses on the early makings of gender and sexual harassment and shows how violent gender relations are manifest even amongst very young boys and girls. Attention is given to the interconnections with race, class, structural inequalities, as well as the actions of boys and girls as navigate gender and sexuality at school. The book argues that the early years of primary schooling are a key site for the production and reproduction of gender and sexuality. Gender reform strategies are vital in this sector of schooling.<p>First book to provide an African/South African lens to the study of gender and childhood sexualities</p><p>In-depth analysis of social and cultural theory surrounding childhood innocence discourse</p><p>Makes practical recommendations for context-specific interventions that work with children in local settings</p><p>Includes supplementary material: sn.pub/extras</p> Professor Deevia Bhana is the DST/NRF South African Research Chair in Gender and Childhood Sexuality and Professor at the University of KwaZulu-Natal, South Africa. She has published widely in the fields of gender, childhood sexualities, young masculinities and schooling.ScienceProfessional Books (2)Science (SC)EBOP41176Social Sciences009789811095702Sociology of Family, Youth and AgingGender StudiesSociology of EducationEarly Childhood Education3752000
17
Social Sciences978-981-10-2238-8BhanaDeevia BhanaDeevia Bhana, University of KwaZulu-Natal School of Education, Durban, South AfricaGender and Childhood Sexuality in Primary SchoolXII, 229 p.12016final49.9915.0053.4916.0544.9913.5054.9916.50Hard cover0Perspectives on Children and Young People3Social SciencesMonographBook229JFSPJFSJSpringerSpringer Nature Singapore0Available2016-10-212016-10-132016-10-302016-10-301Introduction.- Children are children gender doesn’t matter.- Boys will be boys: What do teachers have to do with it?.- “…they don’t say that men and women are equal”: Culture, materiality and gender.- Teachers are mothers: Can men teach young children?.- Boys rule, Girls drool.' Masculinities, femininities and the fight for power.- Boys, violence and the gendered negotiation of masculinities.- Girls hit!’ Constructing and negotiating violent African femininities.- Kiss and tell: Boys, girls and sexualities.- “Emma and Dave sitting on a tree, K I S S I N G” Boys, girls at play.- Conclusion.This book is an ethnography of teachers and children in grades 1 and 2, and presents arguments about why we should take gender and childhood sexuality seriously in the early years of South African primary schooling. Taking issue with dominant discourses which assumes children’s lack of agency, the book questions the epistemological foundations of childhood discourses that produce innocence. It examines the paradox between teachers’ dominant narratives of childhood innocence and children’s own conceptualisation of gender and sexuality inside the classroom, with peers, in heterosexual games, in the playground and through boyfriend-girlfriend relationships. It examines the nuances and finely situated experiences which draw attention to hegemonic masculinity and femininity where boys and girls challenge and contest relations of power. The book focuses on the early makings of gender and sexual harassment and shows how violent gender relations are manifest even amongst very young boys and girls. Attention is given to the interconnections with race, class, structural inequalities, as well as the actions of boys and girls as navigate gender and sexuality at school. The book argues that the early years of primary schooling are a key site for the production and reproduction of gender and sexuality. Gender reform strategies are vital in this sector of schooling.This book is an ethnography of teachers and children in grades 1 and 2, and presents arguments about why we should take gender and childhood sexuality seriously in the early years of South African primary schooling. Taking issue with dominant discourses which assumes children’s lack of agency, the book questions the epistemological foundations of childhood discourses that produce innocence. It examines the paradox between teachers’ dominant narratives of childhood innocence and children’s own conceptualisation of gender and sexuality inside the classroom, with peers, in heterosexual games, in the playground and through boyfriend-girlfriend relationships. It examines the nuances and finely situated experiences which draw attention to hegemonic masculinity and femininity where boys and girls challenge and contest relations of power. The book focuses on the early makings of gender and sexual harassment and shows how violent gender relations are manifest even amongst very young boys and girls. Attention is given to the interconnections with race, class, structural inequalities, as well as the actions of boys and girls as navigate gender and sexuality at school. The book argues that the early years of primary schooling are a key site for the production and reproduction of gender and sexuality. Gender reform strategies are vital in this sector of schooling.<p>First book to provide an African/South African lens to the study of gender and childhood sexualities</p><p>In-depth analysis of social and cultural theory surrounding childhood innocence discourse</p><p>Makes practical recommendations for context-specific interventions that work with children in local settings</p><p>Includes supplementary material: sn.pub/extras</p> Professor Deevia Bhana is the DST/NRF South African Research Chair in Gender and Childhood Sexuality and Professor at the University of KwaZulu-Natal, South Africa. She has published widely in the fields of gender, childhood sexualities, young masculinities and schooling.ScienceProfessional Books (2)Science (SC)EBOP41176Social Sciences009789811022388Sociology of Family, Youth and AgingGender StudiesSociology of EducationEarly Childhood Education4912000
18
Social Sciences978-3-030-13859-2BoldRosalyn BoldRosalyn Bold, University College London, London, UKIndigenous Perceptions of the End of the WorldCreating a Cosmopolitics of ChangeXIV, 216 p. 17 illus., 15 illus. in color.12019final84.9925.5090.9427.2874.9922.5099.9930.00Hard cover0Palgrave Studies in Anthropology of SustainabilitySocial SciencesContributed volumeBook216JHMCJHMCPalgrave MacmillanSpringer International Publishing0Available2019-07-102019-06-302019-08-022019-08-0211. Introduction: Creating a Cosmopolitics of Climate Change.- 2. Broken pillars of the Sky. Masewal actions and reflections on modernity, spirits, and a damaged world.- 3. Fragile Time: The redemptive force of the Urarina apocalypse.- 4. The end of days: Climate change, mythistory, and cosmological notions of regeneration.- 5. Contamination, Climate Change and Cosmopolitical Resonance in Highland Bolivia.- 6. Shifting strategies: The myth of Wanamei and the Amazon Indigenous REDD+ programme in Madre de Dios, Peru.- 7. A territory to sustain the world(s): from local awareness and practice to the global crisis.- 8. Relational Ecologists Facing 'the End of a World': Inner Transition, Ecospirituality, and the Ontological Debate.- 9. The Mess is a 'World'! Environmental Diplomats in the Mud of Anthropology.- 10. Epilogue.This edited volume constructs a ‘cosmopolitics’ of climate change, consulting small-scale sustainable communities on whether the world is ending and why, and how we can take action to prevent it. By comparing scientific and indigenous accounts of the same phenomenon, contributors seek to broaden Western understandings of what climate change constitutes. In this context, existing cosmologies are challenged, opening spaces for hegemonic narratives to enter into conversation with the non-modern and construct ‘worlds otherwise’—situations of world change and renewal through climate change. Bold brings together perspectives from Central America, Mexico, the Amazon, and the Andes to converse with scientific narratives of climate change and create cracks that bring new worlds into being for readers.

The chapter “Fragile Time: The Redemptive Force of the Urarina Apocalypse” is available open access under a Creative Commons Attribution 4.0 International License via link.springer.com.		This edited volume constructs a ‘cosmopolitics’ of climate change, consulting small-scale sustainable communities on whether the world is ending and why, and how we can take action to prevent it. By comparing scientific and indigenous accounts of the same phenomenon, contributors seek to broaden Western understandings of what climate change constitutes. In this context, existing cosmologies are challenged, opening spaces for hegemonic narratives to enter into conversation with the non-modern and construct ‘worlds otherwise’—situations of world change and renewal through climate change. Bold brings together perspectives from Central America, Mexico, the Amazon, and the Andes to converse with scientific narratives of climate change and create cracks that bring new worlds into being for readers.<p>One of the first volumes to seriously consider indigenous perspectives on climate change alongside scientific narratives</p><p>Collects indigenous Latin American perspectives on climate change, consumption, cultural change, causality and nature and culture</p><p>Provides a space to move away from modernity as a totalizing explanation of the world to explore new potentials after climate change</p>Rosalyn Bold is a Research Associate in the Centre for the Anthropology of Sustainability at University College London, UK.SciencePalgrave Standard US (P5)Palgrave Standard (P5)EBOP41176Social Sciences009783030138592Sociocultural AnthropologyEthnographyLatin American CultureEnvironmental Social SciencesSocial Structure454000
19
Social Sciences978-3-030-13862-2BoldRosalyn BoldRosalyn Bold, University College London, London, UKIndigenous Perceptions of the End of the WorldCreating a Cosmopolitics of ChangeXIV, 216 p. 17 illus., 15 illus. in color.12019final59.9918.0064.1919.2654.9916.5064.9919.50Soft cover1Palgrave Studies in Anthropology of SustainabilitySocial SciencesContributed volumeBook216JHMCJHMCPalgrave MacmillanSpringer International Publishing0Available2020-08-142019-06-302020-07-102020-07-1011. Introduction: Creating a Cosmopolitics of Climate Change.- 2. Broken pillars of the Sky. Masewal actions and reflections on modernity, spirits, and a damaged world.- 3. Fragile Time: The redemptive force of the Urarina apocalypse.- 4. The end of days: Climate change, mythistory, and cosmological notions of regeneration.- 5. Contamination, Climate Change and Cosmopolitical Resonance in Highland Bolivia.- 6. Shifting strategies: The myth of Wanamei and the Amazon Indigenous REDD+ programme in Madre de Dios, Peru.- 7. A territory to sustain the world(s): from local awareness and practice to the global crisis.- 8. Relational Ecologists Facing 'the End of a World': Inner Transition, Ecospirituality, and the Ontological Debate.- 9. The Mess is a 'World'! Environmental Diplomats in the Mud of Anthropology.- 10. Epilogue.This edited volume constructs a ‘cosmopolitics’ of climate change, consulting small-scale sustainable communities on whether the world is ending and why, and how we can take action to prevent it. By comparing scientific and indigenous accounts of the same phenomenon, contributors seek to broaden Western understandings of what climate change constitutes. In this context, existing cosmologies are challenged, opening spaces for hegemonic narratives to enter into conversation with the non-modern and construct ‘worlds otherwise’—situations of world change and renewal through climate change. Bold brings together perspectives from Central America, Mexico, the Amazon, and the Andes to converse with scientific narratives of climate change and create cracks that bring new worlds into being for readers.

The chapter “Fragile Time: The Redemptive Force of the Urarina Apocalypse” is available open access under a Creative Commons Attribution 4.0 International License via link.springer.com.		This edited volume constructs a ‘cosmopolitics’ of climate change, consulting small-scale sustainable communities on whether the world is ending and why, and how we can take action to prevent it. By comparing scientific and indigenous accounts of the same phenomenon, contributors seek to broaden Western understandings of what climate change constitutes. In this context, existing cosmologies are challenged, opening spaces for hegemonic narratives to enter into conversation with the non-modern and construct ‘worlds otherwise’—situations of world change and renewal through climate change. Bold brings together perspectives from Central America, Mexico, the Amazon, and the Andes to converse with scientific narratives of climate change and create cracks that bring new worlds into being for readers.<p>One of the first volumes to seriously consider indigenous perspectives on climate change alongside scientific narratives</p><p>Collects indigenous Latin American perspectives on climate change, consumption, cultural change, causality and nature and culture</p><p>Provides a space to move away from modernity as a totalizing explanation of the world to explore new potentials after climate change</p>Rosalyn Bold is a Research Associate in the Centre for the Anthropology of Sustainability at University College London, UK.SciencePalgrave Standard US (P5)Palgrave Standard (P5)EBOP41176Social Sciences009783030138622Sociocultural AnthropologyEthnographyLatin American CultureEnvironmental Social SciencesSocial Structure454000
20
Social Sciences978-0-230-57767-1BorehamKlaus Holzkamp; Andrew Boreham; E. Schraube; U. Osterkamp; Tod SloanKlaus Holzkamp; Andrew Boreham; E. Schraube; U. Osterkamp; Tod SloanPsychology from the Standpoint of the SubjectSelected Writings of Klaus HolzkampVIII, 360 p.12013final89.9927.0096.2928.8975.0022.50115.0034.50Hard cover0Critical Theory and Practice in Psychology and the Human SciencesPalgrave Social Sciences CollectionMonographBook360JMSJMAPalgrave MacmillanPalgrave Macmillan UK0Available2013-01-232013-01-232013-01-232013-01-231Acknowledgements Klaus Holzkamp and the Development of Psychology from the Standpoint of the Subject; U.Osterkamp & E.Schraube PART I: BASIC CONCERNS AND CONCEPTS OF SUBJECT SCIENCE PSYCHOLOGY Basis Concepts of Critical Psychology The Development of Critical Psychology as a Subject Science What Could a Psychology from the Standpoint of the Subject Be? Missing the Point: Variable Psychology's Blindness to the Problem's Inherent Coherence PART II: FUNCTIONAL ANALYSES OF PSYCHOLOGICAL CONCEPTS Personality: A Functional Analysis of the Concept Practice: A Functional Analysis of the Concept PART III: DE-SUBJECTIFICATION OF LEARNING IN PSYCHOLOGICAL THEORY AND SCHOOL The Fiction of Learning as Administratively Plannable Musical Life Practice and Music Learning at School PART IV: CONSTRUCTING OTHERNESS The Concept of Antiracist Education: A Subject Science Analysis of its Function Racism and the Unconscious as Understood by Psychoanalysis and Critical Psychology The Colonization of Childhood: Psychological and Psychoanalytical Explanations of Human Development PART V: CONDUCT OF LIFE Psychology: Social Self-Understanding on the Reasons for Action in the Conduct of Everyday Life References IndexThis book introduces the groundbreaking work of the German critical psychologist Klaus Holzkamp. In contrast to contemporary psychology's worldlessness, the writings present a concept of psychology based on the individual's relations to the world and open up new perspectives on human subjectivity, agency and the conduct of everyday life.KLAUS HOLZKAMP was a german psychologist and is considered the founder of critical psychology.
ERNST SCHRAUBE is Associate Professor of Psychology at Roskilde University, Denmark.
UTE OSTERKAMP is Senior Scientist of Psychology at the Free University Berlin, Germany.
ANDREW BOREHAM, Translator, is a lecturer at the Berlin School of Economics, Germany.

SciencePalgrave Standard US (P5)Palgrave Monograph (P6)EBOP41146Palgrave Social Sciences Collection009780230577671Personality and Differential PsychologyCritical PsychologyCommunity Psychology5661000
21
Social Sciences978-1-349-36739-9BorehamKlaus Holzkamp; Andrew Boreham; E. Schraube; U. Osterkamp; Tod SloanKlaus Holzkamp; Andrew Boreham; E. Schraube; U. Osterkamp; Tod SloanPsychology from the Standpoint of the SubjectSelected Writings of Klaus HolzkampVIII, 360 p.12013final54.9916.5058.8417.6549.9915.0059.9918.00Soft cover0Critical Theory and Practice in Psychology and the Human SciencesPalgrave Social Sciences CollectionMonographBook360JMSJMAPalgrave MacmillanPalgrave Macmillan UK0Available2013-01-012013-01-012013-12-312013-12-311Acknowledgements Klaus Holzkamp and the Development of Psychology from the Standpoint of the Subject; U.Osterkamp & E.Schraube PART I: BASIC CONCERNS AND CONCEPTS OF SUBJECT SCIENCE PSYCHOLOGY Basis Concepts of Critical Psychology The Development of Critical Psychology as a Subject Science What Could a Psychology from the Standpoint of the Subject Be? Missing the Point: Variable Psychology's Blindness to the Problem's Inherent Coherence PART II: FUNCTIONAL ANALYSES OF PSYCHOLOGICAL CONCEPTS Personality: A Functional Analysis of the Concept Practice: A Functional Analysis of the Concept PART III: DE-SUBJECTIFICATION OF LEARNING IN PSYCHOLOGICAL THEORY AND SCHOOL The Fiction of Learning as Administratively Plannable Musical Life Practice and Music Learning at School PART IV: CONSTRUCTING OTHERNESS The Concept of Antiracist Education: A Subject Science Analysis of its Function Racism and the Unconscious as Understood by Psychoanalysis and Critical Psychology The Colonization of Childhood: Psychological and Psychoanalytical Explanations of Human Development PART V: CONDUCT OF LIFE Psychology: Social Self-Understanding on the Reasons for Action in the Conduct of Everyday Life References IndexThis book introduces the groundbreaking work of the German critical psychologist Klaus Holzkamp. In contrast to contemporary psychology's worldlessness, the writings present a concept of psychology based on the individual's relations to the world and open up new perspectives on human subjectivity, agency and the conduct of everyday life.KLAUS HOLZKAMP was a german psychologist and is considered the founder of critical psychology.
ERNST SCHRAUBE is Associate Professor of Psychology at Roskilde University, Denmark.
UTE OSTERKAMP is Senior Scientist of Psychology at the Free University Berlin, Germany.
ANDREW BOREHAM, Translator, is a lecturer at the Berlin School of Economics, Germany.

SciencePalgrave Standard US (P5)Palgrave Monograph (P6)EBOP41146Palgrave Social Sciences Collection009781349367399Personality and Differential PsychologyCritical PsychologyCommunity Psychology4667000
22
Social Sciences978-3-319-76414-6BoströmMagnus Boström; Debra J. DavidsonMagnus Boström, Örebro University, Örebro, Sweden; Debra J. Davidson, University of Alberta, Edmonton, AB, , CanadaEnvironment and SocietyConcepts and ChallengesXXXIII, 394 p. 3 illus.12018final79.9924.0085.5925.6869.9921.0089.9927.00Hard cover0Palgrave Studies in Environmental Sociology and PolicySocial SciencesMonographBook394JHBRGBPalgrave MacmillanSpringer International Publishing0Available2018-07-022018-06-132018-05-292018-05-291<div>Ch 1. Introduction: Conceptualizing environment-society relations – Magnus Boström and Debra J. Davidson.- Ch. 2. The Anthropocene: A Narrative in the Making – Rolf Lidskog and Claire Waterton.- Ch. 3. Metabolism – Debra J. Davidson.- Ch. 4. Risk and Resilience – Marja Ylönen.- Ch. 5. Global Environmental Networks and Flows addressing Global Environmental Change – Peter Oosterveer.- Ch. 6. The environmental state and environmental governance – Arthur P.J. Mol.- Ch. 7. Economic Valuation of the Environment – Steve Yearley.- Ch. 8. Environmental Expertise – Rolf Lidskog and Göran Sundqvist.- Ch. 9. The Practice of Green Consumption – Emily Huddart Kennedy and Darcy Hauslik.- Ch. 10. Minding the mundane: Everyday practices as central pillar of sustainability thinking and research – Henrike Rau.- Ch. 11. Environmental Justice – J. Timmons Roberts, David Pellow and Paul Mohai .- Ch. 12. Environmental Democracy: Participation, Deliberation and Citizenship – Frank Fisher.- Ch. 13. Joining people with things. The commons and environmental sociology – Luigi Pellizzoni.- Ch. 14. Spatial frames and the quest for institutional fit – C.S.A. (Kris) Van Koppen and Simon R. Bush.- Ch. 15. Conflicting temporalities of social and environmental change? – Stewart Lockie and Catherine Mei Ling Wong.- Ch. 16. Conclusion – A proposal for a brave new world of conceptual reflexivity - Magnus Boström, Debra J. Davidson, and Stewart Lockie.- Afterword: Irony and Contrarian Imaginations – Matthias Gross.</div><div>
</div>		<div><div>This book offers a critical analysis of core concepts that have influenced contemporary conversations about environment-society relations in academic, political, and civil circles. Considering these conceptualizations are currently shaping responses to environmental crises in fundamental ways, critical reflections on concepts such as the Anthropocene, metabolism, risk, resilience, environmental governance, environmental justice and others, are well-warranted. Contributors to this volume, working across a multitude of areas within environmental social science, scrutinize underlying worldviews and assumptions, asking a common set of key questions: What are the different concepts able to explain? How do they take into account society-environment relations? What social, cultural, or geo-political biases and blinders are inherent? What actions or practices do the concepts inspire? </div><div>
</div><div>The transdisciplinary engagement and reflexivity regarding concepts of environment-society relations represented in these chapters is needed in all spheres of society—in academia, policy and practice—not the least to confront current tendencies of anti-reflexivity and denialism. </div></div><div><div>
</div></div>		<div><div>This book offers a critical analysis of core concepts that have influenced contemporary conversations about environment-society relations in academic, political, and civil circles. Considering these conceptualizations are currently shaping responses to environmental crises in fundamental ways, critical reflections on concepts such as the Anthropocene, metabolism, risk, resilience, environmental governance, environmental justice and others, are well-warranted. Contributors to this volume, working across a multitude of areas within environmental social science, scrutinize underlying worldviews and assumptions, asking a common set of key questions: What are the different concepts able to explain? How do they take into account society-environment relations? What social, cultural, or geo-political biases and blinders are inherent? What actions or practices do the concepts inspire? </div><div>
</div><div>The transdisciplinary engagement and reflexivity regarding concepts of environment-society relations represented in these chapters is needed in all spheres of society—in academia, policy and practice—not the least to confront current tendencies of anti-reflexivity and denialism. </div></div><div>
</div><div>
</div><div>
</div>		<p>Includes Foreword by Raymond Murphy and Afterword by Matthias Gross</p><p>Discusses the major paradigms, concepts, and debates in today’s environmental sciences</p><p>Includes contributions from some of the leading environmental sociologists in the field</p><p>Provides a clear understanding of society-ecology relations from a environmental sociological perspective</p><div><div>Magnus Boström is Professor of Sociology at Örebro University, Sweden, with a theoretical interest and research profile in environmental sociology. His research interest generally concerns politics, representation, consumption and action in relation to a broad variety of transnational environmental and sustainability issues.</div><div>
</div><div>Debra J. Davidson is Professor of Environmental Sociology in the Department of Resource Economics and Environmental Sociology at the University of Alberta, USA. Her key areas of teaching and research include social responses to climate change, and crises and transitions in food and energy systems.</div></div><div>
</div>		SciencePalgrave Standard US (P5)Palgrave Monograph (P6)EBOP41176Social Sciences009783319764146Environmental Social SciencesPhysical GeographyEnvironmental ManagementApplied Ecology683000
23
Social Sciences978-3-030-09483-6BoströmMagnus Boström; Debra J. DavidsonMagnus Boström, Örebro University, Örebro, Sweden; Debra J. Davidson, University of Alberta, Edmonton, AB, , CanadaEnvironment and SocietyConcepts and ChallengesXXXIII, 394 p. 3 illus.12018final79.9924.0085.5925.6869.9921.0089.9927.00Soft cover1Palgrave Studies in Environmental Sociology and PolicySocial SciencesMonographBook (Paperback Initiative)394JHBRGBPalgrave MacmillanSpringer International Publishing0Available2019-01-122019-01-112019-07-022019-07-301<div>Ch 1. Introduction: Conceptualizing environment-society relations – Magnus Boström and Debra J. Davidson.- Ch. 2. The Anthropocene: A Narrative in the Making – Rolf Lidskog and Claire Waterton.- Ch. 3. Metabolism – Debra J. Davidson.- Ch. 4. Risk and Resilience – Marja Ylönen.- Ch. 5. Global Environmental Networks and Flows addressing Global Environmental Change – Peter Oosterveer.- Ch. 6. The environmental state and environmental governance – Arthur P.J. Mol.- Ch. 7. Economic Valuation of the Environment – Steve Yearley.- Ch. 8. Environmental Expertise – Rolf Lidskog and Göran Sundqvist.- Ch. 9. The Practice of Green Consumption – Emily Huddart Kennedy and Darcy Hauslik.- Ch. 10. Minding the mundane: Everyday practices as central pillar of sustainability thinking and research – Henrike Rau.- Ch. 11. Environmental Justice – J. Timmons Roberts, David Pellow and Paul Mohai .- Ch. 12. Environmental Democracy: Participation, Deliberation and Citizenship – Frank Fisher.- Ch. 13. Joining people with things. The commons and environmental sociology – Luigi Pellizzoni.- Ch. 14. Spatial frames and the quest for institutional fit – C.S.A. (Kris) Van Koppen and Simon R. Bush.- Ch. 15. Conflicting temporalities of social and environmental change? – Stewart Lockie and Catherine Mei Ling Wong.- Ch. 16. Conclusion – A proposal for a brave new world of conceptual reflexivity - Magnus Boström, Debra J. Davidson, and Stewart Lockie.- Afterword: Irony and Contrarian Imaginations – Matthias Gross.</div><div>
</div>		<div><div>This book offers a critical analysis of core concepts that have influenced contemporary conversations about environment-society relations in academic, political, and civil circles. Considering these conceptualizations are currently shaping responses to environmental crises in fundamental ways, critical reflections on concepts such as the Anthropocene, metabolism, risk, resilience, environmental governance, environmental justice and others, are well-warranted. Contributors to this volume, working across a multitude of areas within environmental social science, scrutinize underlying worldviews and assumptions, asking a common set of key questions: What are the different concepts able to explain? How do they take into account society-environment relations? What social, cultural, or geo-political biases and blinders are inherent? What actions or practices do the concepts inspire? </div><div>
</div><div>The transdisciplinary engagement and reflexivity regarding concepts of environment-society relations represented in these chapters is needed in all spheres of society—in academia, policy and practice—not the least to confront current tendencies of anti-reflexivity and denialism. </div></div><div><div>
</div></div>		<div><div>This book offers a critical analysis of core concepts that have influenced contemporary conversations about environment-society relations in academic, political, and civil circles. Considering these conceptualizations are currently shaping responses to environmental crises in fundamental ways, critical reflections on concepts such as the Anthropocene, metabolism, risk, resilience, environmental governance, environmental justice and others, are well-warranted. Contributors to this volume, working across a multitude of areas within environmental social science, scrutinize underlying worldviews and assumptions, asking a common set of key questions: What are the different concepts able to explain? How do they take into account society-environment relations? What social, cultural, or geo-political biases and blinders are inherent? What actions or practices do the concepts inspire? </div><div>
</div><div>The transdisciplinary engagement and reflexivity regarding concepts of environment-society relations represented in these chapters is needed in all spheres of society—in academia, policy and practice—not the least to confront current tendencies of anti-reflexivity and denialism. </div></div><div>
</div><div>
</div><div>
</div>		<p>Includes Foreword by Raymond Murphy and Afterword by Matthias Gross</p><p>Discusses the major paradigms, concepts, and debates in today’s environmental sciences</p><p>Includes contributions from some of the leading environmental sociologists in the field</p><p>Provides a clear understanding of society-ecology relations from a environmental sociological perspective</p><div><div>Magnus Boström is Professor of Sociology at Örebro University, Sweden, with a theoretical interest and research profile in environmental sociology. His research interest generally concerns politics, representation, consumption and action in relation to a broad variety of transnational environmental and sustainability issues.</div><div>
</div><div>Debra J. Davidson is Professor of Environmental Sociology in the Department of Resource Economics and Environmental Sociology at the University of Alberta, USA. Her key areas of teaching and research include social responses to climate change, and crises and transitions in food and energy systems.</div></div><div>
</div>		SciencePalgrave Standard US (P5)Palgrave Monograph (P6)EBOP41176Social Sciences009783030094836Environmental Social SciencesPhysical GeographyEnvironmental ManagementApplied Ecology557000
24
Social Sciencesx978-1-137-57494-7BotermanWillem Boterman; Wouter van GentWillem Boterman, University of Amsterdam, Amsterdam, The Netherlands; Wouter van Gent, University of Amsterdam, AmsterdamMaking the Middle-class CityThe Politics of Gentrifying AmsterdamXVII, 246 p.12023final114.9934.50123.0436.91100.0030.0065.0019.50Hard cover0The Contemporary CitySocial SciencesMonographBook246JHBKCUPalgrave MacmillanPalgrave Macmillan US0Available2022-11-252022-11-252022-12-122022-12-1211. Introduction.- 2. Class, State and Urban Space.- 3. Social and Spatial Transformations.- 4. The Electoral Geography Of Amsterdam.- 5. Political and Institutional Transformations.- 6. Symbolic Politics within the Local State.- 7. Conclusion.<div>​This book seeks to understand the urban transformation of Amsterdam over a 40-year period. In addition to charting social and economic changes associated with gentrification, it analyses the electoral dynamics and middle-class politics that have underpinned Amsterdam’s change to a middle-class city.
</div><div>
</div><div>Willem Boterman & Wouter van Gent are Urban and Political Geographers at the department of Geography, Planning, and International Development Studies at the University of Amsterdam, The Netherlands.
</div><div>
</div><div>‘How can we explain urban transformations of the past decades? Boterman and Van Gent take on the challenge to explain how and why Social-democratic Amsterdam became a middle-class city. They conceptualize the socio-political cycle of urban transformation to meticulously analyse the growth and growing domination of middle classes that has transformed politics, the local state and urban policies, and has undermined Amsterdam’s quintessential social-redistributive characteristics. The book presents a terrific case study to bring to light the key processes that are reconfigurating European cities...and beyond.’ -Professor Patrick le Gales (SciencePo, Paris)
‘Making the Middle-Class City is the result of a ten-year long ambitious project linking social-economic restructuring, electoral and political shifts to housing, neighbourhood and city-wide transformations. The key innovation of the book is that Boterman and Van Gent demonstrate how the different changes add up to nothing less than the gentrification of not only the city but also of City Hall. They dissect how policy makers and bureaucrats embody middle-class interests and act upon those interests. The paradoxical result is a city that is increasingly unaffordable to both working- and middle-class households. This book speaks to current tensions in many cities: between different class interests, between tourism-led growth and housing affordability, and ultimately between social justice and neoliberalism. It will be required reading for anyone who wants to understand how we got there.’
-Professor Manuel Aalbers (University of Leuven)
‘A superb book that tells us what is distinctive about processes of gentrification in Amsterdam. Outs the peddling of ‘soft gentrification’ by a left-liberal Dutch state and evidences the hard edged impacts of this. The striking correlations between social and electoral change point to the possible futures of gentrifying and diversifying cities elsewhere in the world, beyond Amsterdam. An excellent addition to the gentrification studies literature.’
- Professor Loretta Lees (Director of the Initiative on Cities, Boston University, USA)</div>
<div>​This book seeks to understand the urban transformation of Amsterdam over a 40-year period. In addition to charting social and economic changes associated with gentrification, it analyses the electoral dynamics and middle-class politics that have underpinned Amsterdam’s change to a middle-class city.
</div>		<p>Provides a new vision for urbanism</p><p>Uses Amsterdam as case study</p><p>Recontextualizes class politics within urban space</p>Willem Boterman & Wouter van Gent are Urban and Political Geographers at the department of Geography, Planning, and International Development Studies at the University of Amsterdam, The Netherlands.SciencePalgrave Standard US (P5)Palgrave Monograph (P6)EBOP41176Social Sciences009781137574947Urban SociologyUrban EconomicsUrban Policy473000
25
Social Sciences978-3-030-06568-3BuikstraJane E. BuikstraJane E. Buikstra, Arizona State University, Tempe, AZ, USABioarchaeologists Speak OutDeep Time Perspectives on Contemporary IssuesXI, 334 p. 23 illus., 12 illus. in color.12019final139.9942.00149.7944.94119.9936.00159.9948.00Soft cover1Bioarchaeology and Social TheorySocial SciencesContributed volumeBook (Paperback Initiative)334HDSpringerSpringer International Publishing0Available2019-01-082019-01-072019-11-122019-12-101<div><div>
</div><div>1: Bioarchaeologists Speak Out: An Introduction.- 2: Knowing Your Audience: Reactions to the Human Body, Dead and Undead.- 3: Bioarchaeological Evidence for Prehistoric Violence: Use and Misuse in the Popular Media.- 4: Bridging the Precontact and Postcontact Divide in Eastern North America: Prior Conditions Set the Stage for Historic-Period Outcomes.- 5: Misconceptions about the Bioarchaeology of Plague.- 6: Changing The Climate: Bioarchaeology Responds to Deterministic Thinking about Human-Environmental Interactions in the Past.- 7: Stone agers in the Fast-Lane? How bioarchaeologists can address the Paleo Diet myth.- 8: Ancient Migrations: Biodistance, genetics, and the persistence of typological thinking.- 9: Opening up the family tree: promoting more diverse and inclusive studies of family, kinship, and relatedness in Bioarchaeology.- 10: The Fallacy of the Transgender Skeleton.- 11: The Body-as-Evidence Paradigm in Domestic and International Forensic Anthropology.- 12: Contributions of Mummy Science to Public Perception of the Past.- 13: Writing Bioarchaeological Stories to Right Past Wrongs.- 14: Bioarchaeology and the Media: Anthropology SciComm in a Post-Truth Landscape. </div><div>
</div></div>		Bioarchaeologists who study human remains in ancient, historic and contemporary settings are securely anchored within anthropology as anthropologists, yet they have not taken on the pundits the way other subdisciplines within anthropology have. Popular science authors frequently and selectively use bioarchaeological data on demography, disease, violence, migration and diet to buttress their poorly formed arguments about general trends in human behavior and health, beginning with our earliest ancestors. While bioarchaeologists are experts on these subjects, bioarchaeology and bioarchaeological approaches have largely remained invisible to the public eye. <div>
</div>Current issues such as climate change, droughts, warfare, violence, famine, and the effects of disease are media mainstays and are subjects familiar to bioarchaeologists, many of whom have empirical data and informed viewpoints, both for topical exploration and also for predictions based on human behavior in deep time. <div>
</div><div>The contributions in this volume will explore the how and where the data has been misused, present new ways of using evidence in the service of making new discoveries, and demonstrate ways that our long term interdisciplinarity lends itself to transdisciplinary wisdom. We also consider possible reasons for bioarchaeological invisibility and offer advice concerning the absolute necessity of bioarchaeologists speaking out through social media.</div>		Bioarchaeologists who study human remains in ancient, historic and contemporary settings are securely anchored within anthropology as anthropologists, yet they have not taken on the pundits the way other subdisciplines within anthropology have. Popular science authors frequently and selectively use bioarchaeological data on demography, disease, violence, migration and diet to buttress their poorly formed arguments about general trends in human behavior and health, beginning with our earliest ancestors. While bioarchaeologists are experts on these subjects, bioarchaeology and bioarchaeological approaches have largely remained invisible to the public eye.

Current issues such as climate change, droughts, warfare, violence, famine, and the effects of disease are media mainstays and are subjects familiar to bioarchaeologists, many of whom have empirical data and informed viewpoints, both for topical exploration and also for predictions based on human behavior in deep time. <div>
The contributions in this volume will explore the how and where the data has been misused, present new ways of using evidence in the service of making new discoveries, and demonstrate ways that our long term interdisciplinarity lends itself to transdisciplinary wisdom. We also consider possible reasons for bioarchaeological invisibility and offer advice concerning the absolute necessity of bioarchaeologists speaking out through social media.</div>		<p>Bioarchaeological data are frequently overlooked, used selectively, and misused by popular writers and the media in characterizing, for example, past patterns of conflict, nutrition related disease, epidemics, massacres, and general health when faced with climate change</p><p>Many contemporary topics are frequently misrepresented to non-scholarly audiences and why bioarchaeological data and bioarchaeologists are too infrequently engaged in public representations</p><p>Bioarchaeologists need more active and engaged professionals to become public intellectuals in order to prevent misconceptions and demonstrate the importance of our research to modern populations.</p>Jane E. Buikstra is Regents’ Professor of Bioarchaeology and Founding Director, Center for Bioarchaeological Research in the School of Human Evolution and Social Change at Arizona State University. Professor Buikstra was elected to the National Academy of Sciences (1987), and she is past president of the American Association of Physical Anthropologists, the American Anthropological Association and the Paleopathology Association. She is also president of the Center for American Archeology. Dr. Buikstra has received the Pomerance Award for Scientific Contributions to Archaeology by the Archaeological Institute of America (2005), the T. Dale Stewart Award by the American Academy of Forensic Sciences (2008), the Charles R. Darwin Lifetime Achievement Award from the American Association of Physical Anthropologists (2008), the Eve Cockburn Award for Service from the Paleopathology Association (2011), an honorary Doctor of Science Degree from Durham University (UK) ( 2014), and The Lloyd Cotsen Prize for Lifetime Achievement in World Archaeology (2016).<div>
</div><div>Dr. Buikstra defined the discipline of bioarchaeology, an international field that enriches archaeological knowledge of past peoples through scientific study of their remains and archaeological/historical contexts. Her research regions span the Americas and includes the Eastern Mediterranean. She has published more than 20 books and 200 articles/chapters; she has mentored more than 50 doctoral students. Professor Buikstra was the inaugural editor-in-chief of the International Journal of Paleopathology. Among her current research projects, she is investigating the evolutionary history of ancient tuberculosis in the Americas based on archaeologically-recovered pathogen DNA. </div><div>
</div>		ScienceProfessional Books (2)Science (SC)EBOP41176Social Sciences009783030065683Archaeology534000
26
Social Sciences978-3-319-93011-4BuikstraJane E. BuikstraJane E. Buikstra, Arizona State University, Tempe, AZ, USABioarchaeologists Speak OutDeep Time Perspectives on Contemporary IssuesXI, 334 p. 23 illus., 12 illus. in color.12019final139.9942.00149.7944.94119.9936.00159.9948.00Hard cover0Bioarchaeology and Social TheorySocial SciencesContributed volumeBook334HDSpringerSpringer International Publishing0Available2018-11-122018-10-262018-09-052018-09-051<div><div>
</div><div>1: Bioarchaeologists Speak Out: An Introduction.- 2: Knowing Your Audience: Reactions to the Human Body, Dead and Undead.- 3: Bioarchaeological Evidence for Prehistoric Violence: Use and Misuse in the Popular Media.- 4: Bridging the Precontact and Postcontact Divide in Eastern North America: Prior Conditions Set the Stage for Historic-Period Outcomes.- 5: Misconceptions about the Bioarchaeology of Plague.- 6: Changing The Climate: Bioarchaeology Responds to Deterministic Thinking about Human-Environmental Interactions in the Past.- 7: Stone agers in the Fast-Lane? How bioarchaeologists can address the Paleo Diet myth.- 8: Ancient Migrations: Biodistance, genetics, and the persistence of typological thinking.- 9: Opening up the family tree: promoting more diverse and inclusive studies of family, kinship, and relatedness in Bioarchaeology.- 10: The Fallacy of the Transgender Skeleton.- 11: The Body-as-Evidence Paradigm in Domestic and International Forensic Anthropology.- 12: Contributions of Mummy Science to Public Perception of the Past.- 13: Writing Bioarchaeological Stories to Right Past Wrongs.- 14: Bioarchaeology and the Media: Anthropology SciComm in a Post-Truth Landscape. </div><div>
</div></div>		Bioarchaeologists who study human remains in ancient, historic and contemporary settings are securely anchored within anthropology as anthropologists, yet they have not taken on the pundits the way other subdisciplines within anthropology have. Popular science authors frequently and selectively use bioarchaeological data on demography, disease, violence, migration and diet to buttress their poorly formed arguments about general trends in human behavior and health, beginning with our earliest ancestors. While bioarchaeologists are experts on these subjects, bioarchaeology and bioarchaeological approaches have largely remained invisible to the public eye. <div>
</div>Current issues such as climate change, droughts, warfare, violence, famine, and the effects of disease are media mainstays and are subjects familiar to bioarchaeologists, many of whom have empirical data and informed viewpoints, both for topical exploration and also for predictions based on human behavior in deep time. <div>
</div><div>The contributions in this volume will explore the how and where the data has been misused, present new ways of using evidence in the service of making new discoveries, and demonstrate ways that our long term interdisciplinarity lends itself to transdisciplinary wisdom. We also consider possible reasons for bioarchaeological invisibility and offer advice concerning the absolute necessity of bioarchaeologists speaking out through social media.</div>		Bioarchaeologists who study human remains in ancient, historic and contemporary settings are securely anchored within anthropology as anthropologists, yet they have not taken on the pundits the way other subdisciplines within anthropology have. Popular science authors frequently and selectively use bioarchaeological data on demography, disease, violence, migration and diet to buttress their poorly formed arguments about general trends in human behavior and health, beginning with our earliest ancestors. While bioarchaeologists are experts on these subjects, bioarchaeology and bioarchaeological approaches have largely remained invisible to the public eye.

Current issues such as climate change, droughts, warfare, violence, famine, and the effects of disease are media mainstays and are subjects familiar to bioarchaeologists, many of whom have empirical data and informed viewpoints, both for topical exploration and also for predictions based on human behavior in deep time. <div>
The contributions in this volume will explore the how and where the data has been misused, present new ways of using evidence in the service of making new discoveries, and demonstrate ways that our long term interdisciplinarity lends itself to transdisciplinary wisdom. We also consider possible reasons for bioarchaeological invisibility and offer advice concerning the absolute necessity of bioarchaeologists speaking out through social media.</div>		<p>Bioarchaeological data are frequently overlooked, used selectively, and misused by popular writers and the media in characterizing, for example, past patterns of conflict, nutrition related disease, epidemics, massacres, and general health when faced with climate change</p><p>Many contemporary topics are frequently misrepresented to non-scholarly audiences and why bioarchaeological data and bioarchaeologists are too infrequently engaged in public representations</p><p>Bioarchaeologists need more active and engaged professionals to become public intellectuals in order to prevent misconceptions and demonstrate the importance of our research to modern populations.</p>Jane E. Buikstra is Regents’ Professor of Bioarchaeology and Founding Director, Center for Bioarchaeological Research in the School of Human Evolution and Social Change at Arizona State University. Professor Buikstra was elected to the National Academy of Sciences (1987), and she is past president of the American Association of Physical Anthropologists, the American Anthropological Association and the Paleopathology Association. She is also president of the Center for American Archeology. Dr. Buikstra has received the Pomerance Award for Scientific Contributions to Archaeology by the Archaeological Institute of America (2005), the T. Dale Stewart Award by the American Academy of Forensic Sciences (2008), the Charles R. Darwin Lifetime Achievement Award from the American Association of Physical Anthropologists (2008), the Eve Cockburn Award for Service from the Paleopathology Association (2011), an honorary Doctor of Science Degree from Durham University (UK) ( 2014), and The Lloyd Cotsen Prize for Lifetime Achievement in World Archaeology (2016).<div>
</div><div>Dr. Buikstra defined the discipline of bioarchaeology, an international field that enriches archaeological knowledge of past peoples through scientific study of their remains and archaeological/historical contexts. Her research regions span the Americas and includes the Eastern Mediterranean. She has published more than 20 books and 200 articles/chapters; she has mentored more than 50 doctoral students. Professor Buikstra was the inaugural editor-in-chief of the International Journal of Paleopathology. Among her current research projects, she is investigating the evolutionary history of ancient tuberculosis in the Americas based on archaeologically-recovered pathogen DNA. </div><div>
</div>		ScienceProfessional Books (2)Science (SC)EBOP41176Social Sciences009783319930114Archaeology688000
27
Social Sciences978-3-319-79065-7CampbellColin CampbellColin Campbell, University of York, York, UKThe Romantic Ethic and the Spirit of Modern ConsumerismNew Extended EditionXII, 384 p.22018final59.9918.0064.1919.2654.9916.5064.9919.50Soft cover0Cultural SociologySocial SciencesMonographBook384JFSRJFCPalgrave MacmillanSpringer International Publishing0WorldwideAvailable2018-06-152018-06-062018-06-252018-06-25119871. Introduction.- 2. The Spirit of Modern Consumerism.- 3. Accounting for the Consumer Revolution in Eighteenth Century England.- 4. The Puzzle of Modern Consumerism.- 5. Traditional and Modern Hedonism.- 6. Modern Autonomous Imaginative Hedonism.- 7. The Romantic Ethic.- 8. The Other Protestant Ethic.- 9. The Ethic of Feeling.- 10. The Aristocratic Ethic.- 11. The Romantic Ethic.- 12. Conclusion.Originally published in 1987, Colin Campbell’s classic treatise on the sociology of consumption has become one of the most widely cited texts in sociology, anthropology, cultural studies, and the history of ideas. In the thirty years since its publication, The Romantic Ethic and the Spirit of Modern Consumerism has lost none of its impact. If anything, the growing commodification of society, the increased attention to consumer studies and marketing, and the ever-proliferating range of purchasable goods and services have made Campbell’s rereading of Weber more urgent still. As Campbell uncovers how and why a consumer-oriented society emerged from a Europe that once embodied Weber’s Protestant ethic, he delivers a rich theorization of the modern logics and values structuring consumer behavior. This new edition, featuring an extended Introduction from the author and an Afterword from researcher Karin M. Ekström, makes clear how this foundational work aligns with contemporary theory in cultural sociology, while also serving as major influence on consumer studies.<div>Originally published in 1987, Colin Campbell’s classic treatise on the sociology of consumption has become one of the most widely cited texts in sociology, anthropology, cultural studies, and the history of ideas. In the thirty years since its publication, The Romantic Ethic and the Spirit of Modern Consumerism has lost none of its impact. If anything, the growing commodification of society, the increased attention to consumer studies and marketing, and the ever-proliferating range of purchasable goods and services have made Campbell’s rereading of Weber more urgent still. As Campbell uncovers how and why a consumer-oriented society emerged from a Europe that once embodied Weber’s Protestant ethic, he delivers a rich theorization of the modern logics and values structuring consumer behavior. This new edition, featuring an extended Introduction from the author and an Afterword from researcher Karin M. Ekström, makes clear how this foundational work aligns with contemporary theory in cultural sociology, while also serving as major influence on consumer studies.
</div>		<p>Highly interdisciplinary and path-breaking book theorizing modern consumer society, its historical origins, and cultural context</p><p>Grapples with the complex sociological conundrum of the emergence of a consumer-oriented society in a Europe that once valued Weber's Protestant ethic</p><p>Updates one of the most widely cited works in sociology, especially in the sub-fields of sociology of culture, sociology of consumption, and sociological theory</p>Colin Campbell is Professor Emeritus of Sociology at the University of York, UK. His previous books include The Easternization of The West (2007), The Shopping Experience (jointly edited with Pasi Falk, 1997), and The Myth of Social Action (1996), among others. <div>
</div>		SciencePalgrave Standard US (P5)Palgrave Monograph (P6)EBOP41176Social Sciences009783319790657Sociology of CultureCultural StudiesSociological TheoryGerman IdealismConsumer BehaviorBehavioral Sciences and Psychology516000
28
Social Sciences978-3-319-63548-4CookHaruko Minegishi Cook; Janet S. Shibamoto-SmithHaruko Minegishi Cook, University of Hawaii at Manoa, Honolulu, HI, , USA; Janet S. Shibamoto-Smith, University of California, Davis, Davis, CA, , USAJapanese at WorkPoliteness, Power, and Personae in Japanese Workplace DiscourseIX, 234 p. 1 illus. in color.12018final79.9924.0085.5925.6869.9921.0089.9927.00Hard cover0Communicating in Professions and OrganizationsSocial SciencesContributed volumeBook234CFBCBPalgrave MacmillanSpringer International Publishing0Available2018-04-172018-04-072018-03-022018-03-021Chapter 1. Bowing Incorrectly: Aesthetic labor and expert knowledge in Japanese business etiquette training; Cynthia Dickel Dunn.- Chapter 2. Socialization to acting, feeling, and thinking as shakaijin: New employee orientations in a Japanese company; Haruko Minegishi Cook.- Chapter 3. Representing the Japanese workplace: Linguistic strategies for getting the work done; Janet S. Shibamoto-Smith.- Chapter 4. “Sarariiman” and the performance of masculinities at work: An analysis of interactions at business meetings at a multinational corporation in Japan; Junko Saito.- Chapter 5. Constructing identity in the Japanese workplace through dialectal and honorific shifts; Andrew Barke.- Chapter 6. Humor and laughter in Japanese business meetings; Kazuyo Murata.- Chapter 7. Directives in Japanese workplace discourse; Naomi Geyer.- Chapter 8. Terms of address and identity in American-Japanese workplace interaction; Stephen J. Moody.This book empirically explores how different linguistic resources are utilized to achieve appropriate workplace role inhabitance and to achieve work-oriented communicative ends in a variety of workplaces in Japan. Appropriate role inhabitance is seen to include considerations of gender and interpersonal familiarity, along with speaker orientation to normative structures for marking power and politeness. This uniquely researched edited collection will appeal to scholars of workplace discourse and Japanese sociolinguistics, as well as Japanese language instructors and adult learners of Japanese. It is sure to make a major contribution to the cross-linguistic/cultural study of workplace discourse in the globalized context of the twenty-first century. <div>
</div><div>Haruko Minegishi Cook is Professor of Japanese at the University of Hawaii at Manoa, USA. Her main research interests include language socialization, discourse analysis, and pragmatics. She has published widely on Japanese sentence-final particles and honorifics in edited volumes and major journals.
<div>
</div><div>Janet S. Shibamoto-Smith is Professor Emerita of Anthropology at the University of California, Davis, USA. She is a specialist in Japanese language, society and culture, with an emphasis on the interaction between ideology and practice. Publications include Japanese Women's Language (1985), the edited volume Japanese Language, Gender, and Ideology (with Shigeko Okamoto, 2004), and the The Social Life of the Japanese Language: Cultural Discourses and Situated Practice (co-authored with Shigeko Okamoto, 2016).
</div></div>		This book empirically explores how different linguistic resources are utilized to achieve appropriate workplace role inhabitance and to achieve work-oriented communicative ends in a variety of workplaces in Japan. Appropriate role inhabitance is seen to include considerations of gender and interpersonal familiarity, along with speaker orientation to normative structures for marking power and politeness. This uniquely researched edited collection will appeal to scholars of workplace discourse and Japanese sociolinguistics, as well as Japanese language instructors and adult learners of Japanese. It is sure to make a major contribution to the cross-linguistic/cultural study of workplace discourse in the globalized context of the twenty-first century.<p>One of the first books to provide detailed empirical studies of aspects of the Japanese workplace based on naturally occurring data</p><p>Offers empirical findings on Japanese workplace practices in analytic frameworks that facilitate comparison with those of Western studies on workplace discourse</p><p>Significantly contributes to the cross-linguistic/cultural study of business discourse in the globalized context of the twenty-first century</p><p>Includes chapters on foreign-invested companies in Japan, and workplace socialization of recent graduates – both critical areas which have been understudied.</p>Haruko Minegishi Cook is Professor of Japanese at the University of Hawaii at Manoa, USA. Her main research interests include language socialization, discourse analysis, and pragmatics. She has published widely on Japanese sentence-final particles and honorifics in edited volumes and major journals.
<div>
</div><div>Janet S. Shibamoto-Smith is Professor Emerita of Anthropology at the University of California, Davis, USA. She is a specialist in Japanese language, society and culture, with an emphasis on the interaction between ideology and practice. </div><div>
</div>		SciencePalgrave Standard US (P5)Palgrave Standard (P5)EBOP41176Social Sciences009783319635484SociolinguisticsAsian LanguagesPragmaticsMultilingualismResearch Methods in Language and LinguisticsPhilosophy of the Self551000
29
Social Sciences978-3-030-09695-3CookHaruko Minegishi Cook; Janet S. Shibamoto-SmithHaruko Minegishi Cook, University of Hawaii at Manoa, Honolulu, HI, , USA; Janet S. Shibamoto-Smith, University of California, Davis, Davis, CA, , USAJapanese at WorkPoliteness, Power, and Personae in Japanese Workplace DiscourseIX, 234 p. 1 illus. in color.12018final56.9917.1060.9818.2949.9915.0064.9919.50Soft cover1Communicating in Professions and OrganizationsSocial SciencesContributed volumeBook (Paperback Initiative)234CFBCBPalgrave MacmillanSpringer International Publishing0Available2018-12-192018-12-212019-04-172019-05-151Chapter 1. Bowing Incorrectly: Aesthetic labor and expert knowledge in Japanese business etiquette training; Cynthia Dickel Dunn.- Chapter 2. Socialization to acting, feeling, and thinking as shakaijin: New employee orientations in a Japanese company; Haruko Minegishi Cook.- Chapter 3. Representing the Japanese workplace: Linguistic strategies for getting the work done; Janet S. Shibamoto-Smith.- Chapter 4. “Sarariiman” and the performance of masculinities at work: An analysis of interactions at business meetings at a multinational corporation in Japan; Junko Saito.- Chapter 5. Constructing identity in the Japanese workplace through dialectal and honorific shifts; Andrew Barke.- Chapter 6. Humor and laughter in Japanese business meetings; Kazuyo Murata.- Chapter 7. Directives in Japanese workplace discourse; Naomi Geyer.- Chapter 8. Terms of address and identity in American-Japanese workplace interaction; Stephen J. Moody.This book empirically explores how different linguistic resources are utilized to achieve appropriate workplace role inhabitance and to achieve work-oriented communicative ends in a variety of workplaces in Japan. Appropriate role inhabitance is seen to include considerations of gender and interpersonal familiarity, along with speaker orientation to normative structures for marking power and politeness. This uniquely researched edited collection will appeal to scholars of workplace discourse and Japanese sociolinguistics, as well as Japanese language instructors and adult learners of Japanese. It is sure to make a major contribution to the cross-linguistic/cultural study of workplace discourse in the globalized context of the twenty-first century. <div>
</div><div>Haruko Minegishi Cook is Professor of Japanese at the University of Hawaii at Manoa, USA. Her main research interests include language socialization, discourse analysis, and pragmatics. She has published widely on Japanese sentence-final particles and honorifics in edited volumes and major journals.
<div>
</div><div>Janet S. Shibamoto-Smith is Professor Emerita of Anthropology at the University of California, Davis, USA. She is a specialist in Japanese language, society and culture, with an emphasis on the interaction between ideology and practice. Publications include Japanese Women's Language (1985), the edited volume Japanese Language, Gender, and Ideology (with Shigeko Okamoto, 2004), and the The Social Life of the Japanese Language: Cultural Discourses and Situated Practice (co-authored with Shigeko Okamoto, 2016).
</div></div>		This book empirically explores how different linguistic resources are utilized to achieve appropriate workplace role inhabitance and to achieve work-oriented communicative ends in a variety of workplaces in Japan. Appropriate role inhabitance is seen to include considerations of gender and interpersonal familiarity, along with speaker orientation to normative structures for marking power and politeness. This uniquely researched edited collection will appeal to scholars of workplace discourse and Japanese sociolinguistics, as well as Japanese language instructors and adult learners of Japanese. It is sure to make a major contribution to the cross-linguistic/cultural study of workplace discourse in the globalized context of the twenty-first century.<p>One of the first books to provide detailed empirical studies of aspects of the Japanese workplace based on naturally occurring data</p><p>Offers empirical findings on Japanese workplace practices in analytic frameworks that facilitate comparison with those of Western studies on workplace discourse</p><p>Significantly contributes to the cross-linguistic/cultural study of business discourse in the globalized context of the twenty-first century</p><p>Includes chapters on foreign-invested companies in Japan, and workplace socialization of recent graduates – both critical areas which have been understudied.</p>Haruko Minegishi Cook is Professor of Japanese at the University of Hawaii at Manoa, USA. Her main research interests include language socialization, discourse analysis, and pragmatics. She has published widely on Japanese sentence-final particles and honorifics in edited volumes and major journals.
<div>
</div><div>Janet S. Shibamoto-Smith is Professor Emerita of Anthropology at the University of California, Davis, USA. She is a specialist in Japanese language, society and culture, with an emphasis on the interaction between ideology and practice. </div><div>
</div>		SciencePalgrave Standard US (P5)Palgrave Standard (P5)EBOP41176Social Sciences009783030096953SociolinguisticsAsian LanguagesPragmaticsMultilingualismResearch Methods in Language and LinguisticsPhilosophy of the Self454000
30
Social Sciences978-3-030-25361-5CummingsSherry Cummings; Nancy P. KropfSherry Cummings, University of Tennessee, Knoxville, TN, USA; Nancy P. Kropf, Georgia State University, Atlanta, GA, USASenior CohousingA New Way Forward for Active Older AdultsIX, 82 p. 26 illus., 25 illus. in color.12020final59.9918.0064.1919.2654.9916.5064.9919.50Soft cover0SpringerBriefs in AgingSocial SciencesBrief/PivotBook82JFSP31MJXSpringerSpringer International Publishing0Available2019-07-242019-07-132019-08-292019-08-291Section 1: Defining and Describing ICs.- Chapter 1: What are Intentional Communities?.- Chapter 2: Setting the Framework.- Section 2: Comparing Intentional Communities in U.S..- Chapter 3: The Mission Statement.- Chapter 4: Resident Populations.- Chapter 5: Location and Design.- Chapter 6: Formation Process.- Chapter 7: Management and Governance.- Section 3: The Lived Experience: Voices of Members.- Chapter 8: Formation and Development of Community.- Chapter 9: Experiences of the OAIC Life.- Chapter 10: Conclusion: Where to go from here.- Resources.<div><div>This book presents a concise description and qualitative exploration of a new residential option for older adults: senior cohousing. It describes the practical, structural and communal aspects of senior cohousing and shares the lived experiences of actual residents. Pursuing an existential-phenomenological approach, the authors visited a selection of senior cohousing communities throughout the US and interviewed members to investigate their experiences in several regards: gathering together; developing the mission and architectural design; defining member expectations for the community; and engaging in cooperative self-management, consensus building, shared tasks and mutual activities as an ongoing way of life. </div><div>
</div><div>In addition, the authors explored the benefits, challenges and surprises that community members have encountered along the way, and what these experiences have meant for their lives. Given its unique insights, the book offers a valuable resource for academics and all those working and interested in gerontology, sociology, psychology, nursing, public health, housing and the consumer sciences. It will also benefit active older adults who are considering new housing options.</div></div><div>
</div><div>
</div>		<div>This book presents a concise description and qualitative exploration of a new residential option for older adults: senior cohousing. It describes the practical, structural and communal aspects of senior cohousing and shares the lived experiences of actual residents. Pursuing an existential-phenomenological approach, the authors visited a selection of senior cohousing communities throughout the US and interviewed members to investigate their experiences in several regards: gathering together; developing the mission and architectural design; defining member expectations for the community; and engaging in cooperative self-management, consensus building, shared tasks and mutual activities as an ongoing way of life. </div><div>
</div><div>In addition, the authors explored the benefits, challenges and surprises that community members have encountered along the way, and what these experiences have meant for their lives. Given its unique insights, the book offers a valuable resource for academics and all those working and interested in gerontology, sociology, psychology, nursing, public health, housing and the consumer sciences. It will also benefit active older adults who are considering new housing options.</div><div>
</div>		<p>Offers a comprehensive look at an emerging approach to housing and care for older adults in the United States</p><p>Describes the demographics and finances of Older Adult Intentional Communities</p><p>Explores and describes what draws people to become community members, how they operate, and their lived experiences</p>Dr. Sherry Cummings is a Professor and Associate Dean at the University of Tennessee College of Social Work (UTCSW). She is a Fellow of the Gerontological Society of America, a Past President of the Association of Gerontological Education in Social Work (AGESW), and a John A. Hartford Geriatric Social Work Scholar. Dr. Cummings’ area of research focuses on aging and mental health, in particular, older adults with depression, severe mental illness and alcohol misuse disorders. Her work has explored mental health issues and psychological well-being among older adults in multiple settings including assisted living facilities, public housing for older adults, and the general community. She has published over 50 articles and four books, and frequently presents her work at national and international conferences. Nancy P. Kropf is Dean of Perimeter College and a Professor at the School of Social Work, Georgia State University. Dr. Kropf’s main area of research is late life caregiving relationships, with a focus on older adults as care providers. She is the author or editor of ten books and ninety articles and chapters in related areas. She has served as the President of the Association of Gerontology Education – Social Work (AGE – SW), past editor of the Practice Forum for the Journal of Gerontological Social Work, and past Treasurer and (current) Fellow of the Gerontological Society of America. <div>
</div>		ScienceProfessional Books (2)Science (SC)EBOP41176Social Sciences009783030253615AgeingGeriatrics454000
31
Social Sciencesx978-3-030-57539-7de Graaf-van DintherRutger de Graaf-van DintherRutger de Graaf-van Dinther, Rotterdam University of Applied Sciences, Rotterdam, The NetherlandsClimate Resilient Urban AreasGovernance, design and development in coastal delta citiesXII, 218 p. 54 illus., 53 illus. in color.12021final59.9918.0064.1919.2654.9916.5064.9919.50Soft cover1Palgrave Studies in Climate Resilient SocietiesSocial SciencesBrief/PivotBook218JRNPGPalgrave MacmillanSpringer International Publishing0Available2021-12-192020-12-182021-12-182021-12-181Chapter 1: The five pillars of climate resilience in urban areas; Rutger de Graaf-van Dinther and Henk Ovink.- Chapter 2: Integration of water management and urban design for climate resilient cities; Nanco Dolman.- Chapter 3: Climate resilient urban retrofit at street level; Jeroen Kluck and Floris Boogaard.- Chapter 4: Flood resilience of critical buildings: assessment methods and tools; Manuela Escarameia and Andrew Tagg.- Chapter 5: Recovery Capacity: To Build Back Better.; Frans van de Ven, Fransje Hooimeijer and Piet Storm.- Chapter 6: Removing challenges for resilience building with support of the circular economy; Jeroen Rijke, Liliane Geerling, Nguyen Hong Quan and Nguyen Hieu Trung.- Chapter 7: Climate resilience in urban informal settlements: Towards a transformative upgrading agenda; Matthew French, Alexei Trundle, Inga Korte and Camari Koto.- Chapter 8: A transformative process for urban climate resilience: The case of Water as Leverage Resilient Cities Asia in Semarang, Indonesia; Naim Laeni, Henk Ovink, Tim Busscher, Wiwandari Handayani, and Margo van den Brink.- Chapter 9: Making the transition: transformative governance capacities for a resilient Rotterdam; Arnoud Molenaar, Katharina Hölscher, Derk Loorbach and Johan Verlinde.- Chapter 10: Future outlook: emerging trends and key ingredients for the transition to resilient delta cities; Rutger de Graaf-van Dinther.This book describes the urgent challenge faced by cities worldwide to become resilient to climate change impacts. This challenge goes further than the ability to resist the impacts of extreme weather conditions. Coping with climate impacts and the ability to recover from them are equally important, as well as the capacity to adapt to the effects of climate change and the ability to transform the entire urban system. The book explores how the resilience journey for coastal cities in particular encompasses using scientific knowledge but also the knowledge of citizens and practitioners. Measures and strategies on different scales are needed, from national scale all the way down to neighbourhood, street level and building level. Representing the holistic nature of climate resilience, this collection contains unique insights from leading scientists and practitioners in areas of expertise such as engineering, social sciences and urban design. It will be a valuable resource for scholars, students, practitioners and policy makers interested in the development of resilient and sustainable urban environments.<div>
</div><div>Rutger de Graaf-van Dinther is Applied Research Professor of Water Innovation at Rotterdam University of Applied Sciences, the Netherlands. He is a civil engineer, entrepreneur and researcher. Rutger is director and founding partner of three water innovation companies: DeltaSync, Blue21 and Indymo.
</div>		This book describes the urgent challenge faced by cities worldwide to become resilient to climate change impacts. This challenge goes further than the ability to resist the impacts of extreme weather conditions. Coping with climate impacts and the ability to recover from them are equally important, as well as the capacity to adapt to the effects of climate change and the ability to transform the entire urban system. The book explores how the resilience journey for coastal cities in particular encompasses using scientific knowledge but also the knowledge of citizens and practitioners. Measures and strategies on different scales are needed, from national scale all the way down to neighbourhood, street level and building level. Representing the holistic nature of climate resilience, this collection contains unique insights from leading scientists and practitioners in areas of expertise such as engineering, social sciences and urban design. It will be a valuable resource for scholars, students, practitioners and policy makers interested in the development of resilient and sustainable urban environments.<p>Describes the urgent challenge faced by cities worldwide to become resilient to climate change impacts</p><p>Explores how the resilience journey for coastal cities in particular encompasses using scientific knowledge but also the knowledge of citizens and practitioners</p><p>A valuable resource for scholars, students, practitioners and policy makers interested in the development of resilient and sustainable urban environments</p>Rutger de Graaf-van Dinther is Applied Research Professor of Water Innovation at Rotterdam University of Applied Sciences, the Netherlands. He is a civil engineer, entrepreneur and researcher. Rutger is director and founding partner of three water innovation companies: DeltaSync, Blue21 and Indymo.SciencePalgrave Standard US (P5)Palgrave Standard (P5)EBOP41176Social Sciences009783030575397Environmental SciencesClimate SciencesPhysical GeographyEnvironmental ManagementUrban Sociology308000
32
Social Sciencesx978-3-030-57536-6de Graaf-van DintherRutger de Graaf-van DintherRutger de Graaf-van Dinther, Rotterdam University of Applied Sciences, Rotterdam, The NetherlandsClimate Resilient Urban AreasGovernance, design and development in coastal delta citiesXII, 218 p. 54 illus., 53 illus. in color.12021final59.9918.0064.1919.2654.9916.5064.9919.50Hard cover0Palgrave Studies in Climate Resilient SocietiesSocial SciencesBrief/PivotBook218JRNPGPalgrave MacmillanSpringer International Publishing0Available2020-12-182020-12-182021-01-042021-01-041Chapter 1: The five pillars of climate resilience in urban areas; Rutger de Graaf-van Dinther and Henk Ovink.- Chapter 2: Integration of water management and urban design for climate resilient cities; Nanco Dolman.- Chapter 3: Climate resilient urban retrofit at street level; Jeroen Kluck and Floris Boogaard.- Chapter 4: Flood resilience of critical buildings: assessment methods and tools; Manuela Escarameia and Andrew Tagg.- Chapter 5: Recovery Capacity: To Build Back Better.; Frans van de Ven, Fransje Hooimeijer and Piet Storm.- Chapter 6: Removing challenges for resilience building with support of the circular economy; Jeroen Rijke, Liliane Geerling, Nguyen Hong Quan and Nguyen Hieu Trung.- Chapter 7: Climate resilience in urban informal settlements: Towards a transformative upgrading agenda; Matthew French, Alexei Trundle, Inga Korte and Camari Koto.- Chapter 8: A transformative process for urban climate resilience: The case of Water as Leverage Resilient Cities Asia in Semarang, Indonesia; Naim Laeni, Henk Ovink, Tim Busscher, Wiwandari Handayani, and Margo van den Brink.- Chapter 9: Making the transition: transformative governance capacities for a resilient Rotterdam; Arnoud Molenaar, Katharina Hölscher, Derk Loorbach and Johan Verlinde.- Chapter 10: Future outlook: emerging trends and key ingredients for the transition to resilient delta cities; Rutger de Graaf-van Dinther.This book describes the urgent challenge faced by cities worldwide to become resilient to climate change impacts. This challenge goes further than the ability to resist the impacts of extreme weather conditions. Coping with climate impacts and the ability to recover from them are equally important, as well as the capacity to adapt to the effects of climate change and the ability to transform the entire urban system. The book explores how the resilience journey for coastal cities in particular encompasses using scientific knowledge but also the knowledge of citizens and practitioners. Measures and strategies on different scales are needed, from national scale all the way down to neighbourhood, street level and building level. Representing the holistic nature of climate resilience, this collection contains unique insights from leading scientists and practitioners in areas of expertise such as engineering, social sciences and urban design. It will be a valuable resource for scholars, students, practitioners and policy makers interested in the development of resilient and sustainable urban environments.<div>
</div><div>Rutger de Graaf-van Dinther is Applied Research Professor of Water Innovation at Rotterdam University of Applied Sciences, the Netherlands. He is a civil engineer, entrepreneur and researcher. Rutger is director and founding partner of three water innovation companies: DeltaSync, Blue21 and Indymo.
</div>		This book describes the urgent challenge faced by cities worldwide to become resilient to climate change impacts. This challenge goes further than the ability to resist the impacts of extreme weather conditions. Coping with climate impacts and the ability to recover from them are equally important, as well as the capacity to adapt to the effects of climate change and the ability to transform the entire urban system. The book explores how the resilience journey for coastal cities in particular encompasses using scientific knowledge but also the knowledge of citizens and practitioners. Measures and strategies on different scales are needed, from national scale all the way down to neighbourhood, street level and building level. Representing the holistic nature of climate resilience, this collection contains unique insights from leading scientists and practitioners in areas of expertise such as engineering, social sciences and urban design. It will be a valuable resource for scholars, students, practitioners and policy makers interested in the development of resilient and sustainable urban environments.<p>Describes the urgent challenge faced by cities worldwide to become resilient to climate change impacts</p><p>Explores how the resilience journey for coastal cities in particular encompasses using scientific knowledge but also the knowledge of citizens and practitioners</p><p>A valuable resource for scholars, students, practitioners and policy makers interested in the development of resilient and sustainable urban environments</p>Rutger de Graaf-van Dinther is Applied Research Professor of Water Innovation at Rotterdam University of Applied Sciences, the Netherlands. He is a civil engineer, entrepreneur and researcher. Rutger is director and founding partner of three water innovation companies: DeltaSync, Blue21 and Indymo.SciencePalgrave Standard US (P5)Palgrave Standard (P5)EBOP41176Social Sciences009783030575366Environmental SciencesClimate SciencesPhysical GeographyEnvironmental ManagementUrban Sociology454000
33
Social Sciencesx978-3-030-54313-6DettlaffAlan J. DettlaffAlan J. Dettlaff, University of Houston, Houston, TX, USARacial Disproportionality and Disparities in the Child Welfare SystemVII, 445 p. 22 illus., 16 illus. in color.12021final129.9939.00139.0941.73109.9933.00139.9942.00Hard cover0Child Maltreatment11Social SciencesContributed volumeBook445JNJPQBSpringerSpringer International Publishing0Available2020-11-282020-11-282020-12-152020-12-151<div>Part 1. Understanding and Identifying Disproportionality and Disparities.- Chapter 1. Historical Overview of Disproportionality and Disparities (Alan Dettlaff).- Chapter 2. Measurement Issues in Identifying and Describing Disproportionality and Disparities (Nancy Rolock).- Chapter 3. Disproportionality and Disparities Among African American Children (Reiko Boyd).- Chapter 4. Disproportionality and Disparities Among Latino Children (Michele Johnson-Motoyama).- Chapter 5. Disproportionality and Disparities Among Native American Children (Terry Cross).- Chapter 6. Underrepresented Populations in the Child Welfare System (Rowena Fong).- Part 2. Explaining Disproportionality and Disparities.- Chapter 7. Racial Bias as an Explanatory Factor (Ruth McRoy).- Chapter 8. Disproportionate Need as an Explanatory Factor (Brett Drake).- Chapter 9. Child Welfare System Issues as Explanatory Factors (Susan Wells).- Chapter 10. Geographical Context as an Explanatory Factor (Fred Wulczyn).- Part 3. Consequences of Disproportionality and Disparities.- Chapter 11. Individual Consequences of Disproportionality and Disparities (Mark Courtney).- Chapter 12. Community Consequences of Disproportionality and Disparities (Dorothy Roberts).- Part 4. Preventing and Reducing Disproportionality and Disparities.- Chapter 13. Preventing Child Maltreatment Among Children of Color (Brenda Jones Harden).- Chapter 14. Workforce Development Strategies to Address Racial Bias (Anita Barbee).- Chapter 15. Family Group Decision Making to Reduce Disproportionality and Disparities (Donn Baumann).- Chapter 16. Using the Decision Making Ecology to Identify and Address Disproportionality (John Fluke).- Chapter 17. Courts Catalyzing Change: Working with Court Systems to Address Disproportionality and Disparities (Jesse Russell).- Chapter 18. Using the Institutional Analysis to Facilitate Systems Change (Kristen Weber).- Chapter 19. Creating Comprehensive System Reform: The Texas State Strategy (Rowena Fong).- Chapter 20. Legislative Solutions to Address Disproportionality (Jessica Dixon Weaver).- Part 5. Conclusion and Future Directions.- Chapter 21. Future Directions in Policy, Practice, and Research (Alan Dettlaff).</div>This volume examines existing research documenting racial disproportionality and disparities in child welfare systems, the underlying factors that contribute to these phenomena and the harms that result at both the individual and community levels. It reviews multiple forms of interventions designed to prevent and reduce disproportionality, particularly in states and jurisdictions that have seen meaningful change. With contributions from authorities and leaders in the field, this volume serves as the authoritative volume on the complex issue of child maltreatment and child welfare. It offers a central source of information for students and practitioners who are seeking understanding on how structural and institutional racism can be addressed in public systems.

This volume examines existing research documenting racial disproportionality and disparities in child welfare systems, the underlying factors that contribute to these phenomena and the harms that result at both the individual and community levels. It reviews multiple forms of interventions designed to prevent and reduce disproportionality, particularly in states and jurisdictions that have seen meaningful change. With contributions from authorities and leaders in the field, this volume serves as the authoritative volume on the complex issue of child maltreatment and child welfare. It offers a central source of information for students and practitioners who are seeking understanding on how structural and institutional racism can be addressed in public systems.<p>Discusses existing research documenting racial disproportionality and disparities in child welfare systems from a holistic lens</p><p>Focusses on interventions targeting multiple causes and contributing factors</p><p>Offers future directions in policy, practice and research of racial disproportionality and disparities</p>Alan J. Dettlaff is Dean of the Graduate College of Social Work at the University of Houston and the inaugural Maconda Brown O’Connor Endowed Dean’s Chair. Prior to joining the University of Houston, Dean Dettlaff served on the faculty of the Jane Addams College of Social Work at the University of Illinois at Chicago. He received his bachelor’s degree in social work from TCU, and master’s in social work and PhD from the University of Texas at Arlington. Dean Dettlaff’s research focuses on improving outcomes for children and youth in the child welfare system by examining and addressing issues of structural and institutional racism that contribute to racial inequities in this system..ScienceProfessional Books (2)Science (SC)EBOP41176Social Sciences009783030543136EducationSocial PolicyWelfareSocial Work and Community DevelopmentComparative Social PolicyQuality of Life Research929000
34
Social Sciencesx978-3-030-54316-7DettlaffAlan J. DettlaffAlan J. Dettlaff, University of Houston, Houston, TX, USARacial Disproportionality and Disparities in the Child Welfare SystemVII, 445 p. 22 illus., 16 illus. in color.12021final119.9936.00128.3938.52109.9933.00129.9939.00Soft cover1Child Maltreatment11Social SciencesContributed volumeBook445JNJPQBSpringerSpringer International Publishing0Available2021-11-282020-11-282021-11-282021-11-281<div>Part 1. Understanding and Identifying Disproportionality and Disparities.- Chapter 1. Historical Overview of Disproportionality and Disparities (Alan Dettlaff).- Chapter 2. Measurement Issues in Identifying and Describing Disproportionality and Disparities (Nancy Rolock).- Chapter 3. Disproportionality and Disparities Among African American Children (Reiko Boyd).- Chapter 4. Disproportionality and Disparities Among Latino Children (Michele Johnson-Motoyama).- Chapter 5. Disproportionality and Disparities Among Native American Children (Terry Cross).- Chapter 6. Underrepresented Populations in the Child Welfare System (Rowena Fong).- Part 2. Explaining Disproportionality and Disparities.- Chapter 7. Racial Bias as an Explanatory Factor (Ruth McRoy).- Chapter 8. Disproportionate Need as an Explanatory Factor (Brett Drake).- Chapter 9. Child Welfare System Issues as Explanatory Factors (Susan Wells).- Chapter 10. Geographical Context as an Explanatory Factor (Fred Wulczyn).- Part 3. Consequences of Disproportionality and Disparities.- Chapter 11. Individual Consequences of Disproportionality and Disparities (Mark Courtney).- Chapter 12. Community Consequences of Disproportionality and Disparities (Dorothy Roberts).- Part 4. Preventing and Reducing Disproportionality and Disparities.- Chapter 13. Preventing Child Maltreatment Among Children of Color (Brenda Jones Harden).- Chapter 14. Workforce Development Strategies to Address Racial Bias (Anita Barbee).- Chapter 15. Family Group Decision Making to Reduce Disproportionality and Disparities (Donn Baumann).- Chapter 16. Using the Decision Making Ecology to Identify and Address Disproportionality (John Fluke).- Chapter 17. Courts Catalyzing Change: Working with Court Systems to Address Disproportionality and Disparities (Jesse Russell).- Chapter 18. Using the Institutional Analysis to Facilitate Systems Change (Kristen Weber).- Chapter 19. Creating Comprehensive System Reform: The Texas State Strategy (Rowena Fong).- Chapter 20. Legislative Solutions to Address Disproportionality (Jessica Dixon Weaver).- Part 5. Conclusion and Future Directions.- Chapter 21. Future Directions in Policy, Practice, and Research (Alan Dettlaff).</div>This volume examines existing research documenting racial disproportionality and disparities in child welfare systems, the underlying factors that contribute to these phenomena and the harms that result at both the individual and community levels. It reviews multiple forms of interventions designed to prevent and reduce disproportionality, particularly in states and jurisdictions that have seen meaningful change. With contributions from authorities and leaders in the field, this volume serves as the authoritative volume on the complex issue of child maltreatment and child welfare. It offers a central source of information for students and practitioners who are seeking understanding on how structural and institutional racism can be addressed in public systems.

This volume examines existing research documenting racial disproportionality and disparities in child welfare systems, the underlying factors that contribute to these phenomena and the harms that result at both the individual and community levels. It reviews multiple forms of interventions designed to prevent and reduce disproportionality, particularly in states and jurisdictions that have seen meaningful change. With contributions from authorities and leaders in the field, this volume serves as the authoritative volume on the complex issue of child maltreatment and child welfare. It offers a central source of information for students and practitioners who are seeking understanding on how structural and institutional racism can be addressed in public systems.<p>Discusses existing research documenting racial disproportionality and disparities in child welfare systems from a holistic lens</p><p>Focusses on interventions targeting multiple causes and contributing factors</p><p>Offers future directions in policy, practice and research of racial disproportionality and disparities</p>Alan J. Dettlaff is Dean of the Graduate College of Social Work at the University of Houston and the inaugural Maconda Brown O’Connor Endowed Dean’s Chair. Prior to joining the University of Houston, Dean Dettlaff served on the faculty of the Jane Addams College of Social Work at the University of Illinois at Chicago. He received his bachelor’s degree in social work from TCU, and master’s in social work and PhD from the University of Texas at Arlington. Dean Dettlaff’s research focuses on improving outcomes for children and youth in the child welfare system by examining and addressing issues of structural and institutional racism that contribute to racial inequities in this system..ScienceProfessional Books (2)Science (SC)EBOP41176Social Sciences009783030543167EducationSocial PolicyWelfareSocial Work and Community DevelopmentComparative Social PolicyQuality of Life Research816000
35
Social Sciences978-3-319-88758-6DicertoSara DicertoSara Dicerto, King’s College London, London, UKMultimodal Pragmatics and TranslationA New Model for Source Text AnalysisXI, 178 p. 28 illus., 9 illus. in color.12018final59.9918.0064.1919.2654.9916.5064.9919.50Soft cover1Palgrave Studies in Translating and InterpretingSocial SciencesBrief/PivotBook (Paperback Initiative)178CFPCFGAPalgrave MacmillanSpringer International Publishing0Available2018-09-092018-09-092019-12-142020-01-1111: A New Model for Source Text Analysis.- 2: On the road to Multimodality: Semiotics.- 3: Multimodal Meaning in Context: Pragmatics.- 4: Analysing Multimodal Source Texts for Translation: A Proposal.- 5: Multimodal ST analysis – the model applied.- 6: Multimodal ST analysis – current status, opportunities, ways forward.

This book proposes a new model for the translation-oriented analysis of multimodal source texts. The author guides the reader through semiotics, multimodality, pragmatics and translation studies on a quest for the meaning-making mechanics of texts that combine images and words. She openly challenges the traditional view that sees translators focusing their attention mostly on the linguistic aspect of source material in their work. The central theoretical pivot around which the analytical model revolves is that multimodal texts communicate through individual images and linguistic units, as well as through the interaction among textual resources and the text's interaction with its context of reference. This three-dimensional view offers a holistic understanding of multimodal texts and their potential translation issues to help translators improve the way they communicate multimodally across languages and cultures. This book will appeal to researchers in the fields of translation studies, multimodality and pragmatics.<div>This book proposes a new model for the translation-oriented analysis of multimodal source texts. The author guides the reader through semiotics, multimodality, pragmatics and translation studies on a quest for the meaning-making mechanics of texts that combine images and words. She openly challenges the traditional view that sees translators focusing their attention mostly on the linguistic aspect of source material in their work. The central theoretical pivot around which the analytical model revolves is that multimodal texts communicate through individual images and linguistic units, as well as through the interaction among textual resources and the text's interaction with its context of reference. This three-dimensional view offers a holistic understanding of multimodal texts and their potential translation issues to help translators improve the way they communicate multimodally across languages and cultures. This book will appeal to researchers in the fields of translation studies, multimodality and pragmatics.
</div>		<p>Provides a new model for text analysis which acknowledges the impact of technological development</p><p>Offers a comprehensive picture of how a multimodal text can be meaningful</p><p>Applies the new model to a range of empirical data to test and exemplify its usefulness as a tool for multimodal source text analysis</p>Sara Dicerto is a research associate at King’s College London and a teacher of Modern Foreign Languages at Ark Globe Academy, UK. Her interest in Pragmatics and its application to multimodal issues in translation developed during her studies in Italy and the UK, as well as during her freelance work as a translator.

SciencePalgrave Standard US (P5)Palgrave Standard (P5)EBOP41176Social Sciences009783319887586Language TranslationPragmaticsStylisticsSemioticsNatural Language Processing (NLP)454000
36
Social Sciences978-3-319-69343-9DicertoSara DicertoSara Dicerto, King’s College London, London, UKMultimodal Pragmatics and TranslationA New Model for Source Text AnalysisXI, 178 p. 28 illus., 9 illus. in color.12018final59.9918.0064.1919.2654.9916.5064.9919.50Hard cover0Palgrave Studies in Translating and InterpretingSocial SciencesBrief/PivotBook178CFPCFGAPalgrave MacmillanSpringer International Publishing0Available2017-12-142017-11-302017-12-172017-12-1711: A New Model for Source Text Analysis.- 2: On the road to Multimodality: Semiotics.- 3: Multimodal Meaning in Context: Pragmatics.- 4: Analysing Multimodal Source Texts for Translation: A Proposal.- 5: Multimodal ST analysis – the model applied.- 6: Multimodal ST analysis – current status, opportunities, ways forward.

This book proposes a new model for the translation-oriented analysis of multimodal source texts. The author guides the reader through semiotics, multimodality, pragmatics and translation studies on a quest for the meaning-making mechanics of texts that combine images and words. She openly challenges the traditional view that sees translators focusing their attention mostly on the linguistic aspect of source material in their work. The central theoretical pivot around which the analytical model revolves is that multimodal texts communicate through individual images and linguistic units, as well as through the interaction among textual resources and the text's interaction with its context of reference. This three-dimensional view offers a holistic understanding of multimodal texts and their potential translation issues to help translators improve the way they communicate multimodally across languages and cultures. This book will appeal to researchers in the fields of translation studies, multimodality and pragmatics.<div>This book proposes a new model for the translation-oriented analysis of multimodal source texts. The author guides the reader through semiotics, multimodality, pragmatics and translation studies on a quest for the meaning-making mechanics of texts that combine images and words. She openly challenges the traditional view that sees translators focusing their attention mostly on the linguistic aspect of source material in their work. The central theoretical pivot around which the analytical model revolves is that multimodal texts communicate through individual images and linguistic units, as well as through the interaction among textual resources and the text's interaction with its context of reference. This three-dimensional view offers a holistic understanding of multimodal texts and their potential translation issues to help translators improve the way they communicate multimodally across languages and cultures. This book will appeal to researchers in the fields of translation studies, multimodality and pragmatics.
</div>		<p>Provides a new model for text analysis which acknowledges the impact of technological development</p><p>Offers a comprehensive picture of how a multimodal text can be meaningful</p><p>Applies the new model to a range of empirical data to test and exemplify its usefulness as a tool for multimodal source text analysis</p>Sara Dicerto is a research associate at King’s College London and a teacher of Modern Foreign Languages at Ark Globe Academy, UK. Her interest in Pragmatics and its application to multimodal issues in translation developed during her studies in Italy and the UK, as well as during her freelance work as a translator.

SciencePalgrave Standard US (P5)Palgrave Standard (P5)EBOP41176Social Sciences009783319693439Language TranslationPragmaticsStylisticsSemioticsNatural Language Processing (NLP)3544000
37
Social Sciences978-3-030-13506-5EyermanRon EyermanRon Eyerman, Yale University, New Haven, CT, USAMemory, Trauma, and IdentityX, 206 p. 1 illus.12019final84.9925.5090.9427.2874.9922.5099.9930.00Hard cover0Cultural SociologySocial SciencesMonographBook206JHBJFSRPalgrave MacmillanSpringer International Publishing0Available2019-04-182019-04-092019-08-122019-08-1211: Introduction: Identity, Memory, and Trauma.- 2: The Past in the Present: Culture and the Transmission of Memory.- 3: Intellectuals and Cultural Trauma.- 4: The Assassination of Harvey Milk.- 5: Social Theory and Cultural Trauma.- 6: The Worst Was the Silence: The Unfinished Drama of the Katyn Massacre.- 7: Cultural Trauma, Collective Memory and the Vietnam War.- 8: Perpetrator Trauma and Collective Guilt.- 9. Conclusion: Ron Eyerman and the Study of Cultural Trauma.This volume brings together Ron Eyerman’s most important interventions in the field of cultural trauma and offers an accessible entry point into the origins and development of this theory and a framework of an analysis that has now achieved the status of a research paradigm. This collection of disparate essays, published between 2004 and 2018, coheres around an original introduction that not only provides a historical overview of cultural trauma, but is also an important theoretical contribution to cultural trauma and collective identity in its own right. The Afterword from esteemed sociologist Eric Woods connects the essays and explores their significance for the broader fields of sociology, behavioral science, and trauma studies.This volume brings together Ron Eyerman’s most important interventions in the field of cultural trauma and offers an accessible entry point into the origins and development of this theory and a framework of an analysis that has now achieved the status of a research paradigm. This collection of disparate essays, published between 2004 and 2018, coheres around an original introduction that not only provides a historical overview of cultural trauma, but is also an important theoretical contribution to cultural trauma and collective identity in its own right. The Afterword from esteemed sociologist Eric Woods connects the essays and explores their significance for the broader fields of sociology, behavioral science, and trauma studies..<p>Collects the key interventions of a major figure in the field on cultural trauma (and trauma more broadly) for the first time</p><p>Well-written and relatively short essays develop trauma theory in relation to specific, empirical case studies</p><p>Demonstrates the applicability and explanatory power of Eyerman’s cultural trauma</p>Ron Eyerman is Professor of Sociology at Yale University, USA. He is the author of Music and Social Movements (1998), Cultural Trauma (2001), and Cultural Trauma and Collective Identity (2004), among many other titles. His interests include cultural and social movement theory, critical theory, cultural studies, and the sociology of the arts.SciencePalgrave Standard US (P5)Palgrave Monograph (P6)EBOP41176Social Sciences009783030135065Sociological TheorySociology of CultureCultural Studies454000
38
Social Sciences978-3-030-13509-6EyermanRon EyermanRon Eyerman, Yale University, New Haven, CT, USAMemory, Trauma, and IdentityX, 206 p. 1 illus.12019final84.9925.5090.9427.2874.9922.5099.9930.00Soft cover1Cultural SociologySocial SciencesMonographBook206JHBJFSRPalgrave MacmillanSpringer International Publishing0Available2020-08-152019-04-092020-04-182020-04-1811: Introduction: Identity, Memory, and Trauma.- 2: The Past in the Present: Culture and the Transmission of Memory.- 3: Intellectuals and Cultural Trauma.- 4: The Assassination of Harvey Milk.- 5: Social Theory and Cultural Trauma.- 6: The Worst Was the Silence: The Unfinished Drama of the Katyn Massacre.- 7: Cultural Trauma, Collective Memory and the Vietnam War.- 8: Perpetrator Trauma and Collective Guilt.- 9. Conclusion: Ron Eyerman and the Study of Cultural Trauma.This volume brings together Ron Eyerman’s most important interventions in the field of cultural trauma and offers an accessible entry point into the origins and development of this theory and a framework of an analysis that has now achieved the status of a research paradigm. This collection of disparate essays, published between 2004 and 2018, coheres around an original introduction that not only provides a historical overview of cultural trauma, but is also an important theoretical contribution to cultural trauma and collective identity in its own right. The Afterword from esteemed sociologist Eric Woods connects the essays and explores their significance for the broader fields of sociology, behavioral science, and trauma studies.This volume brings together Ron Eyerman’s most important interventions in the field of cultural trauma and offers an accessible entry point into the origins and development of this theory and a framework of an analysis that has now achieved the status of a research paradigm. This collection of disparate essays, published between 2004 and 2018, coheres around an original introduction that not only provides a historical overview of cultural trauma, but is also an important theoretical contribution to cultural trauma and collective identity in its own right. The Afterword from esteemed sociologist Eric Woods connects the essays and explores their significance for the broader fields of sociology, behavioral science, and trauma studies..<p>Collects the key interventions of a major figure in the field on cultural trauma (and trauma more broadly) for the first time</p><p>Well-written and relatively short essays develop trauma theory in relation to specific, empirical case studies</p><p>Demonstrates the applicability and explanatory power of Eyerman’s cultural trauma</p>Ron Eyerman is Professor of Sociology at Yale University, USA. He is the author of Music and Social Movements (1998), Cultural Trauma (2001), and Cultural Trauma and Collective Identity (2004), among many other titles. His interests include cultural and social movement theory, critical theory, cultural studies, and the sociology of the arts.SciencePalgrave Standard US (P5)Palgrave Monograph (P6)EBOP41176Social Sciences009783030135096Sociological TheorySociology of CultureCultural Studies454000
39
Social Sciences978-3-030-87819-1FedericiFederico Marco FedericiFederico Marco Federici, University College London, London, UKLanguage as a Social Determinant of HealthTranslating and Interpreting the COVID-19 PandemicXL, 323 p. 26 illus.12022final139.9942.00149.7944.94119.9936.00159.9948.00Soft cover1Palgrave Studies in Translating and InterpretingSocial SciencesContributed volumeBook323CBCFBPalgrave MacmillanSpringer International Publishing0WorldwideAvailable2023-02-242022-03-012023-02-232023-02-231<div>Chapter 1: Translating Health Risks: Language as a Social Determinant of Health.- Part I: Terminologies and Narratives.- Chapter 2: Military Framing of Health Threats: The COVID-19 Pandemic as a Case Study.- Chapter 3: Implications of Linguistic Hegemony in Translating Health Materials: COVID-19 Information in Arabic in Australia.- Chapter 4: Translating the COVID-19 Pandemic across Languages and Cultures: the Case of Argentina.- Part II: Translating COVID-19 Credibility, Trust, Reliability.- Chapter 5: Translation Accuracy in the Indonesian Translation of the COVID-19 Guidebook: Understanding the Relation between Medical Translation, Reception, and Risk.- Chapter 6: Credibility in Risk Communication: Oman’s Official Arabic COVID-19 Risk Communication and Its English Translation.- Chapter 7: Translation as an (Ethical) Intervention? Building Trust in Healthcare Crisis Communication.- Part III: Health and Safety in Risk Communication.- Chapter 8: Health and Safety Discourse in Polish and English: A Pragmalinguistic Perspective of COVID-19 Communication.- Chapter 9: Risk and Safety on Cruise Ships: Communicative Strategies for COVID-19.- Part IV: Communities and Translation.- Chapter 10: Managing Communication in Public Health: Risk Perception in Crisis Settings.- Chapter 11: Citizen Translators’ ‘Imagined Community’ Engagement in Crisis Communication.</div>This edited volume demonstrates the fundamental role translation and interpreting play in multilingual crises. During the COVID-19 pandemic, limited language proficiency of the main language(s) in which information is disseminated exposed people to additional risks, and the contributors analyse risk communication plans and strategies used throughout the world to communicate measures through translation and interpreting. They show that a political willingness to understand the role of language in public health could lead local and national measures to success, sampling approaches from across four continents. The book will be of interest to students and scholars of healthcare translation and interpreting, sociolinguistics and crisis communication, as well as practitioners of risk and crisis communication and professional translators and interpreters.<div>
</div><div>Federico Marco Federici is Professor of Intercultural Crisis Communication at the Centre for Translation Studies, University College London, UK. His research focuses on translators and interpreters as intercultural mediators, online news translation, and the study of translation in crises.
</div>		This edited volume demonstrates the fundamental role translation and interpreting play in multilingual crises. During the COVID-19 pandemic, limited language proficiency of the main language(s) in which information is disseminated exposed people to additional risks, and the contributors analyse risk communication plans and strategies used throughout the world to communicate measures through translation and interpreting. They show that a political willingness to understand the role of language in public health could lead local and national measures to success, sampling approaches from across four continents. The book will be of interest to students and scholars of healthcare translation and interpreting, sociolinguistics and crisis communication, as well as practitioners of risk and crisis communication and professional translators and interpreters.<p>Analyses a diverse array of translation modes</p><p>Samples communication approaches across four continents</p><p>Provides recommendations for considering language as a social determinant of health in future Covid-19 research</p>Federico Marco Federici is Professor of Intercultural Crisis Communication at the Centre for Translation Studies, University College London, UK. His research focuses on translators and interpreters as intercultural mediators, online news translation, and the study of translation in crises.SciencePalgrave Standard US (P5)Palgrave Standard (P5)EBOP41176Social Sciences009783030878191Language TranslationLanguage Policy and PlanningMultilingualismHealth CommunicationPublic Health476000
40
Social Sciences978-3-030-87816-0FedericiFederico Marco FedericiFederico Marco Federici, University College London, London, UKLanguage as a Social Determinant of HealthTranslating and Interpreting the COVID-19 PandemicXL, 323 p. 26 illus.12022final139.9942.00149.7944.94119.9936.00159.9948.00Hard cover0Palgrave Studies in Translating and InterpretingSocial SciencesContributed volumeBook323CBCFBPalgrave MacmillanSpringer International Publishing0WorldwideAvailable2022-02-232022-02-232022-05-302022-05-301<div>Chapter 1: Translating Health Risks: Language as a Social Determinant of Health.- Part I: Terminologies and Narratives.- Chapter 2: Military Framing of Health Threats: The COVID-19 Pandemic as a Case Study.- Chapter 3: Implications of Linguistic Hegemony in Translating Health Materials: COVID-19 Information in Arabic in Australia.- Chapter 4: Translating the COVID-19 Pandemic across Languages and Cultures: the Case of Argentina.- Part II: Translating COVID-19 Credibility, Trust, Reliability.- Chapter 5: Translation Accuracy in the Indonesian Translation of the COVID-19 Guidebook: Understanding the Relation between Medical Translation, Reception, and Risk.- Chapter 6: Credibility in Risk Communication: Oman’s Official Arabic COVID-19 Risk Communication and Its English Translation.- Chapter 7: Translation as an (Ethical) Intervention? Building Trust in Healthcare Crisis Communication.- Part III: Health and Safety in Risk Communication.- Chapter 8: Health and Safety Discourse in Polish and English: A Pragmalinguistic Perspective of COVID-19 Communication.- Chapter 9: Risk and Safety on Cruise Ships: Communicative Strategies for COVID-19.- Part IV: Communities and Translation.- Chapter 10: Managing Communication in Public Health: Risk Perception in Crisis Settings.- Chapter 11: Citizen Translators’ ‘Imagined Community’ Engagement in Crisis Communication.</div>This edited volume demonstrates the fundamental role translation and interpreting play in multilingual crises. During the COVID-19 pandemic, limited language proficiency of the main language(s) in which information is disseminated exposed people to additional risks, and the contributors analyse risk communication plans and strategies used throughout the world to communicate measures through translation and interpreting. They show that a political willingness to understand the role of language in public health could lead local and national measures to success, sampling approaches from across four continents. The book will be of interest to students and scholars of healthcare translation and interpreting, sociolinguistics and crisis communication, as well as practitioners of risk and crisis communication and professional translators and interpreters.<div>
</div><div>Federico Marco Federici is Professor of Intercultural Crisis Communication at the Centre for Translation Studies, University College London, UK. His research focuses on translators and interpreters as intercultural mediators, online news translation, and the study of translation in crises.
</div>		This edited volume demonstrates the fundamental role translation and interpreting play in multilingual crises. During the COVID-19 pandemic, limited language proficiency of the main language(s) in which information is disseminated exposed people to additional risks, and the contributors analyse risk communication plans and strategies used throughout the world to communicate measures through translation and interpreting. They show that a political willingness to understand the role of language in public health could lead local and national measures to success, sampling approaches from across four continents. The book will be of interest to students and scholars of healthcare translation and interpreting, sociolinguistics and crisis communication, as well as practitioners of risk and crisis communication and professional translators and interpreters.<p>Analyses a diverse array of translation modes</p><p>Samples communication approaches across four continents</p><p>Provides recommendations for considering language as a social determinant of health in future Covid-19 research</p>Federico Marco Federici is Professor of Intercultural Crisis Communication at the Centre for Translation Studies, University College London, UK. His research focuses on translators and interpreters as intercultural mediators, online news translation, and the study of translation in crises.SciencePalgrave Standard US (P5)Palgrave Standard (P5)EBOP41176Social Sciences009783030878160Language TranslationLanguage Policy and PlanningMultilingualismHealth CommunicationPublic Health601000
41
Social Sciencesx978-1-137-27189-1FleetwoodJ. FleetwoodJ. FleetwoodDrug MulesWomen in the International Cocaine TradeVI, 206 p.12014final49.9915.0053.4916.0544.9913.5054.9916.50Hard cover0Transnational Crime, Crime Control and SecurityPalgrave Social Sciences CollectionMonographBook206JFSJJKVPalgrave MacmillanPalgrave Macmillan UK0Available2014-06-182014-06-182014-06-182014-06-1811. Introduction: Cartels and Cocaine Queens 2. Imagining Drug Trafficking: Mafias, Markets, Mules 3. What do Women Talk About When They Talk About Trafficking? 4. Who are the 'Traffickers'? 5. For Money and Love: Women's Narratives About Becoming Mules 6. Beginning Mule-work 7. Mule-work and Gender 8. Backing Out 9. Conclusion: Women's Offending in Global ContextWinner of the British Society of Criminology Book Prize, 2015<br/><div><br/></div><div>Fleetwood explores how women become involved in trafficking, focusing on the lived experiences of women as drug mules. Offering theoretical insights from gender theory and transnational criminology, Fleetwood argues that women's participation in the drugs trade cannot be adequately understood through the lenses of either victimization or agency.</div>Jennifer Fleetwood is a Lecturer in Criminology at the University of Leicester, UK where she teaches on gender and crime. She is also part of the Gender and Justice Research Network at the University of Leicester and is a member of the Nordic narrative network.SciencePalgrave Standard US (P5)Palgrave Monograph (P6)EBOP41146Palgrave Social Sciences Collection009781137271891Gender StudiesCriminologyOrganized CrimeCrime and SocietySociologyGlobalization3648000
42
Social Sciencesx978-1-349-44469-4FleetwoodJ. FleetwoodJ. FleetwoodDrug MulesWomen in the International Cocaine TradeVI, 206 p.12014final49.9915.0053.4916.0544.9913.5054.9916.50Soft cover0Transnational Crime, Crime Control and SecurityPalgrave Social Sciences CollectionMonographBook206JFSJJKVPalgrave MacmillanPalgrave Macmillan UK0Available2014-01-012014-01-012013-12-312013-12-3111. Introduction: Cartels and Cocaine Queens 2. Imagining Drug Trafficking: Mafias, Markets, Mules 3. What do Women Talk About When They Talk About Trafficking? 4. Who are the 'Traffickers'? 5. For Money and Love: Women's Narratives About Becoming Mules 6. Beginning Mule-work 7. Mule-work and Gender 8. Backing Out 9. Conclusion: Women's Offending in Global ContextWinner of the British Society of Criminology Book Prize, 2015<br/><div><br/></div><div>Fleetwood explores how women become involved in trafficking, focusing on the lived experiences of women as drug mules. Offering theoretical insights from gender theory and transnational criminology, Fleetwood argues that women's participation in the drugs trade cannot be adequately understood through the lenses of either victimization or agency.</div>Jennifer Fleetwood is a Lecturer in Criminology at the University of Leicester, UK where she teaches on gender and crime. She is also part of the Gender and Justice Research Network at the University of Leicester and is a member of the Nordic narrative network.SciencePalgrave Standard US (P5)Palgrave Monograph (P6)EBOP41146Palgrave Social Sciences Collection009781349444694Gender StudiesCriminologyOrganized CrimeCrime and SocietySociologyGlobalization2679000
43
Social Sciencesx978-3-319-24410-5Gatenio GabelShirley Gatenio GabelShirley Gatenio Gabel, Fordham University, New York, NY, USAA Rights-Based Approach to Social Policy AnalysisXXII, 85 p. 1 illus.12016final59.9918.0064.1919.2654.9916.5064.9919.50Soft cover0SpringerBriefs in Rights-Based Approaches to Social WorkSocial SciencesBrief/PivotBook85JKSNKCPSpringerSpringer International Publishing0Available2016-04-052016-03-242016-04-102016-04-101Understanding a Rights-based Approach to Social Policy Analysis.- Understanding Human Rights and Social Policy.- Measuring Progress on the Realization of Human Rights.- Bringing it All Together: Situating the Social Issue.This brief resource sets out a rights-based framework for
policy analysis that allows social workers to enhance their long-term vision as
well as their current practice. It introduces the emerging P.A.N.E.
(Participation, Accountability, Non-discrimination, Equity) model for evaluating
social policy, comparing it with the traditional needs-based charity model in
terms of not only effectiveness and efficiency but also inclusion and justice. Recognized
standards for human rights are used to identify values crucial to informing policy
goals. Exercises, key documents, and an extended example illustrate both the processes
of creating empowering social policy and its best and most meaningful outcomes.

Included in the coverage:


Rights-based
and needs-based approaches to social policy analysis.
Regional
and international human rights instruments.
Grounding
social policies in legal and institutional frameworks.
Conceptualizing
social issues from a human rights frame.
Measuring
progress on the realization of human rights.
Rights-based
analysis of maternity, paternity, and parental leaves in the United States.

For social workers and social work researchers, A Rights-Based Approach to Social Policy Analysis
gives readers a modern platform for achieving the highest goals of the
field. It also makes a worthwhile class text for social work programs. ​		<p>Provides a rights-based framework for social policy analysis</p><p>Presents quantitative and qualitative data on the efficacy of human rights policies</p><p>Examines case illustrations</p><p>Includes questions for classroom discussion?</p><p>Includes supplementary material: sn.pub/extras</p>Dr. Shirley Gatenio Gabel is an Associate Professor at Fordham University’s Graduate School of Social Service. Her diverse experiences include directing public policy analyses for government and NGOs, lobbying, and organizing community efforts. Her primary research area is comparative child and family policies in both industrialized and developing countries. Dr. Gatenio Gabel’s research increasingly focuses on how public policies improve the well-being of children from a child right’s perspective. Dr. Gatenio Gabel has served as a consultant to UNICEF and UNESCO over the last 7 years on child poverty and advocacy strategies, social protection in developing countries and social inclusive policies and programs in developing countries. She was a Senior Fulbright Scholar in Bulgaria in 2005-06 and was recently invited as a Fulbright specialist in 2013 to Argentina to teach child and family policies from a rights’ perspective in FLACSO’s doctoral program. She is the chair of CSWE’s Commission on Global Education and recently co-edited a special issue of JSWE on the globalization of social work education. Dr. Gabel has been an invited to lecture on social work and human rights in Austria, Israel, Switzerland, Bulgaria and Argentina.ProfessionalsProfessional Books (2)Standard (0)EBOP41176Social Sciences009783319244105Social WorkSocial PolicyHuman Rights1766000
44
Social Sciences978-3-658-37428-0GauppLisa Gaupp; Alenka Barber-Kersovan; Volker KirchbergLisa Gaupp, University of Music and Performing Art Wien – mdw, Wien, Austria; Alenka Barber-Kersovan, Leuphana University, Lüneburg, Germany; Volker Kirchberg, Leuphana University, Lüneburg, GermanyArts and PowerPolicies in and by the ArtsX, 358 p. 53 illus., 39 illus. in color.12022final49.9915.0053.4916.0544.9913.5054.9916.50Soft cover0Kunst und GesellschaftSocial SciencesMonographBook358JFSRJHBSpringer VSSpringer Fachmedien Wiesbaden0Available2022-09-062022-09-062022-09-232022-09-231.Establishing and De-Establishing Power in the Arts.- The Arts and the Power of Social Structures.- The Arts and the Dominance of Politics and Economic Order.The focus on concepts of power and domination in societal structures has characterized sociology since its beginnings. Max Weber’s definition of power as “imposing one’s will on others” is still relevant to explaining processes in the arts, whether their production, imagination, communication, distribution, critique or consumption. Domination in the arts is exercised by internal and external rulers through institutionalized social structures and through beliefs about their legitimacy, achieved by defining and shaping art tastes.

The complexity of how the arts relate to power arises from the complexity of the policies of artistic production, distribution and consumption—policies which serve to facilitate or hinder an aesthetic object from reaching its intended public. Curators, critics and collectors employ a variety of forms of cultural and artistic communication to mirror and shape the dominant social, economic and political conditions.

Arts and Power: Policies in and by the Arts brings together diverse voices who position the societal functions of art in fields of domination and power, of structure and agency—whether they are used to impose hegemonic, totalitarian or unjust goals or to pursue social purposes fostering equal rights and grassroots democracy. The contributions in this volume are exploratory steps towards what we believe can be a more systematic, empirically and theoretically founded sociological debate on the arts and power. And they are an invitation to take further steps.

The editors

Prof. Dr. Lisa Gaupp, Professor of Cultural Institutions Studies at the Department of Cultural Management and Gender Studies (IKM) at the mdw – University of Music and Performing Arts Vienna

Hon. Prof. Dr. Alenka Barber-Kersovan, Honorary Professor of Sociology of Music at the Institute of Sociology and Cultural Organization at Leuphana University of Lüneburg

Prof. Dr. Volker Kirchberg, Professor of Sociology of the Arts at the Institute of Sociology and Cultural Organization at Leuphana University of Lüneburg
The focus on concepts of power and domination in societal structures has characterized sociology since its beginnings. Max Weber’s definition of power as “imposing one’s will on others” is still relevant to explaining processes in the arts, whether their production, imagination, communication, distribution, critique or consumption. Domination in the arts is exercised by internal and external rulers through institutionalized social structures and through beliefs about their legitimacy, achieved by defining and shaping art tastes.The complexity of how the arts relate to power arises from the complexity of the policies of artistic production, distribution and consumption—policies which serve to facilitate or hinder an aesthetic object from reaching its intended public. Curators, critics and collectors employ a variety of forms of cultural and artistic communication to mirror and shape the dominant social, economic and political conditions.Arts and Power: Policies in and by the Arts brings together diverse voices who position the societal functions of art in fields of domination and power, of structure and agency—whether they are used to impose hegemonic, totalitarian or unjust goals or to pursue social purposes fostering equal rights and grassroots democracy. The contributions in this volume are exploratory steps towards what we believe can be a more systematic, empirically and theoretically founded sociological debate on the arts and power. And they are an invitation to take further steps.<p>Concepts of power and domination and their role in contemporary arts</p><p>Theoretical und empirical approaches</p><p>International study</p>Prof. Dr. Lisa Gaupp, Professor of Cultural Institutions Studies at the Department of Cultural Management and Gender Studies (IKM) at the mdw – University of Music and Performing Arts ViennaHon. Prof. Dr. Alenka Barber-Kersovan, Honorary Professor of Sociology of Music at the Institute of Sociology and Cultural Organization at Leuphana University of LüneburgProf. Dr. Volker Kirchberg, Professor of Sociology of the Arts at the Institute of Sociology and Cultural Organization at Leuphana University of Lüneburg


ScienceProfessional Books (2)Science (SC)EBOP41176Social Sciences009783658374280Sociology of CultureBiotechnologyCultural StudiesBiotechnology481000
45
Social Sciences978-3-030-73322-3GotznerNicole Gotzner; Uli SauerlandNicole Gotzner, University of Potsdam, Potsdam, Germany; Uli Sauerland, Leibniz-Centre General Linguistics, Berlin, GermanyMeasurements, Numerals and ScalesEssays in Honour of Stephanie SoltXIX, 349 p. 25 illus., 8 illus. in color.12022final139.9942.00149.7944.94119.9936.00159.9948.00Hard cover0Palgrave Studies in Pragmatics, Language and CognitionSocial SciencesContributed volumeBook349CFGACFAPalgrave MacmillanSpringer International Publishing0Available2022-02-082022-02-082022-04-162022-04-161Chapter 1. Introduction.- Chapter 2. Partitives, Comparatives and Proportional Measurement.- Chapter 3. Modified Numerals, Vagueness, and Scale Granularity.- Chapter 4. Uncertainty, quantity and relevance inferences from modified numerals.- Chapter 5. Around “around”.- Chapter 6. Evaluative intensification and positive polarity: Catalan WELL as a case study.- Chapter 7. She is brilliant! Distinguishing different readings of relative adjectives.- Chapter 8. Numerals denote degree quantifiers: Evidence from child language.- Chapter 9. Number, Numbers and the Mass/Count Distinction in Daakie (Ambrym, Vanuatu).- Chapter 10. Representing measurement: The view from nominal polysemy.- Chapter 11. On the status of post-nominal Q superlatives in Romanian.- Chapter 12. Unknown numbers.- Chapter 13. Some speculative remarks on the semantics of money phrases.- Chapter 14. Quantifying the register of German quantificational expressions: A corpus based study.- Chapter 15. Domain-restricted measure functions and the extent readings of relative measures.- Chapter 16. Amazing-hodo.- Chapter 17. A novel probabilistic approach to linguistic imprecision.- Chapter 18. Modification of measure nouns.This book brings together chapters on the semantics and pragmatics of measurement, scales, and numerical expressions. The chapters highlight recent developments in measurement theory, the meaning of numerical expressions and the relation between measurement scales and entailment scales. The authors provide explorations in formal and experimental semantics and pragmatics, as well as at the interfaces of this field with others including philosophy of language and sociolinguistics. This book will be of interest to students and scholars in these areas, as well as psychology, psycholinguistics and artificial intelligence.Nicole Gotzner is the Director of SPA Lab at the University of Potsdam, Germany. Uli Sauerland is the Vice Director and the leader of the Semantics and Pragmatics group at the Leibniz Centre for General Linguistics, Germany.This book brings together chapters on the semantics and pragmatics of measurement, scales, and numerical expressions. The chapters highlight recent developments in measurement theory, the meaning of numerical expressions and the relation between measurement scales and entailment scales. The authors provide explorations in formal and experimental semantics and pragmatics, as well as at the interfaces of this field with others including philosophy of language and sociolinguistics. This book will be of interest to students and scholars in these areas, as well as psychology, psycholinguistics and artificial intelligence.
<p>Focusses on various aspects of measurement in linguistics</p><p>Brings together 18 chapters from renowned experts in experimental semantics and pragmatics</p><p>Highlights the most recent developments in the field, as well as its interdisciplinary boundaries</p>Nicole Gotzner is the Director of SPA Lab at the University of Potsdam, Germany.



Uli Sauerland is the Vice Director and the leader of the Semantics and Pragmatics group at the Leibniz Centre for General Linguistics, Germany.


SciencePalgrave Standard US (P5)Palgrave Standard (P5)EBOP41176Social Sciences009783030733223PragmaticsPhilosophy of LanguagePsycholinguistics and Cognitive LingusiticsCognition611000
46
Social Sciences978-3-030-73325-4GotznerNicole Gotzner; Uli SauerlandNicole Gotzner, University of Potsdam, Potsdam, Germany; Uli Sauerland, Leibniz-Centre General Linguistics, Berlin, GermanyMeasurements, Numerals and ScalesEssays in Honour of Stephanie SoltXIX, 349 p. 25 illus., 8 illus. in color.12022final139.9942.00149.7944.94119.9936.00159.9948.00Soft cover1Palgrave Studies in Pragmatics, Language and CognitionSocial SciencesContributed volumeBook349CFGACFAPalgrave MacmillanSpringer International Publishing0Available2023-02-082022-02-082023-02-082023-02-081Chapter 1. Introduction.- Chapter 2. Partitives, Comparatives and Proportional Measurement.- Chapter 3. Modified Numerals, Vagueness, and Scale Granularity.- Chapter 4. Uncertainty, quantity and relevance inferences from modified numerals.- Chapter 5. Around “around”.- Chapter 6. Evaluative intensification and positive polarity: Catalan WELL as a case study.- Chapter 7. She is brilliant! Distinguishing different readings of relative adjectives.- Chapter 8. Numerals denote degree quantifiers: Evidence from child language.- Chapter 9. Number, Numbers and the Mass/Count Distinction in Daakie (Ambrym, Vanuatu).- Chapter 10. Representing measurement: The view from nominal polysemy.- Chapter 11. On the status of post-nominal Q superlatives in Romanian.- Chapter 12. Unknown numbers.- Chapter 13. Some speculative remarks on the semantics of money phrases.- Chapter 14. Quantifying the register of German quantificational expressions: A corpus based study.- Chapter 15. Domain-restricted measure functions and the extent readings of relative measures.- Chapter 16. Amazing-hodo.- Chapter 17. A novel probabilistic approach to linguistic imprecision.- Chapter 18. Modification of measure nouns.This book brings together chapters on the semantics and pragmatics of measurement, scales, and numerical expressions. The chapters highlight recent developments in measurement theory, the meaning of numerical expressions and the relation between measurement scales and entailment scales. The authors provide explorations in formal and experimental semantics and pragmatics, as well as at the interfaces of this field with others including philosophy of language and sociolinguistics. This book will be of interest to students and scholars in these areas, as well as psychology, psycholinguistics and artificial intelligence.Nicole Gotzner is the Director of SPA Lab at the University of Potsdam, Germany. Uli Sauerland is the Vice Director and the leader of the Semantics and Pragmatics group at the Leibniz Centre for General Linguistics, Germany.This book brings together chapters on the semantics and pragmatics of measurement, scales, and numerical expressions. The chapters highlight recent developments in measurement theory, the meaning of numerical expressions and the relation between measurement scales and entailment scales. The authors provide explorations in formal and experimental semantics and pragmatics, as well as at the interfaces of this field with others including philosophy of language and sociolinguistics. This book will be of interest to students and scholars in these areas, as well as psychology, psycholinguistics and artificial intelligence.
<p>Focusses on various aspects of measurement in linguistics</p><p>Brings together 18 chapters from renowned experts in experimental semantics and pragmatics</p><p>Highlights the most recent developments in the field, as well as its interdisciplinary boundaries</p>Nicole Gotzner is the Director of SPA Lab at the University of Potsdam, Germany.



Uli Sauerland is the Vice Director and the leader of the Semantics and Pragmatics group at the Leibniz Centre for General Linguistics, Germany.


SciencePalgrave Standard US (P5)Palgrave Standard (P5)EBOP41176Social Sciences009783030733254PragmaticsPhilosophy of LanguagePsycholinguistics and Cognitive LingusiticsCognition488000
47
Social Sciences978-1-137-38054-8GuilfoyleM. GuilfoyleM. GuilfoyleThe Person in Narrative TherapyA Post-structural, Foucauldian AccountVII, 227 p.12014final119.9936.00128.3938.52109.9933.00129.9939.00Hard cover0Palgrave Studies in the Theory and History of PsychologyPalgrave Social Sciences CollectionMonographBook227MMJJMAPalgrave MacmillanPalgrave Macmillan UK0Available2014-03-182014-03-182014-03-182014-03-181Introduction 1. The Problem: Constitution versus Agency 2. Power/Knowledge: The Social 3. The Constituted Subject 4. A Constitutionalist Account of Resistance 5. Embodied Resistance 6. Narrative Empathy and the Resisting Figure 7. From the Resisting Figure to the Ethical Subject ?This book argues that narrative practice does not have a coherent formulation of personhood in the way one finds in other fields, such as psychoanalysis and cognitive-behavioural therapy. It examines the post-structural principles that underpin narrative practice, which make available powerful conceptual tools for theorizing the person.Michael Guilfoyle is a Clinical Psychologist and Associate Professor in Psychology at Rhodes University, South Africa. He has worked as a therapist for over 20 years, and has published in several international theoretical and therapeutic journals in the areas of narrative practice and post-structural thought.SciencePalgrave Standard US (P5)Palgrave Monograph (P6)EBOP41146Palgrave Social Sciences Collection009781137380548Clinical PsychologyCritical PsychologyHistory of PsychologyCounseling PsychologyPhilosophy of the SelfSociety3992000
48
Social Sciences978-1-349-47928-3GuilfoyleM. GuilfoyleM. GuilfoyleThe Person in Narrative TherapyA Post-structural, Foucauldian AccountVII, 227 p.12014final99.9930.00106.9932.1089.9927.00109.9933.00Soft cover0Palgrave Studies in the Theory and History of PsychologyPalgrave Social Sciences CollectionMonographBook227MMJJMAPalgrave MacmillanPalgrave Macmillan UK0Available2014-01-012014-01-012013-12-312013-12-311Introduction 1. The Problem: Constitution versus Agency 2. Power/Knowledge: The Social 3. The Constituted Subject 4. A Constitutionalist Account of Resistance 5. Embodied Resistance 6. Narrative Empathy and the Resisting Figure 7. From the Resisting Figure to the Ethical Subject ?This book argues that narrative practice does not have a coherent formulation of personhood in the way one finds in other fields, such as psychoanalysis and cognitive-behavioural therapy. It examines the post-structural principles that underpin narrative practice, which make available powerful conceptual tools for theorizing the person.Michael Guilfoyle is a Clinical Psychologist and Associate Professor in Psychology at Rhodes University, South Africa. He has worked as a therapist for over 20 years, and has published in several international theoretical and therapeutic journals in the areas of narrative practice and post-structural thought.SciencePalgrave Standard US (P5)Palgrave Monograph (P6)EBOP41146Palgrave Social Sciences Collection009781349479283Clinical PsychologyCritical PsychologyHistory of PsychologyCounseling PsychologyPhilosophy of the SelfSociety3018000
49
Social Sciences978-3-030-79369-2HeiskalaRisto HeiskalaRisto Heiskala, Tampere University, Tampere, FinlandSemiotic SociologyXV, 224 p. 21 illus.12021final99.9930.00106.9932.1089.9927.00109.9933.00Soft cover1Palgrave Studies in Relational SociologySocial SciencesMonographBook224JHBJHBAPalgrave MacmillanSpringer International Publishing0Available2022-11-032021-11-012022-11-022022-11-0211. Introduction: toward semiotic sociology and social theory.- 2. A synthesis of semiology, semiotics and phenomenological sociology.- 3. Economy and society in semiotic institutionalism.- 4. Power and signification in neostructuralism.- 5. Modernity and the intersemiotic condition.- 6. Modernity, postmodernity and reflexive modernization.- 7. Modernity and the articulation of the gender system.- 8. Gender as an institution.- 9. From Goffman to semiotic sociology.- 10. Conclusion and the next steps.<div>Semiotic Sociology recalls classics of the field, such as Economy and Society by Neil Smelser and Talcott Parsons or Pierre Bourdieu’s Logic of Practice, in its scope, ambition, and subtle synthesis of remarkably different insights from opposed traditions of thought. Heiskala’s brilliance allows him to show how debates central to social theory for more than 100 years look different when properly grounded in the analysis of signification. Moving well beyond the cultural turn and debates about “social construction,” this is a book for the 21st century, which rewrites several vital concepts, among them power, modernity, and social structure. Heiskala’s vision for sociology makes it a human science worthy of the name.—Isaac Ariail Reed, Professor of Sociology, University of Virginia, USA This is a wonderfully accomplished book in the tradition of grand theory. Risto Heiskala skillfully integrates a plethora of intellectual traditions, from pragmatism to critical theory, to propose an innovative and perspicacious account of contemporary societal issues, notably surrounding gender.—Patrick Baert, Professor of Social Theory, University of Cambridge, UK In Semiotic Sociology, Risto Heiskala tackles a bold and welcome synthesizing challenge: to build bridges between theoretical approaches that have too quickly, yet for decades, been deemed as incompatible in the mainstream sociological selection of analytical tools. He makes this operation sound and seem easy. Yet, it is clear that these syntheses result from career-long scrutiny of theoretical debates but also a constant, careful eye to the needs of contemporary social research, a virtue not always present in theory building efforts.—Eeva Luhtakallio, Professor of Sociology, University of Helsinki, EU Finland
</div><div>Semiotic Sociology provides solid ground for cultural analysis in the social sciences by building up a mediation between structuralist semiology (Saussure), pragmatist semiotics (Peirce), and phenomenological sociology (Schutz, Garfinkel, Berger and Luckmann). This is a deviation from the common view that these traditions are seen as mutually exclusive alternatives and thus competitors of each other. The net result of the synthesis is that a new social theory emerges wherein action theories (Weber and rational choice) are based on phenomenological sociology and phenomenological sociology is based on neostructuralist semiotics, which is a synthesis of the Saussurean and the Peircean traditions of understanding habits of interpretation and interaction. The core issues of social research are then addressed on these grounds. The topics covered include the economy/society relationship, power, gender, modernity, institutionalization, the canon of current social theory including micro/macro and agency/structure relations, and the grounds of social criticism. Risto Heiskala is Professor of Sociology at Tampere University, EU Finland (Orcid id: 0000-0003-4466-7491). He is the author of Society as Semiosis and coeditor of Policy Design in the European Union and Social Innovations, Institutional Change and Economic Performance. He is a member of the Finnish Academy of Science and Letters and Vice-Chair of the Society for the Study of Power Relations (SSPR). He has been the Director of the Institute for Advanced Social Research (IASR) at the University of Tampere and a member of the executive committee of the European Sociological Association (ESA) as well as a founding member of its Social Theory Research Network.
</div>		Semiotic Sociology provides solid ground for cultural analysis in the social sciences by building up a mediation between structuralist semiology (Saussure), pragmatist semiotics (Peirce), and phenomenological sociology (Schutz, Garfinkel, Berger and Luckmann). This is a deviation from the common view that these traditions are seen as mutually exclusive alternatives and thus competitors of each other. The net result of the synthesis is that a new social theory emerges wherein action theories (Weber and rational choice) are based on phenomenological sociology and phenomenological sociology is based on neostructuralist semiotics, which is a synthesis of the Saussurean and the Peircean traditions of understanding habits of interpretation and interaction. The core issues of social research are then addressed on these grounds. The topics covered include the economy/society relationship, power, gender, modernity, institutionalization, the canon of current social theory including micro/macro and agency/structure relations, and the grounds of social criticism.
<p>Offers a synthetic conception of semiotics, with the aim of further establishing the discipline</p><p>Builds a research program for semiotic sociology</p><p>Outlines the future research tasks in the field of cultural and social theory</p>Risto Heiskala is Professor of Sociology at Tampere University, EU Finland (Orcid id: 0000-0003-4466-7491). He is the author of Society as Semiosis and coeditor of Policy Design in the European Union and Social Innovations, Institutional Change and Economic Performance. He is a member of the Finnish Academy of Science and Letters and Vice-Chair of the Society for the Study of Power Relations (SSPR). He has been the Director of the Institute for Advanced Social Research (IASR) at the University of Tampere and a member of the executive committee of the European Sociological Association (ESA) as well as a founding member of its Social Theory Research Network.SciencePalgrave Standard US (P5)Palgrave Monograph (P6)EBOP41176Social Sciences009783030793692Sociological TheorySocial TheorySociology of CultureHistory of Sociology318000
50
Social Sciences978-3-030-79366-1HeiskalaRisto HeiskalaRisto Heiskala, Tampere University, Tampere, FinlandSemiotic SociologyXV, 224 p. 21 illus.12021final99.9930.00106.9932.1089.9927.00109.9933.00Hard cover0Palgrave Studies in Relational SociologySocial SciencesMonographBook224JHBJHBAPalgrave MacmillanSpringer International Publishing0Available2021-11-022021-11-012021-11-192021-11-1911. Introduction: toward semiotic sociology and social theory.- 2. A synthesis of semiology, semiotics and phenomenological sociology.- 3. Economy and society in semiotic institutionalism.- 4. Power and signification in neostructuralism.- 5. Modernity and the intersemiotic condition.- 6. Modernity, postmodernity and reflexive modernization.- 7. Modernity and the articulation of the gender system.- 8. Gender as an institution.- 9. From Goffman to semiotic sociology.- 10. Conclusion and the next steps.<div>Semiotic Sociology recalls classics of the field, such as Economy and Society by Neil Smelser and Talcott Parsons or Pierre Bourdieu’s Logic of Practice, in its scope, ambition, and subtle synthesis of remarkably different insights from opposed traditions of thought. Heiskala’s brilliance allows him to show how debates central to social theory for more than 100 years look different when properly grounded in the analysis of signification. Moving well beyond the cultural turn and debates about “social construction,” this is a book for the 21st century, which rewrites several vital concepts, among them power, modernity, and social structure. Heiskala’s vision for sociology makes it a human science worthy of the name.—Isaac Ariail Reed, Professor of Sociology, University of Virginia, USA This is a wonderfully accomplished book in the tradition of grand theory. Risto Heiskala skillfully integrates a plethora of intellectual traditions, from pragmatism to critical theory, to propose an innovative and perspicacious account of contemporary societal issues, notably surrounding gender.—Patrick Baert, Professor of Social Theory, University of Cambridge, UK In Semiotic Sociology, Risto Heiskala tackles a bold and welcome synthesizing challenge: to build bridges between theoretical approaches that have too quickly, yet for decades, been deemed as incompatible in the mainstream sociological selection of analytical tools. He makes this operation sound and seem easy. Yet, it is clear that these syntheses result from career-long scrutiny of theoretical debates but also a constant, careful eye to the needs of contemporary social research, a virtue not always present in theory building efforts.—Eeva Luhtakallio, Professor of Sociology, University of Helsinki, EU Finland
</div><div>Semiotic Sociology provides solid ground for cultural analysis in the social sciences by building up a mediation between structuralist semiology (Saussure), pragmatist semiotics (Peirce), and phenomenological sociology (Schutz, Garfinkel, Berger and Luckmann). This is a deviation from the common view that these traditions are seen as mutually exclusive alternatives and thus competitors of each other. The net result of the synthesis is that a new social theory emerges wherein action theories (Weber and rational choice) are based on phenomenological sociology and phenomenological sociology is based on neostructuralist semiotics, which is a synthesis of the Saussurean and the Peircean traditions of understanding habits of interpretation and interaction. The core issues of social research are then addressed on these grounds. The topics covered include the economy/society relationship, power, gender, modernity, institutionalization, the canon of current social theory including micro/macro and agency/structure relations, and the grounds of social criticism. Risto Heiskala is Professor of Sociology at Tampere University, EU Finland (Orcid id: 0000-0003-4466-7491). He is the author of Society as Semiosis and coeditor of Policy Design in the European Union and Social Innovations, Institutional Change and Economic Performance. He is a member of the Finnish Academy of Science and Letters and Vice-Chair of the Society for the Study of Power Relations (SSPR). He has been the Director of the Institute for Advanced Social Research (IASR) at the University of Tampere and a member of the executive committee of the European Sociological Association (ESA) as well as a founding member of its Social Theory Research Network.
</div>		Semiotic Sociology provides solid ground for cultural analysis in the social sciences by building up a mediation between structuralist semiology (Saussure), pragmatist semiotics (Peirce), and phenomenological sociology (Schutz, Garfinkel, Berger and Luckmann). This is a deviation from the common view that these traditions are seen as mutually exclusive alternatives and thus competitors of each other. The net result of the synthesis is that a new social theory emerges wherein action theories (Weber and rational choice) are based on phenomenological sociology and phenomenological sociology is based on neostructuralist semiotics, which is a synthesis of the Saussurean and the Peircean traditions of understanding habits of interpretation and interaction. The core issues of social research are then addressed on these grounds. The topics covered include the economy/society relationship, power, gender, modernity, institutionalization, the canon of current social theory including micro/macro and agency/structure relations, and the grounds of social criticism.
<p>Offers a synthetic conception of semiotics, with the aim of further establishing the discipline</p><p>Builds a research program for semiotic sociology</p><p>Outlines the future research tasks in the field of cultural and social theory</p>Risto Heiskala is Professor of Sociology at Tampere University, EU Finland (Orcid id: 0000-0003-4466-7491). He is the author of Society as Semiosis and coeditor of Policy Design in the European Union and Social Innovations, Institutional Change and Economic Performance. He is a member of the Finnish Academy of Science and Letters and Vice-Chair of the Society for the Study of Power Relations (SSPR). He has been the Director of the Institute for Advanced Social Research (IASR) at the University of Tampere and a member of the executive committee of the European Sociological Association (ESA) as well as a founding member of its Social Theory Research Network.SciencePalgrave Standard US (P5)Palgrave Monograph (P6)EBOP41176Social Sciences009783030793661Sociological TheorySocial TheorySociology of CultureHistory of Sociology471000
51
Social Sciencesx978-3-030-68059-6Hickey-MoodyAnna Hickey-Moody; Christine Horn; Marissa Willcox; Eloise FlorenceAnna Hickey-Moody, RMIT University, Melbourne, VIC, Australia; Christine Horn, RMIT University, Melbourne, VIC, Australia; Marissa Willcox, RMIT University, Melbourne, VIC, Australia; Eloise Florence, RMIT University, Melbourne, VIC, AustraliaArts-Based Methods for Research with ChildrenXV, 149 p. 38 illus., 10 illus. in color.12021final59.9918.0064.1919.2654.9916.5064.9919.50Hard cover0Studies in Childhood and YouthSocial SciencesBrief/PivotBook149JHBKJNPalgrave MacmillanSpringer International Publishing0Available2021-02-232021-02-232023-07-082023-07-0811. Introduction.- 2. Doing - Arts workshops as research with children.- 3. Seeing - Visually analysing children's art.- 4. Being - Children's ways of being through art.- 5. Believing - Belief in the making: The impacts of arts-based approaches.- 6. Conclusion - Doing, seeing, being, and believing in arts-based research with children.“Flying soccer balls that are ice-cream factories inside, cars with wings, mobile recycling plants, streets that are rivers. These are the inventions children have offered up to Hickey-Moody. This is because she deftly uses arts-based methodologies to provide resources for engaging with children and communities to examine social issues such as belonging, community cohesion, faith and attachment. This book will appeal to those who wish to work with arts practices to explore similar themes in complex social circumstances, either as 'research' or as 'community engagement.' Hickey-Moody is an international leader in arts-based methodologies, if you're interested in how to do them well—you should read this book.”
—Mary Lou Rasmussen, Professor in the College of Arts & Sciences, Australian National University

This book offers a practical, methodological guide to conducting arts-based research with children by drawing on five years of the authors’ experience carrying out arts-based research with children in Australia and the UK. Based on the Australian Research Council-funded Interfaith Childhoods project, the authors describe methods of engaging communities and making data with children that foreground children’s experiences and worldviews through making, being with, and viewing art. Framing these methods of doing, seeing, being, and believing through art as modes of understanding children’s strategies for negotiating personal identities and values, this book explores the value of arts-based research as a means of obtaining complex information about children’s life worlds that can be difficult to express verbally.		This book offers a practical, methodological guide to conducting arts-based research with children by drawing on five years of the authors’ experience carrying out arts-based research with children in Australia and the UK. Based on the Australian Research Council-funded Interfaith Childhoods project, the authors describe methods of engaging communities and making data with children that foreground children’s experiences and worldviews through making, being with, and viewing art. Framing these methods of doing, seeing, being, and believing through art as modes of understanding children’s strategies for negotiating personal identities and values, this book explores the value of arts-based research as a means of obtaining complex information about children’s life worlds that can be difficult to express verbally.<p>Provides concrete, practical methods for working with children</p><p>Highlights and centers the voices and experiences of children</p><p>Offers innovative and forward-thinking insights that situate the work within the larger context of community</p>Anna Hickey-Moody is RMIT Vice-Chancellor’s Senior Research Fellow based in the Digital Ethnography Research Centre and School of Media and Communication at RMIT University, Australia, and an Australian Research Council Future Fellow.

Christine Horn is Research Associate at the Digital Ethnography Research Centre in the School of Media and Communication at RMIT University, Australia.

Marissa Willcox is Research Associate at the Digital Ethnography Research Centre in the School of Media and Communication at RMIT University, Australia.

Eloise Florence is Research Associate at RMIT University, Australia.		SciencePalgrave Standard US (P5)Palgrave Standard (P5)EBOP41176Social Sciences009783030680596Sociology of Family, Youth and AgingChildren and Youth WorkCreativity and Arts EducationResearch SkillsResearch Methods in Education454000
52
Social Sciences978-1-349-93248-1HornborgAlf HornborgAlf Hornborg, Lund University, SwedenGlobal MagicTechnologies of Appropriation from Ancient Rome to Wall StreetX, 201 p.12016final64.9919.5069.5420.8654.9916.5069.9921.00Soft cover0Palgrave Studies in Anthropology of SustainabilitySocial SciencesMonographBook201JHBHRPalgrave MacmillanPalgrave Macmillan US0Available2017-03-022017-03-022017-12-212017-12-2111. The Ecology of Things: Artifacts as Embodied Relations
2. Land, Energy, and Value in the Technocene
3. The Magic of Money
4. Empires, World-Systems, and Expanding Markets
5. Money as Fictive Energy: Unraveling the Relation between Economics and Physics
6. Agency, Ontology, and Global Magic
7. The Political Ecology of Technological Utopianism
8. Redesigning Money to Curb Globalization and Increase Resilience
9. Conclusions: Money, Technology, and Magic
This book explores the conventional modern understanding of technology and the idea that technological progress is illusory, deriving from a local, European perspective on what has historically been a global process of accumulation and asymmetric resource transfers. Globalized technologies are based on differences in wages and the prices of natural resources in different parts of the world. Their magic consists of enabling affluent people to exert power over others while hiding the extent to which this power is dependent on the public conceptions about technology. The reconceptualization of globalized technology proposed here will benefit current deliberations on sustainability, as it advocates fundamental transformations of the economy, rather than technological utopianism.Modern thought on economics and technology is no less magical than the world views of non-modern peoples. This book reveals how our ideas about growth and progress ignore how money and machines throughout history have been used to exploit less affluent parts of world society. The argument critically explores a middle ground between Marxist political ecology and Actor-Network Theory.Alf Hornborg is an anthropologist and Professor of Human Ecology at Lund University, Sweden.SciencePalgrave Standard US (P5)Palgrave Monograph (P6)EBOP41176Social Sciences009781349932481SociologySociology of ReligionSociology of CultureSociocultural AnthropologyEnvironmental Social Sciences2727000
53
Social Sciences978-1-137-56786-4HornborgAlf HornborgAlf Hornborg, Lund University, SwedenGlobal MagicTechnologies of Appropriation from Ancient Rome to Wall StreetX, 201 p.12016final49.9915.0053.4916.0544.9913.5054.9916.50Hard cover0Palgrave Studies in Anthropology of SustainabilitySocial SciencesMonographBook201JHBHRPalgrave MacmillanPalgrave Macmillan US0Available2016-03-082016-03-082016-03-092016-03-0911. The Ecology of Things: Artifacts as Embodied Relations
2. Land, Energy, and Value in the Technocene
3. The Magic of Money
4. Empires, World-Systems, and Expanding Markets
5. Money as Fictive Energy: Unraveling the Relation between Economics and Physics
6. Agency, Ontology, and Global Magic
7. The Political Ecology of Technological Utopianism
8. Redesigning Money to Curb Globalization and Increase Resilience
9. Conclusions: Money, Technology, and Magic
This book explores the conventional modern understanding of technology and the idea that technological progress is illusory, deriving from a local, European perspective on what has historically been a global process of accumulation and asymmetric resource transfers. Globalized technologies are based on differences in wages and the prices of natural resources in different parts of the world. Their magic consists of enabling affluent people to exert power over others while hiding the extent to which this power is dependent on the public conceptions about technology. The reconceptualization of globalized technology proposed here will benefit current deliberations on sustainability, as it advocates fundamental transformations of the economy, rather than technological utopianism.Modern thought on economics and technology is no less magical than the world views of non-modern peoples. This book reveals how our ideas about growth and progress ignore how money and machines throughout history have been used to exploit less affluent parts of world society. The argument critically explores a middle ground between Marxist political ecology and Actor-Network Theory.Alf Hornborg is an anthropologist and Professor of Human Ecology at Lund University, Sweden.SciencePalgrave Standard US (P5)Palgrave Monograph (P6)EBOP41176Social Sciences009781137567864SociologySociology of ReligionSociology of CultureSociocultural AnthropologyEnvironmental Social Sciences3698000
54
Social Sciences978-981-32-9388-5InoguchiTakashi Inoguchi; Lien Thi Quynh LeTakashi Inoguchi, J.F. Oberlin University, Tokyo, Japan; Lien Thi Quynh Le, Hue University, Hue, VietnamThe Development of Global Legislative PoliticsRousseau and Locke Writ GlobalXXXII, 288 p. 97 illus., 63 illus. in color.12020final89.9927.0096.2928.8979.9924.0099.9930.00Hard cover0Trust3Social SciencesMonographBook288HPSLBBSpringerSpringer Nature Singapore0Available2019-11-222019-11-102019-12-122019-12-121Preface.- Introduction.- Part I Global Social Contract.- Part II Global Quasi-Legislative Behavior.- Part III Three Varieties of Global Politics after the Cold War.- Appendix.<div><div>This book is the first systematic scientific study of global quasi-legislation. Taking public opinion and multilateral agreements as the international equivalent to national election and passing laws on the national scale, and extending nation-state concepts to a global society, it analyzes citizens' preferences and the state's willingness to enter into 120 multilateral treaties. After identifying the links as a first step toward conceptualizing quasi-legislative global politics, the book examines how each of the 193 states manifests quasi-legislative behavior by factor-analyzing six instrumental variables such as treaty participation index and six policy domains of multilateral treaties, including peace and trade. It then discusses global change between 1989 and 2008, and conceptually and empirically examines the three theories of global politics that originated during that period: the theory of power transition, theory of civilizational clash and theory of global legislative politics. Lastly, it proposes a theory of global legislative politics. Shedding fresh light on the transformative nature of multilateral treaties, this book attracts researchers and students in political philosophy, international law and international relations as well as practitioners and journalists.</div><div>
</div><div>Inoguchi and Le have developed a genuinely original perspective on world politics, one that opens up a new research agenda for thinking about state and global actors simultaneously.</div><div>-- Anne-Marie Slaughter, Bert G. Kerstetter '66 University Professor Emerita of Politics and International Affairs, Princeton University</div><div>
</div><div>This is one of those books that warrant a global readership given its emphasis on the implied trust that we invest in public institutions as viewed from an interdisciplinary perspective. </div><div>-- Richard J. Estes, Professor of Social Policy & Practice, University of Pennsylvania, Philadelphia, Pennsylvania</div><div>
</div><div>This book is innovative and distinctive in carving out a new way to look at “global legislative politics.” I do not know of anything that compares in this interesting and novel niche of international relations analysis.</div><div>-- William R. Thompson, Distinguished Professor and Rogers Chair of Political Science Emeritus, Indiana University</div></div>		<div>This book is the first systematic scientific study of global quasi-legislation. Taking public opinion and multilateral agreements as the international equivalent to national election and passing laws on the national scale, and extending nation-state concepts to a global society, it analyzes citizens' preferences and the state's willingness to enter into 120 multilateral treaties. After identifying the links as a first step toward conceptualizing quasi-legislative global politics, the book examines how each of the 193 states manifests quasi-legislative behavior by factor-analyzing six instrumental variables such as treaty participation index and six policy domains of multilateral treaties, including peace and trade. It then discusses global change between 1989 and 2008, and conceptually and empirically examines the three theories of global politics that originated during that period: the theory of power transition, theory of civilizational clash and theory of global legislative politics. Lastly, it proposes a theory of global legislative politics. Shedding fresh light on the transformative nature of multilateral treaties, this book attracts researchers and students in political philosophy, international law and international relations as well as practitioners and journalists.</div><div>
</div><div>Inoguchi and Le have developed a genuinely original perspective on world politics, one that opens up a new research agenda for thinking about state and global actors simultaneously.</div><div>-- Anne-Marie Slaughter, Bert G. Kerstetter '66 University Professor Emerita of Politics and International Affairs, Princeton University</div><div>
</div><div>This is one of those books that warrant a global readership given its emphasis on the implied trust that we invest in public institutions as viewed from an interdisciplinary perspective. </div><div>-- Richard J. Estes, Professor of Social Policy & Practice, University of Pennsylvania, Philadelphia, Pennsylvania</div><div>
</div><div>This book is innovative and distinctive in carving out a new way to look at “global legislative politics.” I do not know of anything that compares in this interesting and novel niche of international relations analysis.</div><div>-- William R. Thompson, Distinguished Professor and Rogers Chair of Political Science Emeritus, Indiana University</div><div>
</div><div> </div>		<p>Provides insights into multilateral treaties formulated as global social contract and global quasi-legisalative behavior</p><p>Puts multilateral treaties in context , through Rousseau and Locke Writ Global</p><p>Presents evidence-based anatomy of multilateral treaties as the Theory of Global Legislative Politics</p>ScienceProfessional Books (2)Science (SC)EBOP41176Social Sciences009789813293885Political PhilosophySources and Subjects of International Law, International OrganizationsPolitical TheoryInternational Relations647000
55
Social Sciences978-981-32-9391-5InoguchiTakashi Inoguchi; Lien Thi Quynh LeTakashi Inoguchi, J.F. Oberlin University, Tokyo, Japan; Lien Thi Quynh Le, Hue University, Hue, VietnamThe Development of Global Legislative PoliticsRousseau and Locke Writ GlobalXXXII, 288 p. 97 illus., 63 illus. in color.12020final64.9919.5069.5420.8654.9916.5069.9921.00Soft cover1Trust3Social SciencesMonographBook288HPSLBBSpringerSpringer Nature Singapore0Available2020-11-222019-11-102020-11-222020-11-221Preface.- Introduction.- Part I Global Social Contract.- Part II Global Quasi-Legislative Behavior.- Part III Three Varieties of Global Politics after the Cold War.- Appendix.<div><div>This book is the first systematic scientific study of global quasi-legislation. Taking public opinion and multilateral agreements as the international equivalent to national election and passing laws on the national scale, and extending nation-state concepts to a global society, it analyzes citizens' preferences and the state's willingness to enter into 120 multilateral treaties. After identifying the links as a first step toward conceptualizing quasi-legislative global politics, the book examines how each of the 193 states manifests quasi-legislative behavior by factor-analyzing six instrumental variables such as treaty participation index and six policy domains of multilateral treaties, including peace and trade. It then discusses global change between 1989 and 2008, and conceptually and empirically examines the three theories of global politics that originated during that period: the theory of power transition, theory of civilizational clash and theory of global legislative politics. Lastly, it proposes a theory of global legislative politics. Shedding fresh light on the transformative nature of multilateral treaties, this book attracts researchers and students in political philosophy, international law and international relations as well as practitioners and journalists.</div><div>
</div><div>Inoguchi and Le have developed a genuinely original perspective on world politics, one that opens up a new research agenda for thinking about state and global actors simultaneously.</div><div>-- Anne-Marie Slaughter, Bert G. Kerstetter '66 University Professor Emerita of Politics and International Affairs, Princeton University</div><div>
</div><div>This is one of those books that warrant a global readership given its emphasis on the implied trust that we invest in public institutions as viewed from an interdisciplinary perspective. </div><div>-- Richard J. Estes, Professor of Social Policy & Practice, University of Pennsylvania, Philadelphia, Pennsylvania</div><div>
</div><div>This book is innovative and distinctive in carving out a new way to look at “global legislative politics.” I do not know of anything that compares in this interesting and novel niche of international relations analysis.</div><div>-- William R. Thompson, Distinguished Professor and Rogers Chair of Political Science Emeritus, Indiana University</div></div>		<div>This book is the first systematic scientific study of global quasi-legislation. Taking public opinion and multilateral agreements as the international equivalent to national election and passing laws on the national scale, and extending nation-state concepts to a global society, it analyzes citizens' preferences and the state's willingness to enter into 120 multilateral treaties. After identifying the links as a first step toward conceptualizing quasi-legislative global politics, the book examines how each of the 193 states manifests quasi-legislative behavior by factor-analyzing six instrumental variables such as treaty participation index and six policy domains of multilateral treaties, including peace and trade. It then discusses global change between 1989 and 2008, and conceptually and empirically examines the three theories of global politics that originated during that period: the theory of power transition, theory of civilizational clash and theory of global legislative politics. Lastly, it proposes a theory of global legislative politics. Shedding fresh light on the transformative nature of multilateral treaties, this book attracts researchers and students in political philosophy, international law and international relations as well as practitioners and journalists.</div><div>
</div><div>Inoguchi and Le have developed a genuinely original perspective on world politics, one that opens up a new research agenda for thinking about state and global actors simultaneously.</div><div>-- Anne-Marie Slaughter, Bert G. Kerstetter '66 University Professor Emerita of Politics and International Affairs, Princeton University</div><div>
</div><div>This is one of those books that warrant a global readership given its emphasis on the implied trust that we invest in public institutions as viewed from an interdisciplinary perspective. </div><div>-- Richard J. Estes, Professor of Social Policy & Practice, University of Pennsylvania, Philadelphia, Pennsylvania</div><div>
</div><div>This book is innovative and distinctive in carving out a new way to look at “global legislative politics.” I do not know of anything that compares in this interesting and novel niche of international relations analysis.</div><div>-- William R. Thompson, Distinguished Professor and Rogers Chair of Political Science Emeritus, Indiana University</div><div>
</div><div> </div>		<p>Provides insights into multilateral treaties formulated as global social contract and global quasi-legisalative behavior</p><p>Puts multilateral treaties in context , through Rousseau and Locke Writ Global</p><p>Presents evidence-based anatomy of multilateral treaties as the Theory of Global Legislative Politics</p>ScienceProfessional Books (2)Science (SC)EBOP41176Social Sciences009789813293915Political PhilosophySources and Subjects of International Law, International OrganizationsPolitical TheoryInternational Relations492000
56
Social Sciences978-94-017-8263-0InoguchiTakashi Inoguchi; Seiji FujiiTakashi Inoguchi, University of Niigata Prefecture Tokyo S, Bunkyo-ku, Tokyo, Japan; Seiji Fujii, University of Niigata Prefecture, Niigata, JapanThe Quality of Life in AsiaA Comparison of Quality of Life in AsiaXII, 248 p.12013final99.9930.00106.9932.1089.9927.00109.9933.00Soft cover0Quality of Life in Asia1Social SciencesMonographBook (Paperback Initiative)248JFFKCPSpringerSpringer Netherlands0Available2014-08-092014-08-092012-07-302014-03-311Table of content- 1. Introduction.- 2. Quality of Life in Twenty-nine Societies in Asia.- 3. Comparison of Quality of Life between Societies.- 4. Key Characteristics of Quality of Life in Asia and its Sub-regions: East, Southeast, South, and Central Asia.- 5. Conclusion.This book comprehensively and systematically explores demographic profile, lifestyles, value priorities, and subjective and objective quality of life of the ordinary citizens in most societies in Asia, utilizing the AsiaBarometer Surveys conducted annually from 2003 through 2008. The surveyed area encompasses 29 societies in East, Southeast, South and Central Asia. The book examines life quality in each individual society and compares it between societies. In addition, the book studies generalized characteristics of life quality in the entire and sub-regions of Asia. This book is intended for scholars in the fields of quality of life, political science, sociology and economics as well as for policymakers.This book studies and compares quality of life in 29 countries/societies in Asia: Afghanistan, Bangladesh, Bhutan, Brunei, Cambodia, China, Hong Kong, India, Indonesia, Japan, Kazakhstan, Kyrgyzstan, Korea(South), Laos, Malaysia, Maldives, Mongolia, Myanmar, Nepal, Pakistan, the Philippines, Singapore, Sri Lanka, Taiwan, Tajikistan, Thailand, Turkmenistan, Uzbekistan, and Vietnam. We utilize the AsiaBarometer Surveys conducted annually from 2003 through 2008. We focus on the notion of subjective quality of life and conceptualize it as two levels, global and domain. After we explain about the AsiaBarometer Survey Project, we explore current country profile, demographics, lifestyles, value priorities, specific life domain assessment and overall quality of life. We then estimate the independent effects of demographics, lifestyles, value priorities, life domain assessment on the overall quality of life within each society. As well as comparing the results between nations, we look for key generalized characteristics of life quality for the entire and sub-regions of Asia.<p>The first book to study quality of life in the vast region of Asia</p><p>Encompasses 29 societies in East, Southeast, South and Central Asia</p><p>Uses a comprehensive and systematic research design</p><p>Explores demographic profile, lifestyles, value priorities, and subjective and objective quality of life</p><p>Looks at ordianry citizens within each society and compares societies</p><p>Based on a sample of over 50,000</p>Takashi INOGUCHI is Professor of Political Science at Faculty of Law, Chuo University and Professor Emeritus at the University of Tokyo. Dr. Inoguchi is the editor of the Japanese Journal of Political Science published by Cambridge University Press. He is director of the AsiaBarometer project. He served as the Senior Vice-Rector of the United Nations University at the rank of Assistant-Secretary-General and President of Japan Association of International Relations. His published works include: The Quality of Life in Confucian Asia (forthcoming) (co-edited with Doh Chull Shin); Citizens and the State: Attitudes in Western Europe and East and Southeast Asia (2007) (coauthored with Jean Blondel); and Political Cultures in Asia and Europe (2006) (coauthored with Jean Blondel). Dr. Inoguchi graduated from the University of Tokyo with B.A. and M.A. in international relations in 1966 and 1968 respectively and received Ph.D. in political science from the Massachusetts Institute of Technology in 1974.ScienceProfessional Books (2)Science (SC)EBOP11648Humanities, Social Sciences and Law009789401782630Quality of Life ResearchSocial PolicyPolitical ScienceRegional and Spatial EconomicsSociety3985000
57
Social Sciences978-90-481-9071-3InoguchiTakashi Inoguchi; Seiji FujiiTakashi Inoguchi, University of Niigata Prefecture Tokyo S, Bunkyo-ku, Tokyo, Japan; Seiji Fujii, University of Niigata Prefecture, Niigata, JapanThe Quality of Life in AsiaA Comparison of Quality of Life in AsiaXII, 248 p.12013final99.9930.00106.9932.1089.9927.00109.9933.00Hard cover0Quality of Life in Asia1Social SciencesMonographBook248JFFKCPSpringerSpringer Netherlands0Available2012-07-212012-07-212012-08-312012-08-311Table of content- 1. Introduction.- 2. Quality of Life in Twenty-nine Societies in Asia.- 3. Comparison of Quality of Life between Societies.- 4. Key Characteristics of Quality of Life in Asia and its Sub-regions: East, Southeast, South, and Central Asia.- 5. Conclusion.This book comprehensively and systematically explores demographic profile, lifestyles, value priorities, and subjective and objective quality of life of the ordinary citizens in most societies in Asia, utilizing the AsiaBarometer Surveys conducted annually from 2003 through 2008. The surveyed area encompasses 29 societies in East, Southeast, South and Central Asia. The book examines life quality in each individual society and compares it between societies. In addition, the book studies generalized characteristics of life quality in the entire and sub-regions of Asia. This book is intended for scholars in the fields of quality of life, political science, sociology and economics as well as for policymakers.This book studies and compares quality of life in 29 countries/societies in Asia: Afghanistan, Bangladesh, Bhutan, Brunei, Cambodia, China, Hong Kong, India, Indonesia, Japan, Kazakhstan, Kyrgyzstan, Korea(South), Laos, Malaysia, Maldives, Mongolia, Myanmar, Nepal, Pakistan, the Philippines, Singapore, Sri Lanka, Taiwan, Tajikistan, Thailand, Turkmenistan, Uzbekistan, and Vietnam. We utilize the AsiaBarometer Surveys conducted annually from 2003 through 2008. We focus on the notion of subjective quality of life and conceptualize it as two levels, global and domain. After we explain about the AsiaBarometer Survey Project, we explore current country profile, demographics, lifestyles, value priorities, specific life domain assessment and overall quality of life. We then estimate the independent effects of demographics, lifestyles, value priorities, life domain assessment on the overall quality of life within each society. As well as comparing the results between nations, we look for key generalized characteristics of life quality for the entire and sub-regions of Asia.<p>The first book to study quality of life in the vast region of Asia</p><p>Encompasses 29 societies in East, Southeast, South and Central Asia</p><p>Uses a comprehensive and systematic research design</p><p>Explores demographic profile, lifestyles, value priorities, and subjective and objective quality of life</p><p>Looks at ordianry citizens within each society and compares societies</p><p>Based on a sample of over 50,000</p>Takashi INOGUCHI is Professor of Political Science at Faculty of Law, Chuo University and Professor Emeritus at the University of Tokyo. Dr. Inoguchi is the editor of the Japanese Journal of Political Science published by Cambridge University Press. He is director of the AsiaBarometer project. He served as the Senior Vice-Rector of the United Nations University at the rank of Assistant-Secretary-General and President of Japan Association of International Relations. His published works include: The Quality of Life in Confucian Asia (forthcoming) (co-edited with Doh Chull Shin); Citizens and the State: Attitudes in Western Europe and East and Southeast Asia (2007) (coauthored with Jean Blondel); and Political Cultures in Asia and Europe (2006) (coauthored with Jean Blondel). Dr. Inoguchi graduated from the University of Tokyo with B.A. and M.A. in international relations in 1966 and 1968 respectively and received Ph.D. in political science from the Massachusetts Institute of Technology in 1974.ScienceProfessional Books (2)Science (SC)EBOP11648Humanities, Social Sciences and Law009789048190713Quality of Life ResearchSocial PolicyPolitical ScienceRegional and Spatial EconomicsSociety559000
58
Social Sciences978-981-10-9588-7InoguchiTakashi Inoguchi; Yasuharu TokudaTakashi Inoguchi, J.F. Oberlin University, Tokyo, Japan; Yasuharu Tokuda, Okinawa Muribushi Project for Teaching Hospitals, Okinawa, JapanTrust with Asian CharacteristicsInterpersonal and InstitutionalXII, 210 p. 36 illus.12017final99.9930.00106.9932.1089.9927.00109.9933.00Soft cover1Trust1Social SciencesContributed volumeBook (Paperback Initiative)210JFFJPBSpringerSpringer Nature Singapore0Available2018-08-072018-08-072019-03-212019-04-1811. Introduction.- 2.Interpersonal Trust.- 2.1. Social Capital in Ten Asian Societies.- 2.2. Social Capital in East Asia: Comparative Political Culture in Confucian Societies.- 2.3. Quantifying Social Capital in Central and South Asia: Are There Democratic, Developmental, and Regionalizing Potentials?.- 2.4. Psychometric Approach to Social Capital: Using AsiaBarometer Survey Data in 29 Asian Societies.- 2.5. Interpersonal Mistrust and Unhappiness among Japanese People.- 2.6 Interpersonal Trust and Quality of Life: A Cross-Sectional Study in Japan.- 2.7 Individual and Country-Level Effects of Social Trust on Happiness: The Asia Barometer Survey.- 3. Institutional Trust.- 3.1. Government Performance and Confidence in Political Institutions.- 3.2. Sociotropic and Pocketbook Politics in Japan.- 3.3. Influence of Income on Health Status and Healthcare Utilization in Working Adults: an Illustration of Health among the Working Poor in Japan.- 3.4 The relationship between trust in mass media and the healthcare system and individual health: evidence from the AsiaBarometer Survey.<div>This volume, edited by a political scientist and a practicing medical doctor, is organized into two parts: interpersonal and institutional trust. To gauge trust both interpersonal and institutional in 29 Asian societies, the AsiaBarometer survey, the best—and only—available such data source in the world was used. The survey, focusing on the quality of life in Asia, was carried out in the 2000s in 29 Asian societies (in East, Southeast, South, and Central Asia), and in the United States, Australia, and Russia for comparative analysis.</div><div>Trust is a key intermediate variable linking an individual and a broader society. Yet systematically and scientifically assembled data have tended to be narrowly focused on Western societies. In the 2000s non-Western data on the quality of life have steadily increased. The AsiaBarometer survey, however, is the instrument that best examines the quality of life in a large number of Asian societies with nationwide random sampling and face-to-face interviewing, with the number of samples ranging from 1,000 to 3,000.</div><div>In gauging interpersonal trust, the question, 'Generally, do you think people can be trusted, or do you think that you can't be too careful in dealing with people (i.e., that it pays to be wary of people)?' is asked along with additional questions. In measuring institutional trust, the question is asked: 'How much confidence do you place in the following institutions?' (Listed are the central government, the courts, the military, the police, political parties, the parliament, mass media, business companies, medical hospitals, and other institutions.) In examining interpersonal and institutional trust Asia-wide, special attention is paid to historical and geo-cultural backgrounds of the societies being surveyed. Examination of the link between trust of mass media and individual health and between trust in medical care and individual health focuses on Japan.</div><div>Among the 12 chapters, 9 are reprints of journal articles published in the 2000s, and the introduction and 2 other chapters were written especially for this book to reflect the latest progress in the field. This work provides a rich source to be consulted by a wide range of readers interested in comparative politics, quality of life, and Asia in general.</div><div><div>This volume, edited by a political scientist and a practicing medical doctor, is organized into two parts: interpersonal and institutional trust. To gauge trust both interpersonal and institutional in 29 Asian societies, the AsiaBarometer survey, the best—and only—available such data source in the world was used. The survey, focusing on the quality of life in Asia, was carried out in the 2000s in 29 Asian societies (in East, Southeast, South, and Central Asia), and in the United States, Australia, and Russia for comparative analysis.
Trust is a key intermediate variable linking an individual and a broader society. Yet systematically and scientifically assembled data have tended to be narrowly focused on Western societies. In the 2000s non-Western data on the quality of life have steadily increased. The AsiaBarometer survey, however, is the instrument that best examines the quality of life in a large number of Asian societies with nationwide random sampling and face-to-face interviewing, with the number of samples ranging from 1,000 to 3,000.
In gauging interpersonal trust, the question, 'Generally, do you think people can be trusted, or do you think that you can't be too careful in dealing with people (i.e., that it pays to be wary of people)?' is asked along with additional questions. In measuring institutional trust, the question is asked: 'How much confidence do you place in the following institutions?' (Listed are the central government, the courts, the military, the police, political parties, the parliament, mass media, business companies, medical hospitals, and other institutions.) In examining interpersonal and institutional trust Asia-wide, special attention is paid to historical and geo-cultural backgrounds of the societies being surveyed. Examination of the link between trust of mass media and individual health and between trust in medical care and individual health focuses on Japan.</div><div>Among the 12 chapters, 9 are reprints of journal articles published in the 2000s, and the introduction and 2 other chapters were written especially for this book to reflect the latest progress in the field. This work provides a rich source to be consulted by a wide range of readers interested in comparative politics, quality of life, and Asia in general.</div></div><div>
</div>		<p>Presents results of analysis of AsiaBarometer survey data focusing on the quality of life from 29 Asian societies and 3 Western societies</p><p>Provides coverage and analysis of trust, both interpersonal and institutional, in Asian settings, with wide appeal comparable to that of classics in the field</p><p>Is based on interdisciplinary perspectives, with a balance between the Abrahamic and Dharmic intellectual traditions—the drive for unifying and standardizing as well as the respect for diversity and heterogeneity—for a deeper understanding of the concept of trust</p>ScienceProfessional Books (2)Science (SC)EBOP41176Social Sciences009789811095887Quality of Life ResearchComparative Politics454000
59
Social Sciences978-981-10-2304-0InoguchiTakashi Inoguchi; Yasuharu TokudaTakashi Inoguchi, J.F. Oberlin University, Tokyo, Japan; Yasuharu Tokuda, Okinawa Muribushi Project for Teaching Hospitals, Okinawa, JapanTrust with Asian CharacteristicsInterpersonal and InstitutionalXII, 210 p. 36 illus.12017final99.9930.00106.9932.1089.9927.00109.9933.00Hard cover0Trust1Social SciencesContributed volumeBook210JFFJPBSpringerSpringer Nature Singapore0Available2017-03-212017-03-152017-07-192017-07-1911. Introduction.- 2.Interpersonal Trust.- 2.1. Social Capital in Ten Asian Societies.- 2.2. Social Capital in East Asia: Comparative Political Culture in Confucian Societies.- 2.3. Quantifying Social Capital in Central and South Asia: Are There Democratic, Developmental, and Regionalizing Potentials?.- 2.4. Psychometric Approach to Social Capital: Using AsiaBarometer Survey Data in 29 Asian Societies.- 2.5. Interpersonal Mistrust and Unhappiness among Japanese People.- 2.6 Interpersonal Trust and Quality of Life: A Cross-Sectional Study in Japan.- 2.7 Individual and Country-Level Effects of Social Trust on Happiness: The Asia Barometer Survey.- 3. Institutional Trust.- 3.1. Government Performance and Confidence in Political Institutions.- 3.2. Sociotropic and Pocketbook Politics in Japan.- 3.3. Influence of Income on Health Status and Healthcare Utilization in Working Adults: an Illustration of Health among the Working Poor in Japan.- 3.4 The relationship between trust in mass media and the healthcare system and individual health: evidence from the AsiaBarometer Survey.<div>This volume, edited by a political scientist and a practicing medical doctor, is organized into two parts: interpersonal and institutional trust. To gauge trust both interpersonal and institutional in 29 Asian societies, the AsiaBarometer survey, the best—and only—available such data source in the world was used. The survey, focusing on the quality of life in Asia, was carried out in the 2000s in 29 Asian societies (in East, Southeast, South, and Central Asia), and in the United States, Australia, and Russia for comparative analysis.</div><div>Trust is a key intermediate variable linking an individual and a broader society. Yet systematically and scientifically assembled data have tended to be narrowly focused on Western societies. In the 2000s non-Western data on the quality of life have steadily increased. The AsiaBarometer survey, however, is the instrument that best examines the quality of life in a large number of Asian societies with nationwide random sampling and face-to-face interviewing, with the number of samples ranging from 1,000 to 3,000.</div><div>In gauging interpersonal trust, the question, 'Generally, do you think people can be trusted, or do you think that you can't be too careful in dealing with people (i.e., that it pays to be wary of people)?' is asked along with additional questions. In measuring institutional trust, the question is asked: 'How much confidence do you place in the following institutions?' (Listed are the central government, the courts, the military, the police, political parties, the parliament, mass media, business companies, medical hospitals, and other institutions.) In examining interpersonal and institutional trust Asia-wide, special attention is paid to historical and geo-cultural backgrounds of the societies being surveyed. Examination of the link between trust of mass media and individual health and between trust in medical care and individual health focuses on Japan.</div><div>Among the 12 chapters, 9 are reprints of journal articles published in the 2000s, and the introduction and 2 other chapters were written especially for this book to reflect the latest progress in the field. This work provides a rich source to be consulted by a wide range of readers interested in comparative politics, quality of life, and Asia in general.</div><div><div>This volume, edited by a political scientist and a practicing medical doctor, is organized into two parts: interpersonal and institutional trust. To gauge trust both interpersonal and institutional in 29 Asian societies, the AsiaBarometer survey, the best—and only—available such data source in the world was used. The survey, focusing on the quality of life in Asia, was carried out in the 2000s in 29 Asian societies (in East, Southeast, South, and Central Asia), and in the United States, Australia, and Russia for comparative analysis.
Trust is a key intermediate variable linking an individual and a broader society. Yet systematically and scientifically assembled data have tended to be narrowly focused on Western societies. In the 2000s non-Western data on the quality of life have steadily increased. The AsiaBarometer survey, however, is the instrument that best examines the quality of life in a large number of Asian societies with nationwide random sampling and face-to-face interviewing, with the number of samples ranging from 1,000 to 3,000.
In gauging interpersonal trust, the question, 'Generally, do you think people can be trusted, or do you think that you can't be too careful in dealing with people (i.e., that it pays to be wary of people)?' is asked along with additional questions. In measuring institutional trust, the question is asked: 'How much confidence do you place in the following institutions?' (Listed are the central government, the courts, the military, the police, political parties, the parliament, mass media, business companies, medical hospitals, and other institutions.) In examining interpersonal and institutional trust Asia-wide, special attention is paid to historical and geo-cultural backgrounds of the societies being surveyed. Examination of the link between trust of mass media and individual health and between trust in medical care and individual health focuses on Japan.</div><div>Among the 12 chapters, 9 are reprints of journal articles published in the 2000s, and the introduction and 2 other chapters were written especially for this book to reflect the latest progress in the field. This work provides a rich source to be consulted by a wide range of readers interested in comparative politics, quality of life, and Asia in general.</div></div><div>
</div>		<p>Presents results of analysis of AsiaBarometer survey data focusing on the quality of life from 29 Asian societies and 3 Western societies</p><p>Provides coverage and analysis of trust, both interpersonal and institutional, in Asian settings, with wide appeal comparable to that of classics in the field</p><p>Is based on interdisciplinary perspectives, with a balance between the Abrahamic and Dharmic intellectual traditions—the drive for unifying and standardizing as well as the respect for diversity and heterogeneity—for a deeper understanding of the concept of trust</p>ScienceProfessional Books (2)Science (SC)EBOP41176Social Sciences009789811023040Quality of Life ResearchComparative Politics4616000
60
Social Sciences978-3-031-15575-8JamesJeffrey JamesJeffrey James, Tilburg University, Tilburg, The NetherlandsGender, Internet Use, and Covid-19 in the Global SouthMultiple Causalities and Policy OptionsVIII, 62 p. 143 illus.12022final39.9912.0042.7912.8434.9910.5044.9913.50Soft cover0SpringerBriefs in EconomicsSocial SciencesBrief/PivotBook62KCMGTFSpringerSpringer International Publishing0Available2022-10-012022-09-302022-10-172022-10-171Chapter 1. Introduction.- Chapter 2. First-Time Users of the Mobile Internet in the Global South.- Chapter 3. The Gender Digital Divide in Mobile Internet Use: Evidence, Explanations and Policy for the Global-South.- Chapter 4. Gender, Mobile Internet and COVID-19 in the Global South: Multiple Causalities.- Chapter 5. The Digital Use Divide Between Males and Females at Different Levels of Aggregation.This book analyzes the use of the mobile Internet against the background of gender bias and Covid-19, currently two of the most important and pressing problems of the Global South. The book argues that the degree of benefits from this new technology depends heavily on the way it is actually used and that most new technologies are developed for the conditions prevailing in rich countries, where they tend to be quite easily adopted and used. In the Global South, by contrast, a paucity of digital skills and other factors make the potentially valuable benefits from the Internet much more difficult to derive. <div>
</div><div>Using empirical data recently provided by the Groupe Speciale Mobile Association (GSMA), the book examines the existence and extent of the digital divide between males and females in mobile Internet use, which constitutes a new form of divide. It sheds light on the acute difficulty for first-time mobile Internet users in the Global South, and especially Sub-Saharan Africa, to learn the digital skills that are needed to use the said technology effectively, with a special focus on how these users acquire the required knowledge, without having undergone the process of learning by doing. The book further discusses the determinants of digital skills in the Global South, as well as major factors underlying the extent to which different users actually benefit from the mobile Internet, such as gender, location, age, and education. Finally, it investigates how womens' use of the Internet has been altered by the pandemic in the Global South.</div><div>
</div><div>This book will appeal to students, researchers, and scholars of development economics and development studies, as well as policy-makers interested in a better understanding of the impact of gender bias and Covid-19 on mobile internet use in the Global South.</div>		<p>Discusses the determinants of digital skills in the Global South</p><p>Examines the extent of the digital divide between males and females in mobile Internet use</p><p>Based on recent data and empirical evidence</p>Jeffrey James is Emeritus Professor of Development Economics at Tilburg University (The Netherlands). Prior to that, he worked at Boston University (USA) and Oxford University (UK). His primary research interest is in information technology and development. He has conducted field research in East Africa and Latin America. James has written or edited various books and numerous peer-reviewed articles.ScienceProfessional Books (2)Science (SC)EBOP41176Social Sciences009783031155758Development EconomicsDevelopment StudiesEconomic PolicyEconomic GrowthEconomic Aspects of Globalization131000
61
Social Sciences978-981-15-2738-8JohanssonOla JohanssonOla Johansson, University of Pittsburgh at Johnstown, Johnstown, PA, USASongs from SwedenShaping Pop Culture in a Globalized Music IndustryXVII, 169 p. 7 illus., 5 illus. in color.12020final59.9918.0064.1919.2654.9916.5064.9919.50Soft cover1Geographies of MediaSocial SciencesBrief/PivotBook169RGCAVPalgrave PivotSpringer Nature Singapore0Available2021-05-172020-05-162021-05-172021-05-1711. Introduction: The Swedish Music Miracle, from 1.0 to 2.0.- 2. Local Music in a Global Network: Circulation, Reputation, and Hybridity.- 3. The Main Players.- 4. An Analysis of Swedish Pop Music.- 5. Concluding Thoughts.
<ol> </ol>		Songs from Sweden shows how Swedish songwriters and producers are the creative forces behind much of today’s international pop music. As Ola Johansson reveals, the roots of this “music miracle” can be found in Sweden’s culture, economy, and thriving music industry, concentrated in Stockholm. While Swedish writer-producers developed early global recognition for making commercially successful pop music, new Swedish writer-producers have continuously emerged during the last two decades. Global artists travel to Stockholm to negotiate, record, and co-write songs. At the same time, Swedish writer-producers are part of a global collaborative network that spans the world. In addition to concrete commercial accomplishments, the Swedish success is also a result of the acquisition of reputational capital gained through positive associations that the global music industry holds about Swedish music. Ultimately, pop songs from Sweden exhibit a form of cultural hybridity, drawing from both local and global cultural expressions.<div>
</div><div>Ola Johansson is a professor of geography at the University of Pittsburgh at Johnstown. He holds a Ph.D. from the University of Tennessee, and has also researched music as a guest scholar at Linnaeus University in Sweden. Johansson is co-author of the books Sound, Society, and the Geography of Popular Music and World Regional Geography.
</div>		Songs from Sweden shows how Swedish songwriters and producers are the creative forces behind much of today’s international pop music. As Ola Johansson reveals, the roots of this “music miracle” can be found in Sweden’s culture, economy, and thriving music industry, concentrated in Stockholm. While Swedish writer-producers developed early global recognition for making commercially successful pop music, new Swedish writer-producers have continuously emerged during the last two decades. Global artists travel to Stockholm to negotiate, record, and co-write songs. At the same time, Swedish writer-producers are part of a global collaborative network that spans the world. In addition to concrete commercial accomplishments, the Swedish success is also a result of the acquisition of reputational capital gained through positive associations that the global music industry holds about Swedish music. Ultimately, pop songs from Sweden exhibit a form of cultural hybridity, drawing from both local and global cultural expressions.<p>An original contribution on a theme which has not been properly explored previously</p><p>Provides an innovative theoretical construct</p><p>Features fascinating primary-source interviews with prominent music producers</p>Ola Johansson is a professor of geography at the University of Pittsburgh at Johnstown. He holds a Ph.D. from the University of Tennessee, and has also researched music as a guest scholar at Linnaeus University in Sweden. Johansson is co-author of the books Sound, Society, and the Geography of Popular Music and World Regional Geography.SciencePalgrave Standard US (P5)Palgrave Standard (P5)EBOP41176Social Sciences009789811527388Human GeographyMusicPolitical Sociology454000
62
Social Sciences978-981-15-2735-7JohanssonOla JohanssonOla Johansson, University of Pittsburgh at Johnstown, Johnstown, PA, USASongs from SwedenShaping Pop Culture in a Globalized Music IndustryXVII, 169 p. 7 illus., 5 illus. in color.12020final59.9918.0064.1919.2654.9916.5064.9919.50Hard cover0Geographies of MediaSocial SciencesBrief/PivotBook169RGCAVPalgrave PivotSpringer Nature Singapore0Available2020-05-172020-05-162020-07-012020-07-0111. Introduction: The Swedish Music Miracle, from 1.0 to 2.0.- 2. Local Music in a Global Network: Circulation, Reputation, and Hybridity.- 3. The Main Players.- 4. An Analysis of Swedish Pop Music.- 5. Concluding Thoughts.
<ol> </ol>		Songs from Sweden shows how Swedish songwriters and producers are the creative forces behind much of today’s international pop music. As Ola Johansson reveals, the roots of this “music miracle” can be found in Sweden’s culture, economy, and thriving music industry, concentrated in Stockholm. While Swedish writer-producers developed early global recognition for making commercially successful pop music, new Swedish writer-producers have continuously emerged during the last two decades. Global artists travel to Stockholm to negotiate, record, and co-write songs. At the same time, Swedish writer-producers are part of a global collaborative network that spans the world. In addition to concrete commercial accomplishments, the Swedish success is also a result of the acquisition of reputational capital gained through positive associations that the global music industry holds about Swedish music. Ultimately, pop songs from Sweden exhibit a form of cultural hybridity, drawing from both local and global cultural expressions.<div>
</div><div>Ola Johansson is a professor of geography at the University of Pittsburgh at Johnstown. He holds a Ph.D. from the University of Tennessee, and has also researched music as a guest scholar at Linnaeus University in Sweden. Johansson is co-author of the books Sound, Society, and the Geography of Popular Music and World Regional Geography.
</div>		Songs from Sweden shows how Swedish songwriters and producers are the creative forces behind much of today’s international pop music. As Ola Johansson reveals, the roots of this “music miracle” can be found in Sweden’s culture, economy, and thriving music industry, concentrated in Stockholm. While Swedish writer-producers developed early global recognition for making commercially successful pop music, new Swedish writer-producers have continuously emerged during the last two decades. Global artists travel to Stockholm to negotiate, record, and co-write songs. At the same time, Swedish writer-producers are part of a global collaborative network that spans the world. In addition to concrete commercial accomplishments, the Swedish success is also a result of the acquisition of reputational capital gained through positive associations that the global music industry holds about Swedish music. Ultimately, pop songs from Sweden exhibit a form of cultural hybridity, drawing from both local and global cultural expressions.<p>An original contribution on a theme which has not been properly explored previously</p><p>Provides an innovative theoretical construct</p><p>Features fascinating primary-source interviews with prominent music producers</p>Ola Johansson is a professor of geography at the University of Pittsburgh at Johnstown. He holds a Ph.D. from the University of Tennessee, and has also researched music as a guest scholar at Linnaeus University in Sweden. Johansson is co-author of the books Sound, Society, and the Geography of Popular Music and World Regional Geography.SciencePalgrave Standard US (P5)Palgrave Standard (P5)EBOP41176Social Sciences009789811527357Human GeographyMusicPolitical Sociology458000
63
Social Sciences978-3-030-76835-5JonesThomas E. Jones; Huong T. Bui; Michal ApolloThomas E. Jones, Ritsumeikan Asia Pacific University, Beppu, Japan; Huong T. Bui, Ritsumeikan Asia Pacific University, Beppu, Japan; Michal Apollo, Pedagogical University of Krakow, Krakow, PolandNature-Based Tourism in Asia’s Mountainous Protected AreasA Trans-regional Review of Peaks and ParksXXIV, 316 p. 44 illus., 22 illus. in color.12021final139.9942.00149.7944.94119.9936.00159.9948.00Soft cover1Geographies of Tourism and Global ChangeSocial SciencesContributed volumeBook316RGCPSpringerSpringer International Publishing0Available2022-07-252021-07-242022-07-242022-07-241Introduction: Jones and Bui.- Overcoming Nature Conservation Barriers in China’s Protected Area Network: From Forest Tourism to National Parks? : Chen, Xie, Jones and Jiao.- Japan’s National Parks: Trends in Administration and Nature-based tourism: Jones and Kobayashi.- South Korea’s System of National Parks and Nature-based tourism: Cooper and Jones.- Taiwan’s National Network of Protected Areas and Nature-based tourism: Ki and Jones.


This book provides holistic insights into management of protected areas across East Asia and identifies current trends in mountain tourism within the broader field of human geography and nature conservation. The book describes the diversification in visitors and expanding protected areas territories in different Asian countries during recent years. It also compares protected areas networks in the context of the changing demographic profiles of visitors and provides an interdisciplinary transnational appraisal of mountain-based tourism in Asia based on national and international statistics. The research combines specific case studies at the individual country and destination level with trans-regional trends, thereby offering analysis from both the perspective of supply (parks, protected areas, and stakeholders) and demand (mountain tourist market trends and segments). The book is a useful resource for students and academics in tourism and protected areas studies as well as social scientists and policy-makers interested in Asian countries.This book provides holistic insights into management of protected areas across East Asia and identifies current trends in mountain tourism within the broader field of human geography and nature conservation. The book describes the diversification in visitors and expanding protected areas territories in different Asian countries during recent years. It also compares protected areas networks in the context of the changing demographic profiles of visitors and provides an interdisciplinary transnational appraisal of mountain-based tourism in Asia based on national and international statistics. The research combines specific case studies at the individual country and destination level with trans-regional trends, thereby offering analysis from both the perspective of supply (parks, protected areas, and stakeholders) and demand (mountain tourist market trends and segments). The book is a useful resource for students and academics in tourism and protected areas studies as well as social scientists and policy-makers interested in Asian countries.<p>Provides a transnational appraisal of mountain-based tourism in Asia</p><p>Offers analysis from the sides of conservation and tourism</p><p>Emphasizes protected areas potential role in Asia’s long-term geopolitical stability</p><div>Tom E. Jones is Associate Professor of Environmental Studies at Ritsumeikan Asia Pacific University (APU) in Kyushu, Japan. His research interests include Environmental Policy, Nature-Based Tourism and Protected Area Management. Originally from the UK, Jones has experienced life in Japan as an international student from both sides of the lectern, completing his PhD at the University of Tokyo. He then worked as a consultant for municipal governments carrying out visitor surveys in the Japan Alps and joining a visitor monitoring survey of Mount Fuji climbers every summer 2008-2017.



Huong T. Bui is Professor and Field Leader of the Tourism and Hospitality Program of the College of Asia Pacific Studies, Ritsumeikan Asia Pacific University (APU) in Kyushu, Japan. She holds a PhD in Tourism Management from Griffith University (Australia). She has received research grants from the Japan Foundation and Japan Society for Promotion of Sciences (JSPS) on the topics of heritage tourism in Southeast Asia, tourism resources management, and disaster risk management for tourism sector in Asia. She published articles in leading journals with topics such as ‘tourism and development’, ‘sustainable tourism’, ‘heritage tourism’ and ‘community resilience’. Prior to her career in academia, she worked in the tourism industry and was a consultant for tourism development projects in Southeast Asia for the World Bank, JICA and SNV.



Michal Apollo is Assistant Professor at the Institute of Geography, Pedagogical University of Krakow. Michal’s areas of expertise are tourism management, consumer behaviours as well as environmental and socio-economical issues. Currently he is working on a concept of sustainable use of environmental and human resources. He is also an enthusiastic, traveller, diver, mountaineer, ultra-runner, photographer, and science populariser.
</div>		ScienceProfessional Books (2)Science (SC)EBOP41176Social Sciences009783030768355Human GeographyEarth and Environmental SciencesIndustriesRegional Geography522000
64
Social Sciences978-3-030-76832-4JonesThomas E. Jones; Huong T. Bui; Michal ApolloThomas E. Jones, Ritsumeikan Asia Pacific University, Beppu, Japan; Huong T. Bui, Ritsumeikan Asia Pacific University, Beppu, Japan; Michal Apollo, Pedagogical University of Krakow, Krakow, PolandNature-Based Tourism in Asia’s Mountainous Protected AreasA Trans-regional Review of Peaks and ParksXXIV, 316 p. 44 illus., 22 illus. in color.12021final139.9942.00149.7944.94119.9936.00159.9948.00Hard cover0Geographies of Tourism and Global ChangeSocial SciencesContributed volumeBook316RGCPSpringerSpringer International Publishing0Available2021-07-242021-07-242021-08-102021-08-101Introduction: Jones and Bui.- Overcoming Nature Conservation Barriers in China’s Protected Area Network: From Forest Tourism to National Parks? : Chen, Xie, Jones and Jiao.- Japan’s National Parks: Trends in Administration and Nature-based tourism: Jones and Kobayashi.- South Korea’s System of National Parks and Nature-based tourism: Cooper and Jones.- Taiwan’s National Network of Protected Areas and Nature-based tourism: Ki and Jones.


This book provides holistic insights into management of protected areas across East Asia and identifies current trends in mountain tourism within the broader field of human geography and nature conservation. The book describes the diversification in visitors and expanding protected areas territories in different Asian countries during recent years. It also compares protected areas networks in the context of the changing demographic profiles of visitors and provides an interdisciplinary transnational appraisal of mountain-based tourism in Asia based on national and international statistics. The research combines specific case studies at the individual country and destination level with trans-regional trends, thereby offering analysis from both the perspective of supply (parks, protected areas, and stakeholders) and demand (mountain tourist market trends and segments). The book is a useful resource for students and academics in tourism and protected areas studies as well as social scientists and policy-makers interested in Asian countries.This book provides holistic insights into management of protected areas across East Asia and identifies current trends in mountain tourism within the broader field of human geography and nature conservation. The book describes the diversification in visitors and expanding protected areas territories in different Asian countries during recent years. It also compares protected areas networks in the context of the changing demographic profiles of visitors and provides an interdisciplinary transnational appraisal of mountain-based tourism in Asia based on national and international statistics. The research combines specific case studies at the individual country and destination level with trans-regional trends, thereby offering analysis from both the perspective of supply (parks, protected areas, and stakeholders) and demand (mountain tourist market trends and segments). The book is a useful resource for students and academics in tourism and protected areas studies as well as social scientists and policy-makers interested in Asian countries.<p>Provides a transnational appraisal of mountain-based tourism in Asia</p><p>Offers analysis from the sides of conservation and tourism</p><p>Emphasizes protected areas potential role in Asia’s long-term geopolitical stability</p><div>Tom E. Jones is Associate Professor of Environmental Studies at Ritsumeikan Asia Pacific University (APU) in Kyushu, Japan. His research interests include Environmental Policy, Nature-Based Tourism and Protected Area Management. Originally from the UK, Jones has experienced life in Japan as an international student from both sides of the lectern, completing his PhD at the University of Tokyo. He then worked as a consultant for municipal governments carrying out visitor surveys in the Japan Alps and joining a visitor monitoring survey of Mount Fuji climbers every summer 2008-2017.



Huong T. Bui is Professor and Field Leader of the Tourism and Hospitality Program of the College of Asia Pacific Studies, Ritsumeikan Asia Pacific University (APU) in Kyushu, Japan. She holds a PhD in Tourism Management from Griffith University (Australia). She has received research grants from the Japan Foundation and Japan Society for Promotion of Sciences (JSPS) on the topics of heritage tourism in Southeast Asia, tourism resources management, and disaster risk management for tourism sector in Asia. She published articles in leading journals with topics such as ‘tourism and development’, ‘sustainable tourism’, ‘heritage tourism’ and ‘community resilience’. Prior to her career in academia, she worked in the tourism industry and was a consultant for tourism development projects in Southeast Asia for the World Bank, JICA and SNV.



Michal Apollo is Assistant Professor at the Institute of Geography, Pedagogical University of Krakow. Michal’s areas of expertise are tourism management, consumer behaviours as well as environmental and socio-economical issues. Currently he is working on a concept of sustainable use of environmental and human resources. He is also an enthusiastic, traveller, diver, mountaineer, ultra-runner, photographer, and science populariser.
</div>		ScienceProfessional Books (2)Science (SC)EBOP41176Social Sciences009783030768324Human GeographyEarth and Environmental SciencesIndustriesRegional Geography676000
65
Social Sciences978-0-230-25172-4KamwangamaluNkonko M. KamwangamaluNkonko M. Kamwangamalu, Howard University, Washington DC, DCLanguage Policy and Economics: The Language Question in AfricaXXV, 232 p.12016final49.9915.0053.4916.0544.9913.5054.9916.50Hard cover0Palgrave Studies in Minority Languages and CommunitiesSocial SciencesMonographBook232CFBCBPalgrave MacmillanPalgrave Macmillan UK0Available2016-05-032016-05-022016-05-021Acknowledgements. -Notes about the author. -Preface. -Foreword. -Introduction. -1 Theoretical Overview. -2 Language Planning and ideologies in colonial Africa. -3 Language planning and ideologies in post-colonial Africa. -4 Globalization, the spread of English, and language planning in Africa. -5 Language planning and the medium-of-instruction conundrum in Africa. -6 Why inherited colonial language ideologies persist in post-colonial Africa. -7 Towards Prestige Planning for African Languages: The answer to the language question in Africa?. -8 Case studies of prestige planning for vernacular languages around the world – Successes and Failures. -9 Conclusion. -References.<div>

‘This volume is an ambitious undertaking, fruit of meticulous research and deep reflection. Professor Kamwangamalu’s panoramic assessment of language planning, economics and game theory in colonial, post-colonial and globalised sub-Saharan African settings brilliantly deploys notions of ‘prestige planning’ to recurring dilemmas about the choices of medium of instruction in schooling and language choices in public and private institutions. This volume is groundbreaking theoretically and methodologically, but remains grounded in the real world needs of diverse African communities in their unique historical experiences of colonialism and their modern trajectories in an increasingly interlinked world. Professor Kamwangamalu’s reinvigoration of the framework of ‘prestige’ in language and how it can be activated adds great practical value to his impressive scholarly achievement.’

—Joseph Lo Bianco, Professor, The University of Melbourne, Australia



This book addresses the perennial question of how to promote Africa’s indigenous languages as medium of instruction in educational systems. Breaking with the traditional approach to the continent’s language question by focusing on the often overlooked issue of the link between African languages and economic development, Language Policy and Economics considers African languages an integral part of a nation’s socio-political and economic development. Therefore, the book argues that any language policy designed to promote these languages in such higher domains as the educational system in particular must have economic advantages if the intent is to succeed, and proposes Prestige Planning as the way to address this issue. The proposition is a welcome break away from language policies which pay lip-service to the empowerment of African languages while, by default, strengthening the stranglehold of imported European languages.



Nkonko M. Kamwangamalu is Professor of Linguistics at Howard University, Washington, DC. He is co-Editor of Current Issues in Language Planning, author of The Language Situation in South Africa (2004), of articles in Chicago Linguistic Society, Georgetown Round Table on Languages and Linguistics, Multilingua, Applied Linguistics, Journal of Asian Pacific Communication, World Englishes, Language Problems and Language Planning, Journal of Multilingual and Multicultural Development, Journal of Creative Communications, Studies in the Linguistic Sciences, TESOL Quarterly, Annual Review of Applied Linguistics, International Journal of the Sociology of Language, to name a few, and of chapters in edited collections.</div>		<div>This book addresses the perennial question of how to promote Africa’s indigenous languages as medium of instruction in educational systems. Breaking with the traditional approach to the continent’s language question by focusing on the often overlooked issue of the link between African languages and economic development, Language Policy and Economics argues that African languages are an integral part of a nation’s socio-political and economic development. Therefore, the book argues that any language policy designed to promote these languages in such higher domains as the educational system in particular must have economic advantages if the intent is to succeed, and proposes Prestige Planning as the way to address this issue. The proposition is a welcome break away from language policies which pay lip-service to the empowerment of African languages while, by default, strengthening the stranglehold of imported European languages.
</div>		Nkonko M. Kamwangamalu is Professor of Linguistics at Howard University, Washington, DC. He is co-Editor of Current Issues in Language Planning, author of The Language Situation in South Africa (2004), of articles in Chicago Linguistic Society, Georgetown Roundtable on Language and Linguistics, International Journal of the Sociology of Language, Multilingua, Applied Linguistics, World Englishes, Language Problems and Language Planning, Journal of Multilingual and Multicultural Development, Studies in the Linguistics Sciences, to name a few, and of chapters in edited collections.SciencePalgrave Standard US (P5)Palgrave Monograph (P6)EBOP41176Social Sciences009780230251724Language Policy and PlanningAfrican LanguagesMultilingualismEconomic PolicyGame Theory4401000
66
Social Sciences978-3-030-60716-6Kihlgren GrandiLorenzo Kihlgren GrandiLorenzo Kihlgren Grandi, Paris School of International Affairs (PSIA), Paris, FranceCity DiplomacyVIII, 177 p. 2 illus., 1 illus. in color.12020final59.9918.0064.1919.2654.9916.5064.9919.50Hard cover0Cities and the Global Politics of the EnvironmentSocial SciencesBrief/PivotBook177RGCJHBPalgrave MacmillanSpringer International Publishing0Available2020-11-242020-11-242020-12-112020-12-111Chapter 1: City diplomacy: a strategic choice.- Chapter 2: The historical, legal, and geographic evolution of city diplomacy.- Chapter 3: Decentralized cooperation.- Chapter 4: City diplomacy for peace.- Chapter 5: Economic city diplomacy.- Chapter 6: Smart city diplomacy.- Chapter 7: Environmental city diplomacy.- Chapter 8: Cultural city diplomacy.- Chapter 9: City diplomacy and migrationThis book presents an accessible overview of the seven key concepts of city diplomacy (development cooperation, peacekeeping, economy, innovation, environment, culture, and migration). The book discusses its scope and challenges, maps the actors involved along with their interaction and offers suggestions for available tools and outcomes. Each chapter includes an analysis of a selection of best practices. <div><div>
</div><div>The book successfully combines theory with practical evidence and will be an invaluable reference for students and researchers of international relations and urban studies looking for a comprehensive and updated analysis of the multifaceted international action of cities. The book will also be of interest to practitioners and city officials responsible for the design and implementation of impactful diplomatic strategies.</div></div><div>
</div><div><div>Lorenzo Kihlgren Grandi is the chair of the Globalization, Territories and Integration Working Group at the International Association of Schools and Institutes of Administration (IASIA), a co-founder and chair of Urban Flag, and a lecturer in City Diplomacy at Sciences Po and École Polytechnique in Paris. His primary expertise and research interests are in the international action of cities and their multilateral response to global challenges such as sustainable development, intercultural dialogue, and digital transition.</div><div>
</div><div>Lorenzo gained extensive practical experience in these areas, serving as an officer of the City of Milan's International Relations Department and as a consultant to the International Association of Francophone Mayors (AIMF). He is currently an advisor on city diplomacy strategies to numerous municipalities, city networks, and international organizations.
</div></div><div>
</div>		<div><div>This book presents an accessible overview of the seven key concepts of city diplomacy (development cooperation, peacekeeping, economy, innovation, environment, culture, and migration). The book discusses its scope and challenges, maps the actors involved along with their interaction and offers suggestions for available tools and outcomes. Each chapter includes an analysis of a selection of best practices. </div><div> </div><div>The book successfully combines theory with practical evidence and will be an invaluable reference for students and researchers of international relations and urban studies looking for a comprehensive and updated analysis of the multifaceted international action of cities. The book will also be of interest to practitioners and city officials responsible for the design and implementation of impactful diplomatic strategies.</div></div><div>
</div>		<p>Brings together theory and practice of city diplomacy</p><p>Provides a practical tool in the design and implementation of cities’ international relations</p><p>Explicitly argues for the relevance of including city diplomacy in international relations</p><div>Lorenzo Kihlgren Grandi is the chair of the Globalization, Territories and Integration Working Group at the International Association of Schools and Institutes of Administration (IASIA), a co-founder and chair of Urban Flag, and a lecturer in City Diplomacy at Sciences Po and École Polytechnique in Paris. His primary expertise and research interests are in the international action of cities and their multilateral response to global challenges such as sustainable development, intercultural dialogue, and digital transition.</div><div>
</div><div>Lorenzo gained extensive practical experience in these areas, serving as an officer of the City of Milan's International Relations Department and as a consultant to the International Association of Francophone Mayors (AIMF). He is currently an advisor on city diplomacy strategies to numerous municipalities, city networks, and international organizations.</div><div>
</div>		SciencePalgrave Standard US (P5)Palgrave Standard (P5)EBOP41176Social Sciences009783030607166Human GeographyUrban SociologyPolitical ScienceEnvironmental PolicySociologyDevelopment Studies454000
67
Social Sciences978-981-16-6661-2KimJihon KimJihon Kim, Korean National Commission for UNESCO, Seoul, Korea (Republic of)Non-State Actors in the Protection of Cultural HeritageAn Analysis on Their Rights, Obligations, and RolesXXVII, 182 p. 1 illus.12021final109.9933.00117.6935.3199.9930.00119.9936.00Soft cover1Creativity, Heritage and the City3Social SciencesMonographBook182JFCLBSpringerSpringer Nature Singapore0Available2022-12-032021-12-032022-12-022022-12-02Non-automated Translation1Preface. - Table of Cases.- Table of Legal Instruments.- List of Tables.- List of Abbreviations.- Introduction.- The Protection of Cultural Property in Armed Conflict.- The Restitution of Cultural Property.- Protection of World Heritage.- The Protection of Underwater Cultural Heritage.- The Protection of Intangible Cultural Heritage.- Conclusion.- References.<div><div>This book provides a comprehensive overview of international cultural heritage law from the perspectives of non-state actors (NSAs). In keeping with the significant developments concerning the status and roles of NSAs in international law over the last century, NSAs such as communities, experts, NGOs, and international organizations have become important participants in the implementation of international cultural heritage conventions. Indeed, due to the emergence of new ideas on common heritage and cultural rights in the 20th century, international cultural heritage law has become inconsistent with States’ claim to sole authority regarding the protection of cultural heritage. </div><div>The author analyzes the texts of international cultural heritage conventions, as well as their operational texts, to track essential changes in the rights, obligations, and roles of NSAs since the mid-20th century. Practical cases on the status and roles of NSAs are introduced to glean empirical ideas and facilitate an in-depth understanding of their effectiveness. The analysis reveals that NSAs do have certain rights and responsibilities concerning the implementation of cultural heritage conventions, and their roles have been increasingly recognized. At the same time, however, discrepancies between text and practice can be observed when it comes to the status and roles of NSAs. They have emerged for various reasons, one of which is the politicization of conventions’ governance. </div><div>Adopting the standpoint of the NSAs, the book emphasizes the need to explore innovative and practical mechanisms that will allow NSAs to attain their proper status and take on practical roles under international cultural heritage law, which will in turn ensure the sustainable protection of cultural heritage. This message becomes more pertinent to the current conflicts where various tensions between states and NSAs have arisen and the roles of NSAs have become more important.</div><div>Given its scope, the book will be of special interest to students, researchers and professionals at government and non-government organizations in the fields of heritage, the arts, law, administration, and development.</div></div><div><div>This book provides a comprehensive overview of international cultural heritage law from the perspectives of non-state actors (NSAs). In keeping with the significant developments concerning the status and roles of NSAs in international law over the last century, NSAs such as communities, experts, NGOs, and international organizations have become important participants in the implementation of international cultural heritage conventions. Indeed, due to the emergence of new ideas on common heritage and cultural rights in the 20th century, international cultural heritage law has become inconsistent with States’ claim to sole authority regarding the protection of cultural heritage. </div><div>The author analyzes the texts of international cultural heritage conventions, as well as their operational texts, to track essential changes in the rights, obligations, and roles of NSAs since the mid-20th century. Practical cases on the status and roles of NSAs are introduced to glean empirical ideas and facilitate an in-depth understanding of their effectiveness. The analysis reveals that NSAs do have certain rights and responsibilities concerning the implementation of cultural heritage conventions, and their roles have been increasingly recognized. At the same time, however, discrepancies between text and practice can be observed when it comes to the status and roles of NSAs. They have emerged for various reasons, one of which is the politicization of conventions’ governance. </div><div>Adopting the standpoint of the NSAs, the book emphasizes the need to explore innovative and practical mechanisms that will allow NSAs to attain their proper status and take on practical roles under international cultural heritage law, which will in turn ensure the sustainable protection of cultural heritage. This message becomes more pertinent to the current conflicts where various tensions between states and NSAs have arisen and the roles of NSAs have become more important.</div><div>Given its scope, the book will be of special interest to students, researchers and professionals at government and non-government organizations in the fields of heritage, the arts, law, administration, and development.</div><div>
</div></div>		<p>Provides a comprehensive overview of international cultural heritage law</p><p>Analyzes the corresponding legal frameworks and examines practical cases</p><p>Demonstrates the need to further involve various non-state actors in heritage protection</p>ScienceProfessional Books (2)Science (SC)EBOP41176Social Sciences009789811666612Cultural HeritagePrivate International Law, International and Foreign Law, Comparative LawHeritage Management332000
68
Social Sciences978-981-16-6658-2KimJihon KimJihon Kim, Korean National Commission for UNESCO, Seoul, Korea (Republic of)Non-State Actors in the Protection of Cultural HeritageAn Analysis on Their Rights, Obligations, and RolesXXVII, 182 p. 1 illus.12021final109.9933.00117.6935.3199.9930.00119.9936.00Hard cover0Creativity, Heritage and the City3Social SciencesMonographBook182JFCLBSpringerSpringer Nature Singapore0Available2021-12-022021-12-022021-12-192021-12-19Non-automated Translation1Preface. - Table of Cases.- Table of Legal Instruments.- List of Tables.- List of Abbreviations.- Introduction.- The Protection of Cultural Property in Armed Conflict.- The Restitution of Cultural Property.- Protection of World Heritage.- The Protection of Underwater Cultural Heritage.- The Protection of Intangible Cultural Heritage.- Conclusion.- References.<div><div>This book provides a comprehensive overview of international cultural heritage law from the perspectives of non-state actors (NSAs). In keeping with the significant developments concerning the status and roles of NSAs in international law over the last century, NSAs such as communities, experts, NGOs, and international organizations have become important participants in the implementation of international cultural heritage conventions. Indeed, due to the emergence of new ideas on common heritage and cultural rights in the 20th century, international cultural heritage law has become inconsistent with States’ claim to sole authority regarding the protection of cultural heritage. </div><div>The author analyzes the texts of international cultural heritage conventions, as well as their operational texts, to track essential changes in the rights, obligations, and roles of NSAs since the mid-20th century. Practical cases on the status and roles of NSAs are introduced to glean empirical ideas and facilitate an in-depth understanding of their effectiveness. The analysis reveals that NSAs do have certain rights and responsibilities concerning the implementation of cultural heritage conventions, and their roles have been increasingly recognized. At the same time, however, discrepancies between text and practice can be observed when it comes to the status and roles of NSAs. They have emerged for various reasons, one of which is the politicization of conventions’ governance. </div><div>Adopting the standpoint of the NSAs, the book emphasizes the need to explore innovative and practical mechanisms that will allow NSAs to attain their proper status and take on practical roles under international cultural heritage law, which will in turn ensure the sustainable protection of cultural heritage. This message becomes more pertinent to the current conflicts where various tensions between states and NSAs have arisen and the roles of NSAs have become more important.</div><div>Given its scope, the book will be of special interest to students, researchers and professionals at government and non-government organizations in the fields of heritage, the arts, law, administration, and development.</div></div><div><div>This book provides a comprehensive overview of international cultural heritage law from the perspectives of non-state actors (NSAs). In keeping with the significant developments concerning the status and roles of NSAs in international law over the last century, NSAs such as communities, experts, NGOs, and international organizations have become important participants in the implementation of international cultural heritage conventions. Indeed, due to the emergence of new ideas on common heritage and cultural rights in the 20th century, international cultural heritage law has become inconsistent with States’ claim to sole authority regarding the protection of cultural heritage. </div><div>The author analyzes the texts of international cultural heritage conventions, as well as their operational texts, to track essential changes in the rights, obligations, and roles of NSAs since the mid-20th century. Practical cases on the status and roles of NSAs are introduced to glean empirical ideas and facilitate an in-depth understanding of their effectiveness. The analysis reveals that NSAs do have certain rights and responsibilities concerning the implementation of cultural heritage conventions, and their roles have been increasingly recognized. At the same time, however, discrepancies between text and practice can be observed when it comes to the status and roles of NSAs. They have emerged for various reasons, one of which is the politicization of conventions’ governance. </div><div>Adopting the standpoint of the NSAs, the book emphasizes the need to explore innovative and practical mechanisms that will allow NSAs to attain their proper status and take on practical roles under international cultural heritage law, which will in turn ensure the sustainable protection of cultural heritage. This message becomes more pertinent to the current conflicts where various tensions between states and NSAs have arisen and the roles of NSAs have become more important.</div><div>Given its scope, the book will be of special interest to students, researchers and professionals at government and non-government organizations in the fields of heritage, the arts, law, administration, and development.</div><div>
</div></div>		<p>Provides a comprehensive overview of international cultural heritage law</p><p>Analyzes the corresponding legal frameworks and examines practical cases</p><p>Demonstrates the need to further involve various non-state actors in heritage protection</p>ScienceProfessional Books (2)Science (SC)EBOP41176Social Sciences009789811666582Cultural HeritagePrivate International Law, International and Foreign Law, Comparative LawHeritage Management489000
69
Social Sciences978-981-19-9608-5KumagaiFumie KumagaiFumie Kumagai, Kyorin University, Mitaka, JapanShrinking Japan and Regional Variations: Along the TokaidoXVII, 128 p. 15 illus., 13 illus. in color.12023final44.9913.5048.1414.4439.9912.0049.9915.00Soft cover0Population Studies of JapanSocial SciencesBrief/PivotBook128JHBDRGCSpringerSpringer Nature Singapore0Available2023-02-022023-02-012023-02-192023-02-191Chapter 1: Introduction: Shrinking Japan, the Goki-Shichido, the Tokaido, the Municipal Power, and the Methodology.- Chapter 2: Shizuoka Prefecture along the Tokaido of the Goki-Shichido and Regional Variations.- Chapter 3: Mie Prefecture along the Tokaido of the Goki-Shichido and Regional Variations.- Chapter 4: Epilogue: What Will the Population Be Along the Tokaido beyond the Coronavirus Pandemic.
Taking the Goki-Shichido (Five Home Provinces and Seven Circuits of Ancient Japan) as a theoretical framework, this book examines shrinking Japan from a regional variation perspective by municipality along the ancient Tokaido, which comprises 15 provinces, and seven prefectures today. The study identifies the principal explanatory factors based on the small area data of e-Stat through GPS statistical software tools such as G-census and EvaCva, within a historical perspective. This historical knowledge helps in understanding the significance of the regional cultural heritage that remains in each municipality today. The book pays special attention to municipal variations within the same prefecture, presenting a completely unique approach from what other researchers have pursued.This volume studies two present-day prefectures along the ancient Tokaido for detailed analyses of the impacts of regional variations of population decline in Japan. They are Shizuoka Prefecture, made up of the former Tootoumi, Suruga, and Izu provinces, and Mie Prefecture, formed by the ancient provinces of Iga, Ise, Shima, and the eastern part of Kii as examples to show the impacts of municipal power on regional variations of shrinking Japan. The reasons for selecting these two prefectures of the ancient Tokaido are twofold. First, they are made up of a multiple number of the ancient provinces. Second, other prefectures that fall under the Tokaido have been studied in the previous works of the present author by adopting the same methods of analyses. Thus, by presenting unique analyses of regional variations on small municipal levels, with demographic variables, social indicators, and historical identities of municipalities in Shizuoka and Mie prefectures along the Tokaido, this book offers suggestions for effective regional policy to revitalize shrinking Japan to a sustainable one.<p>Examines shrinking Japan through historical regional variations, with socio-demographic indicators</p><p>Highlights municipal power in each municipality, which mobilizes shrinking Japan to sustainable Japan along the Tokaido</p><p>Focuses on Shizuoka Prefecture and Mie Prefecture of the ancient Tokaido</p>Fumie Kumagai (Ph.D.) is a professor emeritus of Kyorin University in Tokyo. She holds an American doctorate in sociology with extensive experience in the West as a student, college professor and researcher. Her overseas experience affords her a unique cross-cultural perspective in the field of families and demography, social issues, and intercultural communication. Her major interest is in regional variations on Japanese population, families, and socio-cultural characteristics based on municipality, but not by prefecture, or Japan by any means. She has published 28 volumes of books and monographs in Japanese and/or English. Of them, her sole-authored books in English include Unmasking Japan Today: The Impact of Traditional Values on Modern Japanese Society (1996, Prager), Families in Japan: Changes, Continuities, and Regional Variations (2008, University Press of America), Family Issues on Marriage, Divorce, and Older Adults in Japan: With Special Attention to Regional Variations (2015, Springer), Municipal Power and Population Decline in Japan: Goki-Shichido and Regional Variations (2020, Springer), Shrinking Japan and Regional Variations: Along the Hokurikudo and the Tosando, I and II (2021, Springer), and numerous numbers of refereed articles in such journals as Journal of Family History, Journal of Marriage and Family, Journal of Comparative Family Studies, Journal of Cross-Cultural Gerontology, and Victimology.


ScienceProfessional Books (2)Science (SC)EBOP41176Social Sciences009789811996085Spatial DemographyPopulation and DemographyApplied DemographyHuman GeographyRegional GeographySociology of Family, Youth and Aging238000
70
Social Sciencesx978-3-031-14156-0LangdonJohn H. LangdonJohn H. Langdon, University of Indianapolis, Indianapolis, IN, USAHuman EvolutionBones, Cultures, and GenesXXXVII, 722 p. 1 illus.12022final119.9936.00128.3938.52109.9933.00129.9939.00Soft cover0Springer Texts in Social SciencesSocial SciencesGraduate/advanced undergraduate textbookBook722JHMJHMSpringerSpringer International Publishing0WorldwideAvailable2023-01-022022-12-272023-01-132023-01-131Part I Introduction.- 1. The Reflection in the Mirror.- 2. Background: Evolutionary Classification and Fossil Dating.- 3. A Primate Heritage.- Part II The First Hominins.- 4. Miocene Hominoids.- 5. The Early Hominins: Australopiths.- 6. The Ecological Context of Early Hominin Evolution.- 7. Understanding Australopiths.- 8. The Evolution of Bipedality.- Part III The First Humans.- 9. The Earliest Humans in Africa.- 10. The First Technology.- 11. Diet of Early Homo.- 12. Evolution of the Brain.- 13. Leaving Africa.- Part IV The Middle Pleistocene.- 14. The Erectines of Asia.- 15. Erectines of the West.- 16. Behavior in the Middle Pleistocene.- Part V The Emergence of Modern People.- 17. Late Pleistocene Homo and the Emergence of Modern Humans.- 18. From the Middle Paleolithic to the Modern Mind.- 19. Modern Humans Disperse From Africa.- 20. Distributing Modern Peoples.- 21. Life History and Reproduction.- 22. Evolution Today and Tomorrow.This is an introductory textbook for the study of human evolution, and covers all major topics of human origins taught under paleoanthropology, anthropology, archaeology, and evolutionary biology courses. This book differs from the existing selection of textbooks in the following ways:<div>
</div><div>• It incorporates the most recent fossil discoveries and interpretations.</div><div>• It balances the discussion between descriptions of fossils and interpretations of behavior of hominins in different time periods. </div><div>• It includes current findings of genomics into understanding the more recent stages of human evolution. This important subdiscipline is badly underserved by current texts.</div><div>• It consistently addresses the relationship of evidence to our current hypotheses and interpretations.</div><div>
</div><div>The book has an engaging and lucid style suitable for those entering the field. Students will find ample case studies, illustrations and examples helpful in understanding difficult concepts. Tables, timelines, and maps in every chapter include data summaries and key points. The book highlights peripheral points and background concepts in side boxes for easy reference and lists key ideas at the end of each chapter. </div><div>
</div><div>This up-to-date and easy to read text is suitable for both classroom study and self-learning. </div><div>
</div>		This is an introductory textbook for the study of human evolution, and covers all major topics of human origins taught under paleoanthropology, anthropology, archaeology, and evolutionary biology courses. This book differs from the existing selection of textbooks in the following ways:<div>
</div><div>• It incorporates the most recent fossil discoveries and interpretations.</div><div>• It balances the discussion between descriptions of fossils and interpretations of behavior of hominins in different time periods. </div><div>• It includes current findings of genomics into understanding the more recent stages of human evolution. This important subdiscipline is badly underserved by current texts.</div><div>• It consistently addresses the relationship of evidence to our current hypotheses and interpretations.</div><div>
</div><div>The book has an engaging and lucid style suitable for those entering the field. Students will find ample case studies, illustrations and examples helpful in understanding difficult concepts. Tables, timelines, and maps in every chapter include data summaries and key points. The book highlights peripheral points and background concepts in side boxes for easy reference and lists key ideas at the end of each chapter. </div><div>
</div><div>This up-to-date and easy to read text is suitable for both classroom study and self-learning. </div><div>
</div>		<p>Uses an engaging and lucid style suitable for students entering the field </p><p>Follows the theme that the human anatomy is evolving and that it helps us understand our past</p><p>Includes current findings of genomics into understanding the more recent stages of human evolution</p>John H. Langdon is Professor Emeritus of Biology and Anthropology at the University of Indianapolis, Indiana, USA. Professor Langdon has written four books, Getting it Right: The Science of human Evolution (Springer), The Human Strategy: An Evolutionary Perspective on Human Anatomy (Oxford University Press); Human Dissection for the Allied Health Sciences (Little, Brown), and Functional Morphology of the Miocene Hominoid Foot (S. Karger), and co-edited a fourth, The Natural History of Paradigms (University of Indianapolis Press). His research interests are in the field of historical demography; human biology; human evolution; functional and evolutionary morphology; history and development of paleoanthropology; evolution of human behavior; history and process of the natural sciences. Professor Langdon has a BA in anthropology from Harvard University, and MPhil and PhD in anthropology from Yale University.StudentsProfessional Books (2)Standard (0)EBOP41176Social Sciences009783031141560Evolutionary AnthropologyPhysical-Biological AnthropologyPaleontologyCultural EvolutionEvolutionary Developmental BiologyArchaeology1145000
71
Social Sciences978-3-319-24518-8LazegaEmmanuel Lazega; Tom A.B. SnijdersEmmanuel Lazega, Institut d’Etudes Politiques de Paris, SPC, Paris, France; Tom A.B. Snijders, University of Oxford, Oxford, UKMultilevel Network Analysis for the Social SciencesTheory, Methods and ApplicationsVIII, 375 p. 65 illus., 41 illus. in color.12016final159.9948.00171.1951.36139.9942.00179.9954.00Hard cover0Methodos Series12Social SciencesContributed volumeBook375JHBCJHBCSpringerSpringer International Publishing0Available2015-12-222015-12-162017-06-062017-06-0611: Introduction: Tom A.B. Snijders, Emmanuel Lazega, and Mark Tranmer.- Part I: THEORY: 2: The Multiple Flavours of Multilevel Issues for Networks: Tom A.B. Snijders.- 3: Neo-structural sociology, social change and dynamics of multilevel structures in the organizational society: Emmanuel Lazega.- PART II: METHODS: 4: Multilevel Modeling of Social Network and Relational Data: Marijtje A.J. van Duijn.- 5: Multilevel Models for Multilevel Network Dependencies: Mark Tranmer.- 6: Exponential random graph models for multilevel networks: Peng Wang, Garry Robins, Philippa Pattison, Emmanuel Lazega.- 7: Social selection models for multilevel networks: Peng Wang, Garry Robins, Philippa Pattison, Emmanuel Lazega, Marie-Thérèse Jourda.- 8: Blockmodeling of multilevel network data: Aleš Žiberna.- 9: Correspondence Analysis of Multilevel Networks: Mengxiao  Zhu, Stanley Wasserman.- 10: Multi-Level Network Analysis from The Duality of Cases and Variables: Ronald L. Breiger.- 11: Multi-splitting large networks for multi-level analysis: Christophe Prieur.- PART III: APPLICATIONS: 12: Experience sampling across organizational levels: Paola Zappa and Alessandro Lomi.- 13: Social integration of gifted students among their classmates: Miranda Jessica Lubbers.- 14:The impact of network position and team structure on individual outcomes: using a multilevel model with an autocorrelation component to predict individual (employee) job satisfaction: Filip Agneessens, Johan Koskinen.- 15: Small fish in big ponds: The structure of international fisheries agreements: James Hollway, Johan Koskinen.- 16: Dynamic interlocks and multilevel analysis in European corporate elites: François-Xavier Dudouet and Antoine Vion.- 17: Comparing fields of sciences: the network of collaborations of physicists and philosophers: Elisa Bellotti.- 18: Connecting and dissecting collective agency in community: applying a multi-level relational approach to the study of community infrastructure and collective action in two Manchester neighbourhoods: Beth Carley.- 19: Multilevel alignments between interactions and relations over different time frames: Implications for group innovativeness: Eric Quintane.- 20: A Multilevel network study of the Biotech industry in France: Alvaro Pina-Stranger, Ana Maria Falconi, Emmanuel Lazega.- 21: Economic exchange vs. social exchange: A Multilevel approach of a trade fair for TV programs in Africa: Guillaume Favre, Julien Brailly, Josiane Chatellet, Emmanuel Lazega.- 22 : Exponential Random Graph Models for a MultiLevel Network – A Case Study of the Audiovisual Market in Eastern Europe: Julien Brailly, Guillaume Favre, Josiane Chatellet, Emmanuel Lazega.​This volume provides new insights into the functioning of organizational, managerial and market societies. Multilevel analysis and social network analysis are described and the authors show how they can be combined in developing the theory, methods and empirical applications of the social sciences. This book maps out the development of multilevel reasoning and shows how it can explain behavior, through two different ways of contextualizing it. First, by identifying levels of influence on behavior and different aggregations of actors and behavior, and complex interactions between context and behavior. Second, by identifying different levels as truly different systems of agency: such levels of agency can be examined separately and jointly since the link between them is affiliation of members of one level to collective actors at the superior level. It is by combining these approaches that this work offers new insights. New case studies and datasets that explore new avenues of theorizing and new applications of methodology are presented. This book will be useful as a reference work for all social scientists, economists and historians who use network analyses and multilevel statistical analyses. Philosophers interested in the philosophy of science or epistemology will also find this book valuable.This volume provides new insights into the functioning of organizational, managerial and market societies. Multilevel analysis and social network analysis are described and the authors show how they can be combined in developing the theory, methods and empirical applications of the social sciences.

This book maps out the development of multilevel reasoning and shows how it can explain behavior, through two different ways of contextualizing it. First, by identifying levels of influence on behavior and different aggregations of actors and behavior, and complex interactions between context and behavior. Second, by identifying different levels as truly different systems of agency: such levels of agency can be examined separately and jointly since the link between them is affiliation of members of one level to collective actors at the superior level. It is by combining these approaches that this work offers new insights.

New case studies and datasets that explore new avenues of theorizing and new applications of methodology are presented.

This book will be useful as a reference work for all social scientists, economists and historians who use network analyses and multilevel statistical analyses. Philosophers interested in the philosophy of science or epistemology will also find this book valuable. ​		<p>Provides new insights into the functioning of organizational, managerial and market societies</p><p>Maps out the development of multilevel reasoning</p><p>Combination of network analysis and multilevel analysis</p><p>Includes new case studies and datasets?</p><p>Includes supplementary material: sn.pub/extras</p>ScienceProfessional Books (2)Science (SC)EBOP41176Social Sciences009783319245188Sociological MethodsStatistics in Social Sciences, Humanities, Law, Education, Behavorial Sciences, Public PolicySociology6978000
72
Social Sciences978-3-319-79639-0LazegaEmmanuel Lazega; Tom A.B. SnijdersEmmanuel Lazega, Institut d’Etudes Politiques de Paris, SPC, Paris, France; Tom A.B. Snijders, University of Oxford, Oxford, UKMultilevel Network Analysis for the Social SciencesTheory, Methods and ApplicationsVIII, 375 p. 65 illus., 41 illus. in color.12016final114.9934.50123.0436.9199.9930.00129.9939.00Soft cover1Methodos Series12Social SciencesContributed volumeBook (Paperback Initiative)375JHBCJHBCSpringerSpringer International Publishing0Available2019-03-302019-04-012016-12-222017-01-1911: Introduction: Tom A.B. Snijders, Emmanuel Lazega, and Mark Tranmer.- Part I: THEORY: 2: The Multiple Flavours of Multilevel Issues for Networks: Tom A.B. Snijders.- 3: Neo-structural sociology, social change and dynamics of multilevel structures in the organizational society: Emmanuel Lazega.- PART II: METHODS: 4: Multilevel Modeling of Social Network and Relational Data: Marijtje A.J. van Duijn.- 5: Multilevel Models for Multilevel Network Dependencies: Mark Tranmer.- 6: Exponential random graph models for multilevel networks: Peng Wang, Garry Robins, Philippa Pattison, Emmanuel Lazega.- 7: Social selection models for multilevel networks: Peng Wang, Garry Robins, Philippa Pattison, Emmanuel Lazega, Marie-Thérèse Jourda.- 8: Blockmodeling of multilevel network data: Aleš Žiberna.- 9: Correspondence Analysis of Multilevel Networks: Mengxiao  Zhu, Stanley Wasserman.- 10: Multi-Level Network Analysis from The Duality of Cases and Variables: Ronald L. Breiger.- 11: Multi-splitting large networks for multi-level analysis: Christophe Prieur.- PART III: APPLICATIONS: 12: Experience sampling across organizational levels: Paola Zappa and Alessandro Lomi.- 13: Social integration of gifted students among their classmates: Miranda Jessica Lubbers.- 14:The impact of network position and team structure on individual outcomes: using a multilevel model with an autocorrelation component to predict individual (employee) job satisfaction: Filip Agneessens, Johan Koskinen.- 15: Small fish in big ponds: The structure of international fisheries agreements: James Hollway, Johan Koskinen.- 16: Dynamic interlocks and multilevel analysis in European corporate elites: François-Xavier Dudouet and Antoine Vion.- 17: Comparing fields of sciences: the network of collaborations of physicists and philosophers: Elisa Bellotti.- 18: Connecting and dissecting collective agency in community: applying a multi-level relational approach to the study of community infrastructure and collective action in two Manchester neighbourhoods: Beth Carley.- 19: Multilevel alignments between interactions and relations over different time frames: Implications for group innovativeness: Eric Quintane.- 20: A Multilevel network study of the Biotech industry in France: Alvaro Pina-Stranger, Ana Maria Falconi, Emmanuel Lazega.- 21: Economic exchange vs. social exchange: A Multilevel approach of a trade fair for TV programs in Africa: Guillaume Favre, Julien Brailly, Josiane Chatellet, Emmanuel Lazega.- 22 : Exponential Random Graph Models for a MultiLevel Network – A Case Study of the Audiovisual Market in Eastern Europe: Julien Brailly, Guillaume Favre, Josiane Chatellet, Emmanuel Lazega.​This volume provides new insights into the functioning of organizational, managerial and market societies. Multilevel analysis and social network analysis are described and the authors show how they can be combined in developing the theory, methods and empirical applications of the social sciences. This book maps out the development of multilevel reasoning and shows how it can explain behavior, through two different ways of contextualizing it. First, by identifying levels of influence on behavior and different aggregations of actors and behavior, and complex interactions between context and behavior. Second, by identifying different levels as truly different systems of agency: such levels of agency can be examined separately and jointly since the link between them is affiliation of members of one level to collective actors at the superior level. It is by combining these approaches that this work offers new insights. New case studies and datasets that explore new avenues of theorizing and new applications of methodology are presented. This book will be useful as a reference work for all social scientists, economists and historians who use network analyses and multilevel statistical analyses. Philosophers interested in the philosophy of science or epistemology will also find this book valuable.This volume provides new insights into the functioning of organizational, managerial and market societies. Multilevel analysis and social network analysis are described and the authors show how they can be combined in developing the theory, methods and empirical applications of the social sciences.

This book maps out the development of multilevel reasoning and shows how it can explain behavior, through two different ways of contextualizing it. First, by identifying levels of influence on behavior and different aggregations of actors and behavior, and complex interactions between context and behavior. Second, by identifying different levels as truly different systems of agency: such levels of agency can be examined separately and jointly since the link between them is affiliation of members of one level to collective actors at the superior level. It is by combining these approaches that this work offers new insights.

New case studies and datasets that explore new avenues of theorizing and new applications of methodology are presented.

This book will be useful as a reference work for all social scientists, economists and historians who use network analyses and multilevel statistical analyses. Philosophers interested in the philosophy of science or epistemology will also find this book valuable. ​		<p>Provides new insights into the functioning of organizational, managerial and market societies</p><p>Maps out the development of multilevel reasoning</p><p>Combination of network analysis and multilevel analysis</p><p>Includes new case studies and datasets?</p><p>Includes supplementary material: sn.pub/extras</p>ScienceProfessional Books (2)Science (SC)EBOP41176Social Sciences009783319796390Sociological MethodsStatistics in Social Sciences, Humanities, Law, Education, Behavorial Sciences, Public PolicySociology587000
73
Social Sciences978-981-15-8994-2LiuKanglong LiuKanglong Liu, The Hong Kong Polytechnic University, Hung Hom Kowloon, Hong KongCorpus-Assisted Translation TeachingIssues and ChallengesXVI, 168 p. 46 illus., 20 illus. in color.12020final109.9933.00117.6935.3199.9930.00119.9936.00Hard cover0Corpora and Intercultural Studies7Social SciencesMonographBook168CBCFSpringerSpringer Nature Singapore0Available2020-11-022020-11-022020-11-192020-11-191<div>Introduction and Research Rationale.- Corpus-assisted translation teaching: an overview.- Web-based parallel corpora: technical issues.- Methodology.- Background survey and translation experiments.- Attitudes of students towards corpus use in translation.- Conclusions and implications.
</div>		<div>This book sheds new light on corpus-assisted translation pedagogy, an intersection of three distinct but cognate disciplines: corpus linguistics, translation and pedagogy. By taking an innovative and empirical approach to translation teaching, the study utilizes mixed methods, including translation experiments, surveys and in-depth focus groups. The results demonstrated the unique advantages and at the same time called attention to possible pitfalls of using corpora for translation teaching purposes. This book enriches our understanding of corpus application in the setting of translation between Chinese and English, two languages which are each distinctly different from one another. Readers will also discover new horizons in this burgeoning and interdisciplinary field of research.</div><div>
</div><div>This book appeals to a broad readership, from scholars and researchers who are interested in translation technology to widen the scope of translation studies, translation trainers in search of effective teaching approaches to a growing number of cross-disciplinary postgraduate students longing to improve their translation skills and competence.</div><div>
</div>		<div>This book sheds new light on corpus-assisted translation pedagogy, an intersection of three distinct but cognate disciplines: corpus linguistics, translation and pedagogy. By taking an innovative and empirical approach to translation teaching, the study utilizes mixed methods, including translation experiments, surveys and in-depth focus groups. The results demonstrated the unique advantages and at the same time called attention to possible pitfalls of using corpora for translation teaching purposes. This book enriches our understanding of corpus application in the setting of translation between Chinese and English, two languages which are each distinctly different from one another. Readers will also discover new horizons in this burgeoning and interdisciplinary field of research.</div><div>
</div><div>This book appeals to a broad readership, from scholars and researchers who are interested in translation technology to widen the scope of translation studies, translation trainers in search of effective teaching approaches to a growing number of cross-disciplinary postgraduate students longing to improve their translation skills and competence.</div><div>
</div>		<p>Introduces and examines a new corpus-assisted approach to translation teaching</p><p>Clarifies the respective roles and differences that corpus plays in English and Chinese Bidirectional Translation</p><p>Connects readers of Corpus use in translation teaching from perspectives of student and trainee</p><div><div>Kanglong Liu is an Assistant Professor at The Hong Kong Polytechnic University. His research interests include corpus-based translation studies, language and translation pedagogy and translation studies of “Hong Lou Meng”. Dr. Liu has worked and taught in a few universities in Hong Kong after obtaining Ph.D. in Translation from The Chinese University of Hong Kong. He is currently Associate Editor of Translation Quarterly, the official publication of the Hong Kong Translation Society. It is noteworthy that he has published widely in scholarly journals, such as Chinese Translators Journal, Translation Quarterly, Journal of Translation Studies, Literary and Linguistic Computing while also serving as Executive Committee Member of the Hong Kong Translation Society and Member of Executive Committee of the Translators Association of China.</div>
</div><div>Up to present, he has been acting as Principal Investigator of the Hong Kong RGC project “How do students perform and perceive translation tasks in corpus-assisted translation settings?” as well as GRF project “Translation or Mediation Universals? A Corpus-based Multidimensional Analysis of Learner Translation with Professional Translation and Non-native Language Variety”. Meanwhile, he has served with distinction as a judge for The Hong Kong Youth Translation Competition over the past few years. </div><div>
</div>		ScienceProfessional Books (2)Science (SC)EBOP41176Social Sciences009789811589942Language TranslationResearch Methods in Language and LinguisticsLanguage Teaching and LearningComputational Linguistics454000
74
Social Sciences978-981-15-8997-3LiuKanglong LiuKanglong Liu, The Hong Kong Polytechnic University, Hung Hom Kowloon, Hong KongCorpus-Assisted Translation TeachingIssues and ChallengesXVI, 168 p. 46 illus., 20 illus. in color.12020final109.9933.00117.6935.3199.9930.00119.9936.00Soft cover1Corpora and Intercultural Studies7Social SciencesMonographBook168CBCFSpringerSpringer Nature Singapore0Available2021-11-032020-11-022021-11-022021-11-021<div>Introduction and Research Rationale.- Corpus-assisted translation teaching: an overview.- Web-based parallel corpora: technical issues.- Methodology.- Background survey and translation experiments.- Attitudes of students towards corpus use in translation.- Conclusions and implications.
</div>		<div>This book sheds new light on corpus-assisted translation pedagogy, an intersection of three distinct but cognate disciplines: corpus linguistics, translation and pedagogy. By taking an innovative and empirical approach to translation teaching, the study utilizes mixed methods, including translation experiments, surveys and in-depth focus groups. The results demonstrated the unique advantages and at the same time called attention to possible pitfalls of using corpora for translation teaching purposes. This book enriches our understanding of corpus application in the setting of translation between Chinese and English, two languages which are each distinctly different from one another. Readers will also discover new horizons in this burgeoning and interdisciplinary field of research.</div><div>
</div><div>This book appeals to a broad readership, from scholars and researchers who are interested in translation technology to widen the scope of translation studies, translation trainers in search of effective teaching approaches to a growing number of cross-disciplinary postgraduate students longing to improve their translation skills and competence.</div><div>
</div>		<div>This book sheds new light on corpus-assisted translation pedagogy, an intersection of three distinct but cognate disciplines: corpus linguistics, translation and pedagogy. By taking an innovative and empirical approach to translation teaching, the study utilizes mixed methods, including translation experiments, surveys and in-depth focus groups. The results demonstrated the unique advantages and at the same time called attention to possible pitfalls of using corpora for translation teaching purposes. This book enriches our understanding of corpus application in the setting of translation between Chinese and English, two languages which are each distinctly different from one another. Readers will also discover new horizons in this burgeoning and interdisciplinary field of research.</div><div>
</div><div>This book appeals to a broad readership, from scholars and researchers who are interested in translation technology to widen the scope of translation studies, translation trainers in search of effective teaching approaches to a growing number of cross-disciplinary postgraduate students longing to improve their translation skills and competence.</div><div>
</div>		<p>Introduces and examines a new corpus-assisted approach to translation teaching</p><p>Clarifies the respective roles and differences that corpus plays in English and Chinese Bidirectional Translation</p><p>Connects readers of Corpus use in translation teaching from perspectives of student and trainee</p><div><div>Kanglong Liu is an Assistant Professor at The Hong Kong Polytechnic University. His research interests include corpus-based translation studies, language and translation pedagogy and translation studies of “Hong Lou Meng”. Dr. Liu has worked and taught in a few universities in Hong Kong after obtaining Ph.D. in Translation from The Chinese University of Hong Kong. He is currently Associate Editor of Translation Quarterly, the official publication of the Hong Kong Translation Society. It is noteworthy that he has published widely in scholarly journals, such as Chinese Translators Journal, Translation Quarterly, Journal of Translation Studies, Literary and Linguistic Computing while also serving as Executive Committee Member of the Hong Kong Translation Society and Member of Executive Committee of the Translators Association of China.</div>
</div><div>Up to present, he has been acting as Principal Investigator of the Hong Kong RGC project “How do students perform and perceive translation tasks in corpus-assisted translation settings?” as well as GRF project “Translation or Mediation Universals? A Corpus-based Multidimensional Analysis of Learner Translation with Professional Translation and Non-native Language Variety”. Meanwhile, he has served with distinction as a judge for The Hong Kong Youth Translation Competition over the past few years. </div><div>
</div>		ScienceProfessional Books (2)Science (SC)EBOP41176Social Sciences009789811589973Language TranslationResearch Methods in Language and LinguisticsLanguage Teaching and LearningComputational Linguistics291000
75
Social Sciencesx978-1-137-48771-1LöwMartina LöwMartina Löw, Technische Universität, Berlin, GermanyThe Sociology of SpaceMateriality, Social Structures, and ActionXXVII, 303 p.12016final119.9936.00128.3938.52109.9933.00129.9939.00Hard cover0Cultural SociologySocial SciencesMonographBook303JHBRPCPalgrave MacmillanPalgrave Macmillan US0Available2016-09-092023-11-242023-11-2411. Why Should Sociology Deal with Space?.- 2. Conceptions of Space in Context.- 3. Transformations of Phenomena of Space.-4. On the Way to a Sociological Concept of Space.- 5. Constitution of Space.- 6. Exemplary Analyses.- 7. Basic Concepts of a Sociology of Space.- Conclusions.In this book, the author develops a relational concept of space that encompasses social structure, the material world of objects and bodies, and the symbolic dimension of the social world. Löw’s guiding principle is the assumption that space emerges in the interplay between objects, structures and actions. Based on a critical discussion of classic theories of space, Löw develops a new dynamic theory of space that accounts for the relational context in which space is constituted. This innovative view on the interdependency of material, social, and symbolic dimensions of space also permits a new perspective on architecture and urban development.In this book, the author develops a relational concept of space that encompasses social structure, the material world of objects and bodies, and the symbolic dimension of the social world. Löw’s guiding principle is the assumption that space emerges in the interplay between objects, structures and actions. Based on a critical discussion of classic theories of space, Löw develops a new dynamic theory of space that accounts for the relational context in which space is constituted. This innovative view on the interdependency of material, social, and symbolic dimensions of space also permits a new perspective on architecture and urban development.<p>Provides a fresh approach to urban studies that differs fundamentally from other sociological perspectives</p><p>Places the city itself center stage and explores its overall make-up in a holistic way in its physical, relational and symbolic dimensions</p><p>Presents the work of a top scholar in the field of sociology</p>Martina Löw is Professor of Sociology at the Technische Universität Berlin, Germany. Her areas of specialization and research are sociological theory, urban sociology, space theory, and cultural sociology. From 2011 until 2013 she was president of the German Sociological Association, and as a member of numerous advisory boards, she is currently involved in several urban development projects.SciencePalgrave Standard US (P5)Palgrave Monograph (P6)EBOP41176Social Sciences009781137487711SociologyUrban SociologyHuman Geography5308000
76
Social Sciencesx978-1-349-69570-6LöwMartina LöwMartina Löw, Technische Universität, Berlin, GermanyThe Sociology of SpaceMateriality, Social Structures, and ActionXXVII, 303 p.12016final44.9913.5048.1414.4439.9912.0049.9915.00Soft cover0Cultural SociologySocial SciencesMonographBook (Paperback Initiative)303JHBRPCPalgrave MacmillanPalgrave Macmillan US0Available2018-12-082018-12-082017-09-092017-10-0711. Why Should Sociology Deal with Space?.- 2. Conceptions of Space in Context.- 3. Transformations of Phenomena of Space.-4. On the Way to a Sociological Concept of Space.- 5. Constitution of Space.- 6. Exemplary Analyses.- 7. Basic Concepts of a Sociology of Space.- Conclusions.In this book, the author develops a relational concept of space that encompasses social structure, the material world of objects and bodies, and the symbolic dimension of the social world. Löw’s guiding principle is the assumption that space emerges in the interplay between objects, structures and actions. Based on a critical discussion of classic theories of space, Löw develops a new dynamic theory of space that accounts for the relational context in which space is constituted. This innovative view on the interdependency of material, social, and symbolic dimensions of space also permits a new perspective on architecture and urban development.In this book, the author develops a relational concept of space that encompasses social structure, the material world of objects and bodies, and the symbolic dimension of the social world. Löw’s guiding principle is the assumption that space emerges in the interplay between objects, structures and actions. Based on a critical discussion of classic theories of space, Löw develops a new dynamic theory of space that accounts for the relational context in which space is constituted. This innovative view on the interdependency of material, social, and symbolic dimensions of space also permits a new perspective on architecture and urban development.<p>Provides a fresh approach to urban studies that differs fundamentally from other sociological perspectives</p><p>Places the city itself center stage and explores its overall make-up in a holistic way in its physical, relational and symbolic dimensions</p><p>Presents the work of a top scholar in the field of sociology</p>Martina Löw is Professor of Sociology at the Technische Universität Berlin, Germany. Her areas of specialization and research are sociological theory, urban sociology, space theory, and cultural sociology. From 2011 until 2013 she was president of the German Sociological Association, and as a member of numerous advisory boards, she is currently involved in several urban development projects.SciencePalgrave Standard US (P5)Palgrave Monograph (P6)EBOP41176Social Sciences009781349695706SociologyUrban SociologyHuman Geography454000
77
Social Sciences978-1-4939-2119-5MartinDebra L. Martin; Ryan P. Harrod; Ventura R. PérezDebra L. Martin, University of Nevada, Las Vegas, NV, USA; Ryan P. Harrod, University of Nevada, Las Vegas, NV, USA; Ventura R. Pérez, University of Massachusetts Dept. Anthropology, Amherst, MA, USABioarchaeologyAn Integrated Approach to Working with Human RemainsXVII, 262 p.12013final89.9927.0096.2928.8979.9924.0099.9930.00Soft cover0Manuals in Archaeological Method, Theory and TechniqueSocial SciencesGraduate/advanced undergraduate textbookBook262HDPSSpringerSpringer New York0Available2014-09-162014-10-022014-10-312014-10-311History and Current State of Bioarchaeology.- Ethics and Research that Matters.- What Integration Means.- Taphonomic Signatures.- Burial Pratices and Mortuary Ritual.- Excavation Techniques.- Demography and Disease.- Reconstruction of Diet and Nutrition.- Reconstucting Ancestry, Migration, and Relatedness.- Osteobiography.- Sex, Organization, and Stratification.- Trauma and Violence.- Body Modifications and Ornamentation.- Behavior, Ritual, and Patterned Complexity.- Process and Population.Bioarchaeology is the analysis of human remains within an interpretative framework that includes contextual information. This comprehensive and much-needed manual provides both a starting point and a reference for archaeologists, bioarchaeologists and others working in this integrative field. The authors cover a range of bioarchaeological methods and theory including: Ethical issues involved in dealing with human remainsTheoretical approaches in bioarchaeologyTechniques in taphonomy and bone analysisLab and forensic techniques for skeletal analysisBest practices for excavation techniquesSpecial applications in bioarchaeologyWith case studies from bioarchaeological research, the authors integrate theoretical and methodological discussion with a wide range of field studies from different geographic areas, time periods, and data types, to demonstrate the full scope of this important field of study.Bioarchaeology is the analysis of human remains within an interpretative framework that includes contextual information. This comprehensive and much-needed manual provides both a starting point and a reference for archaeologists, bioarchaeologists and others working in this integrative field. The authors cover a range of bioarchaeological methods and theory including:Ethical issues involved in dealing with human remainsTheoretical approaches in bioarchaeologyTechniques in taphonomy and bone analysisLab and forensic techniques for skeletal analysisBest practices for excavation techniquesSpecial applications in bioarchaeologyWith case studies from bioarchaeological research, the authors integrate theoretical and methodological discussion with a wide range of field studies from different geographic areas, time periods, and data types, to demonstrate the full scope of this important field of study.<p>Integrates theory, method, and field research to present a comprehensive picture of Bioarchaeology as a field</p><p>Addresses ethical concerns and NAGPRA in a straightforward and clear manner</p><p>Demonstrates Bioarchaological methods from the field site to the lab, to data interpretation</p><p>Includes supplementary material: sn.pub/extras</p>Debra L. Martin is the Lincy Professor of Anthropology at the University of Nevada, Las Vegas. She directs a graduate program in bioarchaeology. Ryan Harrod is a doctoral candidate in the Department of Anthropology at the University of Nevada, Las Vegas and an instructor at College of Southern Nevada.Ventura R. Pèrez is assistant professor in the Department of Anthropology at the University of Massachusetts, Amherst.StudentsProfessional Books (2)Standard (0)EBOP11648Humanities, Social Sciences and Law009781493921195ArchaeologyBiological TechniquesAnthropology4787000
78
Social Sciences978-1-4614-6377-1MartinDebra L. Martin; Ryan P. Harrod; Ventura R. PérezDebra L. Martin, University of Nevada, Las Vegas, NV, USA; Ryan P. Harrod, University of Nevada, Las Vegas, NV, USA; Ventura R. Pérez, University of Massachusetts Dept. Anthropology, Amherst, MA, USABioarchaeologyAn Integrated Approach to Working with Human RemainsXVII, 262 p.12013final129.9939.00139.0941.73109.9933.00139.9942.00Hard cover0Manuals in Archaeological Method, Theory and TechniqueSocial SciencesGraduate/advanced undergraduate textbookBook262HDPSSpringerSpringer New York0Available2013-03-162013-03-272014-10-312014-10-311History and Current State of Bioarchaeology.- Ethics and Research that Matters.- What Integration Means.- Taphonomic Signatures.- Burial Pratices and Mortuary Ritual.- Excavation Techniques.- Demography and Disease.- Reconstruction of Diet and Nutrition.- Reconstucting Ancestry, Migration, and Relatedness.- Osteobiography.- Sex, Organization, and Stratification.- Trauma and Violence.- Body Modifications and Ornamentation.- Behavior, Ritual, and Patterned Complexity.- Process and Population.Bioarchaeology is the analysis of human remains within an interpretative framework that includes contextual information. This comprehensive and much-needed manual provides both a starting point and a reference for archaeologists, bioarchaeologists and others working in this integrative field. The authors cover a range of bioarchaeological methods and theory including: Ethical issues involved in dealing with human remainsTheoretical approaches in bioarchaeologyTechniques in taphonomy and bone analysisLab and forensic techniques for skeletal analysisBest practices for excavation techniquesSpecial applications in bioarchaeologyWith case studies from bioarchaeological research, the authors integrate theoretical and methodological discussion with a wide range of field studies from different geographic areas, time periods, and data types, to demonstrate the full scope of this important field of study.Bioarchaeology is the analysis of human remains within an interpretative framework that includes contextual information. This comprehensive and much-needed manual provides both a starting point and a reference for archaeologists, bioarchaeologists and others working in this integrative field. The authors cover a range of bioarchaeological methods and theory including:Ethical issues involved in dealing with human remainsTheoretical approaches in bioarchaeologyTechniques in taphonomy and bone analysisLab and forensic techniques for skeletal analysisBest practices for excavation techniquesSpecial applications in bioarchaeologyWith case studies from bioarchaeological research, the authors integrate theoretical and methodological discussion with a wide range of field studies from different geographic areas, time periods, and data types, to demonstrate the full scope of this important field of study.<p>Integrates theory, method, and field research to present a comprehensive picture of Bioarchaeology as a field</p><p>Addresses ethical concerns and NAGPRA in a straightforward and clear manner</p><p>Demonstrates Bioarchaological methods from the field site to the lab, to data interpretation</p><p>Includes supplementary material: sn.pub/extras</p>Debra L. Martin is the Lincy Professor of Anthropology at the University of Nevada, Las Vegas. She directs a graduate program in bioarchaeology. Ryan Harrod is a doctoral candidate in the Department of Anthropology at the University of Nevada, Las Vegas and an instructor at College of Southern Nevada.Ventura R. Pèrez is assistant professor in the Department of Anthropology at the University of Massachusetts, Amherst.StudentsProfessional Books (2)Standard (0)EBOP11648Humanities, Social Sciences and Law009781461463771ArchaeologyBiological TechniquesAnthropology612000
79
Social Sciences978-3-319-26034-1MaschiTina MaschiTina Maschi, Fordham University, New York, NY, USAApplying a Human Rights Approach to Social Work Research and EvaluationA Rights Research ManifestoXXIII, 99 p. 9 illus. in color.12016final64.9919.5069.5420.8654.9916.5069.9921.00Soft cover0SpringerBriefs in Rights-Based Approaches to Social WorkSocial SciencesBrief/PivotBook99JKSNJPVHSpringerSpringer International Publishing0Available2015-11-162015-11-082017-06-032017-06-031Introduction.- Understanding and Applying a Human Rights Framework.- Research and Evaluation that Makes a Difference.- Informed Decision-Making, Multiple Perspectives, Approaches, and Methods.- Social Contexts, Meaningful Participation, Relational Communication.- Holistic Analysis, Discerning Meaning from Narrative and Numeric Data.- Thoughtful Sharing (Dissemination) and Action.This brief introduces a human rights approach to social work research and evaluation, compares it to traditional research approaches, and explains how to apply it in real world social work research. The author draws from a human rights framework that incorporates dignity and respect for all persons, the universality and interrelatedness of rights (political, civil, social, economic, and cultural), nondiscrimination, participation, accountability, and transparency. To advance a human rights approach, it introduces a rights-based model that accentuates the use of mixed methods and participatory research and evaluation. This brief aims to increase competencies in how to apply a rights based approach to research decision-making process from the formulation of research questions, research and practice design, and participatory action strategies that advance human rights.​ It is a call to action for social workers to forge a rights-based research agenda that fosters empowerment.<p>Introduces a human rights framework that can be applied to social work research</p><p>Offers guidance on developing and implementing a rights-based approach to social work research and evaluation</p><p>Advances the relationship between human rights and social justice and individual, family, and community well-being?</p><p>Provides case examples</p><p>Includes supplementary material: sn.pub/extras</p>Dr. Tina Maschi is an associate professor at the Fordham University Graduate School of Social Service in New York City. Dr. Maschi has published extensively on trauma among criminal justice populations and older adults in prison in social work and interdisciplinary journals. Dr. Maschi is the lead editor of the book, Forensic Social Work: Psychosocial and Legal Aspects in Diverse Practice Settings and the lead author of the soon to be released book, Social Worker as Researcher: Integrating Social Work Research with Advocacy that infuses human rights content throughout the course. Recent publications include: Trauma and Stress among Older Adults in the Criminal Justice System and Trauma, Stressful Life Event and Post Traumatic Stress Symptoms: Do Subjective Impressions Matter? She is the founder and director of the Be the Evidence Project which has the purpose of advancing human rights and social justice through public awareness projects, such as marginalized populations, such as aging people in prison, formerly incarcerated LGBT elders with multiple intersectional identifies which include serious mental and physical disabilities (e.g. HIV, schizophrenia), trauma and immigration histories, poverty, racial/ethnic minorities, war veterans.ProfessionalsProfessional Books (2)Standard (0)EBOP41176Social Sciences009783319260341Social WorkHuman RightsSocial Policy454000
80
Social Sciencesx978-3-030-25371-4MasseyRuth Massey; Ashley GunterRuth Massey, University of Huddersfield, Huddersfield, UK; Ashley Gunter, University of South Africa, Johannesburg, South AfricaUrban Geography in South AfricaPerspectives and TheoryXIV, 292 p. 29 illus., 24 illus. in color.12020final129.9939.00139.0941.73109.9933.00139.9942.00Soft cover1Urban Perspectives from the Global SouthSocial SciencesContributed volumeBook292RGCRPSpringerSpringer International Publishing0Available2020-08-302019-08-172020-08-302020-08-301<div>Ch.1 Urban Geography in South Africa: An Introduction.- Ch.2 Urban-Political Geography – South African Perspectives.- Ch.3 The Apartheid City.- Ch.4 Gated communities in South Africa: an emerging paradox.- Ch.5 Enclaves and quartering in urban South Africa.- Ch.6 Infrastructure in South African Cities.- Ch.7 Cities – where people and ecology meet.- Ch.8 Secondary Cities in South Africa.- Ch.9 Vulnerability and adaptation to climate change in urban South Africa.- Ch.10 Crime and spatiality in South African cities.- Ch.11 Leisure tourism space and urban change: Lessons from Cape Town and Stellenbosch to contemplate in urban South Africa.- Ch.12 South Africa’s urban transport challenge: Urban sprawl, traffic congestion, transport poverty and weak public transport.- Ch.13 Urban Housing in South Africa: the role of housing in Development and Transformation.- Ch.14 Studentification and urban change in South Africa- Ch.15 Gender inclusivity and development in South African public urban spaces.- Ch.16 Urban Food Security.- Ch.17 Urban Renewal in South African cities.- Ch.18 South Africa’s Urban Future: Challenges and Opportunities.</div><div>
</div>		This book embraces South Africa and its place in the Global South, providing a succinct theoretical and empirical analysis and discussion of urban issues in the country. There have been sporadic calls from the Urban Geography community for the development of an overarching and comprehensive text that explores contemporary processes and practices taking place in urban South Africa and, more widely, the Global South. This is an edited collection of chapters by leading urban theorists and practitioners working on various themes within urban South Africa and serves as a base for scholars and students interested in urban perspectives from countries in the Global South.
<div>This book embraces South Africa and its place in the Global South, providing a succinct theoretical and empirical analysis and discussion of urban issues in the country. There have been sporadic calls from the Urban Geography community for the development of an overarching and comprehensive text that explores contemporary processes and practices taking place in urban South Africa and, more widely, the Global South. This is an edited collection of chapters by leading urban theorists and practitioners working on various themes within urban South Africa and serves as a base for scholars and students interested in urban perspectives from countries in the Global South.
</div>		<p>Provides a succinct theoretical and empirical analysis and discussion of urban issues in South Africa</p><p>Brings together leading authors in discussion on South African urban issues</p><p>Serves as a unique base for scholars and students interested in urban perspectives from the South</p><div><div><div>Dr Ruth Massey a Senior Lecturer in Human Geography at the University of Huddersfield (UK) and a Research Associate at the University of the Free State (South Africa). As an Urban and Development Geographer her core research interests lie in understanding the governance and social dynamics within low-income communities in the Global South using the lens of housing and energy infrastructure. She has served as a council member of the South African Geographical Society (SSAG) and is currently a committee member of the Royal Geographical Society (with IBG): Political Geography Research Group (PolGRG). Dr Massey has published in a number of international, peer-reviewed journals and has presented papers and seminars on urban development at universities and conferences around the world. </div><div>
</div><div>Prof Ashley Gunter is an Associate Professor in Geography at the University of South Africa. He started his academic career at Monash South Africa, a branch campus of Monash University in Australia. His research interests lie in the neoliberal state of education in the post-apartheid South African system as well as infrastructure and development. He served as a council member of the South African Geographical Society, has been a Research Fellow at Oxford University and the University of Edinburgh, and is an Associate Member of the OpenSpace Research Centre. He is on the editorial board of InterEspaço: Revista de Geografia e Interdisciplinaridade, and Cogent: Social Science. He has published and presented on development issues in South Africa</div><div>
</div></div></div><div>
</div>		ScienceProfessional Books (2)Science (SC)EBOP41176Social Sciences009783030253714Human GeographyUrban Economics474000
81
Social Sciencesx978-3-030-25368-4MasseyRuth Massey; Ashley GunterRuth Massey, University of Huddersfield, Huddersfield, UK; Ashley Gunter, University of South Africa, Johannesburg, South AfricaUrban Geography in South AfricaPerspectives and TheoryXIV, 292 p. 29 illus., 24 illus. in color.12020final129.9939.00139.0941.73109.9933.00139.9942.00Hard cover0Urban Perspectives from the Global SouthSocial SciencesContributed volumeBook292RGCRPSpringerSpringer International Publishing0Available2019-08-302019-08-172019-09-042019-09-041<div>Ch.1 Urban Geography in South Africa: An Introduction.- Ch.2 Urban-Political Geography – South African Perspectives.- Ch.3 The Apartheid City.- Ch.4 Gated communities in South Africa: an emerging paradox.- Ch.5 Enclaves and quartering in urban South Africa.- Ch.6 Infrastructure in South African Cities.- Ch.7 Cities – where people and ecology meet.- Ch.8 Secondary Cities in South Africa.- Ch.9 Vulnerability and adaptation to climate change in urban South Africa.- Ch.10 Crime and spatiality in South African cities.- Ch.11 Leisure tourism space and urban change: Lessons from Cape Town and Stellenbosch to contemplate in urban South Africa.- Ch.12 South Africa’s urban transport challenge: Urban sprawl, traffic congestion, transport poverty and weak public transport.- Ch.13 Urban Housing in South Africa: the role of housing in Development and Transformation.- Ch.14 Studentification and urban change in South Africa- Ch.15 Gender inclusivity and development in South African public urban spaces.- Ch.16 Urban Food Security.- Ch.17 Urban Renewal in South African cities.- Ch.18 South Africa’s Urban Future: Challenges and Opportunities.</div><div>
</div>		This book embraces South Africa and its place in the Global South, providing a succinct theoretical and empirical analysis and discussion of urban issues in the country. There have been sporadic calls from the Urban Geography community for the development of an overarching and comprehensive text that explores contemporary processes and practices taking place in urban South Africa and, more widely, the Global South. This is an edited collection of chapters by leading urban theorists and practitioners working on various themes within urban South Africa and serves as a base for scholars and students interested in urban perspectives from countries in the Global South.
<div>This book embraces South Africa and its place in the Global South, providing a succinct theoretical and empirical analysis and discussion of urban issues in the country. There have been sporadic calls from the Urban Geography community for the development of an overarching and comprehensive text that explores contemporary processes and practices taking place in urban South Africa and, more widely, the Global South. This is an edited collection of chapters by leading urban theorists and practitioners working on various themes within urban South Africa and serves as a base for scholars and students interested in urban perspectives from countries in the Global South.
</div>		<p>Provides a succinct theoretical and empirical analysis and discussion of urban issues in South Africa</p><p>Brings together leading authors in discussion on South African urban issues</p><p>Serves as a unique base for scholars and students interested in urban perspectives from the South</p><div><div><div>Dr Ruth Massey a Senior Lecturer in Human Geography at the University of Huddersfield (UK) and a Research Associate at the University of the Free State (South Africa). As an Urban and Development Geographer her core research interests lie in understanding the governance and social dynamics within low-income communities in the Global South using the lens of housing and energy infrastructure. She has served as a council member of the South African Geographical Society (SSAG) and is currently a committee member of the Royal Geographical Society (with IBG): Political Geography Research Group (PolGRG). Dr Massey has published in a number of international, peer-reviewed journals and has presented papers and seminars on urban development at universities and conferences around the world. </div><div>
</div><div>Prof Ashley Gunter is an Associate Professor in Geography at the University of South Africa. He started his academic career at Monash South Africa, a branch campus of Monash University in Australia. His research interests lie in the neoliberal state of education in the post-apartheid South African system as well as infrastructure and development. He served as a council member of the South African Geographical Society, has been a Research Fellow at Oxford University and the University of Edinburgh, and is an Associate Member of the OpenSpace Research Centre. He is on the editorial board of InterEspaço: Revista de Geografia e Interdisciplinaridade, and Cogent: Social Science. He has published and presented on development issues in South Africa</div><div>
</div></div></div><div>
</div>		ScienceProfessional Books (2)Science (SC)EBOP41176Social Sciences009783030253684Human GeographyUrban Economics629000
82
Social Sciences978-3-319-88990-0McTigheJohn P. McTigheJohn P. McTighe, Ramapo College, Mahwah, NJ, USANarrative Theory in Clinical Social Work PracticeXVII, 186 p.12018final56.9917.1060.9818.2949.9915.0064.9919.50Soft cover1Essential Clinical Social Work SeriesSocial SciencesProfessional bookBook (Paperback Initiative)186JKSNMMJTSpringerSpringer International Publishing0Available2019-06-062019-06-062019-01-312019-02-281Narrative Theory: An Introduction and Overview.- Encountering the Self, Encountering the Other: Narratives of Race and Ethnicity.- Surviving Together: Individual and Communal Narratives in the Wake of Tragedy.- Spiritual Stories: Exploring Ultimate Meaning in Social Work Practice.- Sexual Stories: Narratives of Sexual Identity, Gender, and Sexual Development.- Leaving Home, Finding Home: Narrative Practice with Immigrant Populations.- Moving On: Narrative Perspectives on Grief and Loss.- Who I Am and Who I Want to Be: Narrative and the Evolving Self of the Social Worker in Clinical Practice.This theory-to-practice guide offers mental health practitioners a powerful narrative-based approach to working with clients in clinical practice. It opens with a primer on contemporary narrative theory and offers a robust framework based on the art and techniques of listening for deeper, more meaningful understanding and intervention.<div><br/></div><div>Chapters expand on these foundational concepts by applying them to a diverse range of populations and issues, among them race and ethnicity, human sexuality, immigration, and the experience of trauma, grief, and loss. The author’s engaging voice, thoughtful pedagogical style, and extensive use of examples and exercises also work together to inform the reader’s own narrative of growth and self-knowledge.</div><div><br/></div><div>Included in the coverage:</div><div>• Encountering the self, encountering the other: narratives of race and ethnicity.</div><div>• Surviving together: individual and communal narratives in the wake of tragedy.</div><div>• Spiritual stories: exploring ultimate meaning in social work practice.</div><div>• Sexual stories: narratives of sexual identity, gender, and sexual development.</div><div>• Leaving home, finding home: narrative practice with immigrant populations.</div><div>• Moving on: narrative perspectives on grief and loss.</div><br/><div>Narrative Theory in Clinical Social Work Practice is geared toward students as well as seasoned social workers, and professionals and practitioners in related clinical fields interested in informing their work with a narrative approach.</div><div>This theory-to-practice guide offers mental health practitioners a powerful narrative-based approach to working with clients in clinical practice. It opens with a primer on contemporary narrative theory and offers a robust framework based on the art and techniques of listening for deeper, more meaningful understanding and intervention.</div><div><br/></div><div>Chapters expand on these foundational concepts by applying them to a diverse range of populations and issues, among them race and ethnicity, human sexuality, immigration, and the experience of trauma, grief, and loss. The author’s engaging voice, thoughtful pedagogical style, and extensive use of examples and exercises also work together to inform the reader’s own narrative of growth and self-knowledge.</div><div><br/></div><div>Included in the coverage:</div><div>• Encountering the self, encountering the other: narratives of race and ethnicity.</div><div>• Surviving together: individual and communal narratives in the wake of tragedy.</div><div>• Spiritual stories: exploring ultimate meaning in social work practice.</div><div>• Sexual stories: narratives of sexual identity, gender, and sexual development.</div><div>• Leaving home, finding home: narrative practice with immigrant populations.</div><div>• Moving on: narrative perspectives on grief and loss.</div><div><br/></div><div>Narrative Theory in Clinical Social Work Practice is geared toward students as well as seasoned social workers, and professionals and practitioners in related clinical fields interested in informing their work with a narrative approach.</div><p>Examines the implications of narrative therapy for diverse populations and issues</p><p>Formatted to facilitate use in a classroom setting</p><p>Provides detailed case studies to help the reader translate theory into practice</p>John P. McTighe is currently an Assistant Professor of Social Work at Ramapo College of New Jersey. He received his masters degree in social work and Ph.D. in clinical social work from the Silver School of Social Work at New York University, and his M.Div. from the Washington Theological Union in Silver Spring, Maryland. He has published numerous articles in journals such as British Journal of Social Work, Journal of Traumatic Stress, and Clinical Social Work Journal, in addition to contributing a chapter to Critical Thinking in Clinical Assessment and Diagnosis. He is also in private practice in Pompton Plains, New Jersey.ProfessionalsProfessional Books (2)Standard (0)EBOP41176Social Sciences009783319889900Social WorkCounseling PsychologyPsychotherapy454000
83
Social Sciences978-3-319-70786-0McTigheJohn P. McTigheJohn P. McTighe, Ramapo College, Mahwah, NJ, USANarrative Theory in Clinical Social Work PracticeXVII, 186 p.12018final79.9924.0085.5925.6869.9921.0089.9927.00Hard cover0Essential Clinical Social Work SeriesSocial SciencesProfessional bookBook186JKSNMMJTSpringerSpringer International Publishing0Available2018-01-312018-01-042018-01-212018-01-211Narrative Theory: An Introduction and Overview.- Encountering the Self, Encountering the Other: Narratives of Race and Ethnicity.- Surviving Together: Individual and Communal Narratives in the Wake of Tragedy.- Spiritual Stories: Exploring Ultimate Meaning in Social Work Practice.- Sexual Stories: Narratives of Sexual Identity, Gender, and Sexual Development.- Leaving Home, Finding Home: Narrative Practice with Immigrant Populations.- Moving On: Narrative Perspectives on Grief and Loss.- Who I Am and Who I Want to Be: Narrative and the Evolving Self of the Social Worker in Clinical Practice.This theory-to-practice guide offers mental health practitioners a powerful narrative-based approach to working with clients in clinical practice. It opens with a primer on contemporary narrative theory and offers a robust framework based on the art and techniques of listening for deeper, more meaningful understanding and intervention.<div><br/></div><div>Chapters expand on these foundational concepts by applying them to a diverse range of populations and issues, among them race and ethnicity, human sexuality, immigration, and the experience of trauma, grief, and loss. The author’s engaging voice, thoughtful pedagogical style, and extensive use of examples and exercises also work together to inform the reader’s own narrative of growth and self-knowledge.</div><div><br/></div><div>Included in the coverage:</div><div>• Encountering the self, encountering the other: narratives of race and ethnicity.</div><div>• Surviving together: individual and communal narratives in the wake of tragedy.</div><div>• Spiritual stories: exploring ultimate meaning in social work practice.</div><div>• Sexual stories: narratives of sexual identity, gender, and sexual development.</div><div>• Leaving home, finding home: narrative practice with immigrant populations.</div><div>• Moving on: narrative perspectives on grief and loss.</div><br/><div>Narrative Theory in Clinical Social Work Practice is geared toward students as well as seasoned social workers, and professionals and practitioners in related clinical fields interested in informing their work with a narrative approach.</div><div>This theory-to-practice guide offers mental health practitioners a powerful narrative-based approach to working with clients in clinical practice. It opens with a primer on contemporary narrative theory and offers a robust framework based on the art and techniques of listening for deeper, more meaningful understanding and intervention.</div><div><br/></div><div>Chapters expand on these foundational concepts by applying them to a diverse range of populations and issues, among them race and ethnicity, human sexuality, immigration, and the experience of trauma, grief, and loss. The author’s engaging voice, thoughtful pedagogical style, and extensive use of examples and exercises also work together to inform the reader’s own narrative of growth and self-knowledge.</div><div><br/></div><div>Included in the coverage:</div><div>• Encountering the self, encountering the other: narratives of race and ethnicity.</div><div>• Surviving together: individual and communal narratives in the wake of tragedy.</div><div>• Spiritual stories: exploring ultimate meaning in social work practice.</div><div>• Sexual stories: narratives of sexual identity, gender, and sexual development.</div><div>• Leaving home, finding home: narrative practice with immigrant populations.</div><div>• Moving on: narrative perspectives on grief and loss.</div><div><br/></div><div>Narrative Theory in Clinical Social Work Practice is geared toward students as well as seasoned social workers, and professionals and practitioners in related clinical fields interested in informing their work with a narrative approach.</div><p>Examines the implications of narrative therapy for diverse populations and issues</p><p>Formatted to facilitate use in a classroom setting</p><p>Provides detailed case studies to help the reader translate theory into practice</p>John P. McTighe is currently an Assistant Professor of Social Work at Ramapo College of New Jersey. He received his masters degree in social work and Ph.D. in clinical social work from the Silver School of Social Work at New York University, and his M.Div. from the Washington Theological Union in Silver Spring, Maryland. He has published numerous articles in journals such as British Journal of Social Work, Journal of Traumatic Stress, and Clinical Social Work Journal, in addition to contributing a chapter to Critical Thinking in Clinical Assessment and Diagnosis. He is also in private practice in Pompton Plains, New Jersey.ProfessionalsProfessional Books (2)Standard (0)EBOP41176Social Sciences009783319707860Social WorkCounseling PsychologyPsychotherapy477000
84
Social Sciences978-3-030-56640-1MinutellaVincenza MinutellaVincenza Minutella, University of Turin, Turin, Italy(Re)Creating Language Identities in Animated FilmsDubbing Linguistic VariationXXII, 408 p. 4 illus.12021final119.9936.00128.3938.52109.9933.00129.9939.00Soft cover1Palgrave Studies in Translating and InterpretingSocial SciencesMonographBook408CBDPalgrave MacmillanSpringer International Publishing0Available2021-11-032020-11-032021-11-032021-11-031Chapter 1: Dubbing Animated Films: A Complex Collaborative Process.- Chapter 2: Translating Language Varieties and Multilingualism in Audiovisual Texts: Research and Conversations with Dubbing Practitioners.- Chapter 3: Linguistic Variation in Animated Films from 2001 to 2017.- Chapter 4: Americans, Brits, Aussies & Co.: Native Varieties of English in Italian Dubbing.- Chapter 5: Languages Other than English/Foreign Languages in Italian Dubbing: Preservation, Neutralisation, Reduction or Adaptation?.- Chapter 6: Non-native Varieties of English in Italian Dubbing: Does 'Foreign-accented English' Become 'Foreign-accented Italian'?.- Chapter 7: (Re)positioning Italianness in Animated Films: No Accent, Foreign Accent, Regional Italian, Dialect?.- Chapter 8: Conclusion.This book investigates how language identities are created and represented in animated films, and how they are tackled by dubbing professionals in Italy. The author describes how language variation and varieties contribute to building the language identities of characters in several popular Anglo-American animated films, and analyses how these linguistic characterisations are transposed into Italian. Drawing on a corpus of 30 films produced by Disney, Pixar, Dreamworks, 20th Century Fox and Sony, the book examines linguistic norms, conventions and stereotypes and highlights issues of creativity in translation. It is the first book in English entirely devoted to the translation of animated feature films, and it will be of interest to students and scholars of translation, linguistic variation, film and media.

Vincenza Minutella is a researcher and Aggregate Professor in the Department of Foreign Languages ​​and Literatures and Modern Cultures at the University of Turin, Italy.		This book describes the dubbing process of English-language animated films produced by US companies in the 21st century, exploring how linguistic variation and multilingualism are used to create characters and identities and examining how Italian dubbing professionals deal with this linguistic characterisation. The analysis carried out relies on a diverse range of research tools: text analysis, corpus study and personal communications with dubbing practitioners. The book describes the dubbing workflow and dubbing strategies in Italy and seeks to identify recurrent patterns and therefore norms, as well as stereotypes or creativity in the way multilingualism and linguistic variation are tackled. It will be of interest to students and scholars of translation, linguistic variation, film and media.<p>Takes into account the entire process of translation/adaptation and dubbing when transposing from one culture and language into another</p><p>Investigates what leads dubbing professionals to their final choices by focusing on the constraints imposed by the receiving culture</p><p>Combines a linguistic analysis with descriptions and understanding of wider socio-cultural and professional contexts</p><p>Combines corpus study, text analysis and personal communications with dubbing practitioners</p>Vincenza Minutella is a Research Fellow and Lecturer of English Language and Translation in the Department of Foreign Languages​ and Literatures and Modern Cultures at the University of Torino, Italy.
SciencePalgrave Standard US (P5)Palgrave Monograph (P6)EBOP41176Social Sciences009783030566401Applied LinguisticsLiteratureAnimationRomance Languages564000
85
Social Sciences978-3-030-56637-1MinutellaVincenza MinutellaVincenza Minutella, University of Turin, Turin, Italy(Re)Creating Language Identities in Animated FilmsDubbing Linguistic VariationXXII, 408 p. 4 illus.12021final119.9936.00128.3938.52109.9933.00129.9939.00Hard cover0Palgrave Studies in Translating and InterpretingSocial SciencesMonographBook408CBDPalgrave MacmillanSpringer International Publishing0Available2020-11-032020-11-032020-12-082020-12-081Chapter 1: Dubbing Animated Films: A Complex Collaborative Process.- Chapter 2: Translating Language Varieties and Multilingualism in Audiovisual Texts: Research and Conversations with Dubbing Practitioners.- Chapter 3: Linguistic Variation in Animated Films from 2001 to 2017.- Chapter 4: Americans, Brits, Aussies & Co.: Native Varieties of English in Italian Dubbing.- Chapter 5: Languages Other than English/Foreign Languages in Italian Dubbing: Preservation, Neutralisation, Reduction or Adaptation?.- Chapter 6: Non-native Varieties of English in Italian Dubbing: Does 'Foreign-accented English' Become 'Foreign-accented Italian'?.- Chapter 7: (Re)positioning Italianness in Animated Films: No Accent, Foreign Accent, Regional Italian, Dialect?.- Chapter 8: Conclusion.This book investigates how language identities are created and represented in animated films, and how they are tackled by dubbing professionals in Italy. The author describes how language variation and varieties contribute to building the language identities of characters in several popular Anglo-American animated films, and analyses how these linguistic characterisations are transposed into Italian. Drawing on a corpus of 30 films produced by Disney, Pixar, Dreamworks, 20th Century Fox and Sony, the book examines linguistic norms, conventions and stereotypes and highlights issues of creativity in translation. It is the first book in English entirely devoted to the translation of animated feature films, and it will be of interest to students and scholars of translation, linguistic variation, film and media.

Vincenza Minutella is a researcher and Aggregate Professor in the Department of Foreign Languages ​​and Literatures and Modern Cultures at the University of Turin, Italy.		This book describes the dubbing process of English-language animated films produced by US companies in the 21st century, exploring how linguistic variation and multilingualism are used to create characters and identities and examining how Italian dubbing professionals deal with this linguistic characterisation. The analysis carried out relies on a diverse range of research tools: text analysis, corpus study and personal communications with dubbing practitioners. The book describes the dubbing workflow and dubbing strategies in Italy and seeks to identify recurrent patterns and therefore norms, as well as stereotypes or creativity in the way multilingualism and linguistic variation are tackled. It will be of interest to students and scholars of translation, linguistic variation, film and media.<p>Takes into account the entire process of translation/adaptation and dubbing when transposing from one culture and language into another</p><p>Investigates what leads dubbing professionals to their final choices by focusing on the constraints imposed by the receiving culture</p><p>Combines a linguistic analysis with descriptions and understanding of wider socio-cultural and professional contexts</p><p>Combines corpus study, text analysis and personal communications with dubbing practitioners</p>Vincenza Minutella is a Research Fellow and Lecturer of English Language and Translation in the Department of Foreign Languages​ and Literatures and Modern Cultures at the University of Torino, Italy.
SciencePalgrave Standard US (P5)Palgrave Monograph (P6)EBOP41176Social Sciences009783030566371Applied LinguisticsLiteratureAnimationRomance Languages688000
86
Social Sciences978-3-030-92105-7MonnierAngeliki Monnier; Axel Boursier; Annabelle SeoaneAngeliki Monnier, Université de Lorraine, Metz, France; Axel Boursier, CY Cergy Paris Université, Cergy-Pontoise, France; Annabelle Seoane, Université de Lorraine, Metz, FranceCyberhate in the Context of MigrationsXI, 232 p. 58 illus., 11 illus. in color.12022final129.9939.00139.0941.73109.9933.00139.9942.00Soft cover1Postdisciplinary Studies in DiscourseSocial SciencesContributed volumeBook232CBCFPalgrave MacmillanSpringer International Publishing0Available2023-02-122022-02-112023-02-122023-02-121Chapter 1: Anti-migrant hate speech as a symptom of a representation crisis (Angeliki Monnier, Axel Boursier and Annabelle Seoane).- Part I: Language strategies and patterns.- Chapter 2: Online hate speech in the UK and Poland: social media reactions to the murder of Arkadiusz Jóźwik (Katerina Strani and Anna Szczepaniak-Kozak).- Chapter 3: The anti-immigration ideology: hate speech, ethos and the enemy’s figure (Nolwenn Lorenzi Bailly and Lotta Lehti).- Chapter 4: 'Reality', 'truth' and 'lies' regarding the immigration phenomenon in comment sections on French media (Nadia Makouar).- Chapter 5: The computer-mediated expression of hate: a corpus analysis of French and Italian user-generated contents (Laura Ascone).- Part II: Actors and interactions.- Chapter 6: The joint construction of hate speech in online discussions (Emmi Lahti).- Chapter 7: Social network conversations with young authors of online hate speech against migrants (Stefano Pasta).- Chapter 8: Hate speech, freedom of expression and the controversies on the regulation of online content (Romain Bedouard).- Chapter 9: How does online hate speech influence the process of intercultural mediation in the context of migration? (Cecilia Brassier-Rodrigues).This edited book takes an interdisciplinary approach to shed light on the complex dynamics involved in the incidence of online hate speech against migrants in user-generated contexts. The authors draw on case studies from Finland, France, Germany, Italy, Poland and the UK, bringing together qualitative and quantitative analyses on user-generated online comments. The authors argue that online hate speech against migrants must be understood as a symptom of a representation crisis on migration, which can only be fully perceived through the study of the complex linguistic, interactional and connective processes within which it emerges. They focus on representations and shared meanings, community building and otherness, and delve into the role of network ecosystems in the process of the construction of public problems. This book will be of interest to undergraduate and post-graduate students as well as academics working on hate speech and migration studies in a variety of fields, and can also contribute to improving research protocols for automated analyses and detections of online hate speech.



Angeliki Monnier is Professor in Information and Communication Sciences at Université de Lorraine, Metz, France, and director of the Centre for Research on Mediations (CREM). Axel Boursier is Associate Professor in Information and Communication Sciences at CY Cergy Paris Université, France, and a member of the “Lexicons, Texts, Discourses and Dictionaries” (LT2D) laboratory. Annabelle Seoane is Associate Professor in Linguistics and Language Teaching at Université de Lorraine, Metz, France, and a member of the Centre for Research on Mediations (CREM).		This edited book takes an interdisciplinary approach to shed light on the complex dynamics involved in the incidence of online hate speech against migrants in user-generated contexts. The authors draw on case studies from Finland, France, Germany, Italy, Poland and the UK, bringing together qualitative and quantitative analyses on user-generated online comments. The authors argue that online hate speech against migrants must be understood as a symptom of a representation crisis on migration, which can only be fully perceived through the study of the complex linguistic, interactional and connective processes within which it emerges. They focus on representations and shared meanings, community building and otherness, and delve into the role of network ecosystems in the process of the construction of public problems. This book will be of interest to undergraduate and post-graduate students as well as academics working on hate speech and migration studies in a variety of fields, and can also contribute to improving research protocols for automated analyses and detections of online hate speech.
<p>Brings together established research scholars from different contexts across Europe.</p><p>Applies both quantitative and qualitative analyses to the discourse of online hate speech.</p><p>Argues for a reconceptualisation of anti-migrant sentiment as symptomatic of a wider representation crisis</p>Angeliki Monnier is Professor in Information and Communication Sciences at Université de Lorraine, Metz, France, and director of the Centre for Research on Mediations (CREM). Axel Boursier is Associate Professor in Information and Communication Sciences at CY Cergy Paris Université, France, and a member of the “Lexicons, Texts, Discourses and Dictionaries” (LT2D) laboratory. Annabelle Seoane is Associate Professor in Linguistics and Language Teaching at Université de Lorraine, Metz, France, and a member of the Centre for Research on Mediations (CREM).SciencePalgrave Standard US (P5)Palgrave Standard (P5)EBOP41176Social Sciences009783030921057Applied LinguisticsResearch Methods in Language and LinguisticsPolitical CommunicationSociology of MigrationDigital JournalismCybercrime323000
87
Social Sciences978-3-030-92102-6MonnierAngeliki Monnier; Axel Boursier; Annabelle SeoaneAngeliki Monnier, Université de Lorraine, Metz, France; Axel Boursier, CY Cergy Paris Université, Cergy-Pontoise, France; Annabelle Seoane, Université de Lorraine, Metz, FranceCyberhate in the Context of MigrationsXI, 232 p. 58 illus., 11 illus. in color.12022final129.9939.00139.0941.73109.9933.00139.9942.00Hard cover0Postdisciplinary Studies in DiscourseSocial SciencesContributed volumeBook232CBCFPalgrave MacmillanSpringer International Publishing0Available2022-02-122022-02-112022-05-242022-05-241Chapter 1: Anti-migrant hate speech as a symptom of a representation crisis (Angeliki Monnier, Axel Boursier and Annabelle Seoane).- Part I: Language strategies and patterns.- Chapter 2: Online hate speech in the UK and Poland: social media reactions to the murder of Arkadiusz Jóźwik (Katerina Strani and Anna Szczepaniak-Kozak).- Chapter 3: The anti-immigration ideology: hate speech, ethos and the enemy’s figure (Nolwenn Lorenzi Bailly and Lotta Lehti).- Chapter 4: 'Reality', 'truth' and 'lies' regarding the immigration phenomenon in comment sections on French media (Nadia Makouar).- Chapter 5: The computer-mediated expression of hate: a corpus analysis of French and Italian user-generated contents (Laura Ascone).- Part II: Actors and interactions.- Chapter 6: The joint construction of hate speech in online discussions (Emmi Lahti).- Chapter 7: Social network conversations with young authors of online hate speech against migrants (Stefano Pasta).- Chapter 8: Hate speech, freedom of expression and the controversies on the regulation of online content (Romain Bedouard).- Chapter 9: How does online hate speech influence the process of intercultural mediation in the context of migration? (Cecilia Brassier-Rodrigues).This edited book takes an interdisciplinary approach to shed light on the complex dynamics involved in the incidence of online hate speech against migrants in user-generated contexts. The authors draw on case studies from Finland, France, Germany, Italy, Poland and the UK, bringing together qualitative and quantitative analyses on user-generated online comments. The authors argue that online hate speech against migrants must be understood as a symptom of a representation crisis on migration, which can only be fully perceived through the study of the complex linguistic, interactional and connective processes within which it emerges. They focus on representations and shared meanings, community building and otherness, and delve into the role of network ecosystems in the process of the construction of public problems. This book will be of interest to undergraduate and post-graduate students as well as academics working on hate speech and migration studies in a variety of fields, and can also contribute to improving research protocols for automated analyses and detections of online hate speech.



Angeliki Monnier is Professor in Information and Communication Sciences at Université de Lorraine, Metz, France, and director of the Centre for Research on Mediations (CREM). Axel Boursier is Associate Professor in Information and Communication Sciences at CY Cergy Paris Université, France, and a member of the “Lexicons, Texts, Discourses and Dictionaries” (LT2D) laboratory. Annabelle Seoane is Associate Professor in Linguistics and Language Teaching at Université de Lorraine, Metz, France, and a member of the Centre for Research on Mediations (CREM).		This edited book takes an interdisciplinary approach to shed light on the complex dynamics involved in the incidence of online hate speech against migrants in user-generated contexts. The authors draw on case studies from Finland, France, Germany, Italy, Poland and the UK, bringing together qualitative and quantitative analyses on user-generated online comments. The authors argue that online hate speech against migrants must be understood as a symptom of a representation crisis on migration, which can only be fully perceived through the study of the complex linguistic, interactional and connective processes within which it emerges. They focus on representations and shared meanings, community building and otherness, and delve into the role of network ecosystems in the process of the construction of public problems. This book will be of interest to undergraduate and post-graduate students as well as academics working on hate speech and migration studies in a variety of fields, and can also contribute to improving research protocols for automated analyses and detections of online hate speech.
<p>Brings together established research scholars from different contexts across Europe.</p><p>Applies both quantitative and qualitative analyses to the discourse of online hate speech.</p><p>Argues for a reconceptualisation of anti-migrant sentiment as symptomatic of a wider representation crisis</p>Angeliki Monnier is Professor in Information and Communication Sciences at Université de Lorraine, Metz, France, and director of the Centre for Research on Mediations (CREM). Axel Boursier is Associate Professor in Information and Communication Sciences at CY Cergy Paris Université, France, and a member of the “Lexicons, Texts, Discourses and Dictionaries” (LT2D) laboratory. Annabelle Seoane is Associate Professor in Linguistics and Language Teaching at Université de Lorraine, Metz, France, and a member of the Centre for Research on Mediations (CREM).SciencePalgrave Standard US (P5)Palgrave Standard (P5)EBOP41176Social Sciences009783030921026Applied LinguisticsResearch Methods in Language and LinguisticsPolitical CommunicationSociology of MigrationDigital JournalismCybercrime447000
88
Social Sciencesx978-3-030-81766-4MustoMarcello MustoMarcello Musto, York University, Toronto, ON, CanadaRethinking Alternatives with MarxEconomy, Ecology and MigrationXXXIII, 354 p. 4 illus.12021final69.9921.0074.8922.4759.9918.0079.9924.00Soft cover1Marx, Engels, and MarxismsSocial SciencesContributed volumeBook354HPSJHBPalgrave MacmillanSpringer International Publishing0Available2022-10-302021-10-302022-10-302022-10-3011. The Factory and the Family as Spaces of Capital (Himani Bannerji).- 2. Marx on Gender, Race, and Social Reproduction: A Feminist Perspective (Silvia Federici).- 3. Capital as a Social Relation: Form Analysis and Class Struggle (Bob Jessop).- 4. Commodity and the Postmodern Spectacle (Alfonso Maurizio Iacono).- 5. Primitive Accumulation as the Cause of Economic and Ecological Disaster (Kohei Saito).- 6. Marx and Environmental Catastrophe (Gregory Claeys).- 7. Finding a Way Out of the Anthropocene: The Theory of ‘Radical Needs’ and the Ecological Transition (Razmig Keucheyan).- 8. Accumulation and Its Discontents: Migration and Nativism in Marx’s Capital and Late Manuscripts (David Norman Smith).- 9. Marx on Migration and Industrial Reserve Army: Not to Be Misused! (Pietro Basso).- 10. Globalisation, Migrant Labour, and Capitalism: Past and Present (Ranabir Samaddar).- 11. The Experience of the Paris Commune and Marx’s Reflections on Communism (Marcello Musto).- 12. Communism as Probability and Contingency (Álvaro García Linera).- 13. Uniting Communism and Liberalism: An Unsolvable Task or a Most Urgent Necessity? (Michael Brie).
This book presents a Marx that is in many ways different from the one popularized by the dominant currents of twentieth-century Marxism. The dual aim of this edited volume is to contribute to a new critical discussion of some of the classical themes of Marx’s thought and to develop a deeper analysis of certain questions to which relatively little attention has been paid until recently. Contributions of globally renowned scholars, from nine countries and multiple academic disciplines, offer diverse and innovative perspectives on Marx’s points of view about ecology, migration, gender, the capitalist mode of production, the labour movement, globalization, social relations, and the contours of a possible socialist alternative. The result is a collection that will prove indispensable for all specialists in the field and which suggests that Marx’s analyses are arguably resonating even more strongly today than they did in his own time.
Marcello Musto is Professor of Sociology at York University, Toronto, Canada. He is author of Another Marx: Early Manuscripts to the International (2018), and The Last Years of Karl Marx: An Intellectual Biography (2020). Among his edited books there are The Marx Revival: Key Concepts and New Interpretations (2020), and Karl Marx’s Writings on Alienation (2021). His writings – available at www.marcellomusto.org – have been published worldwide in more than twenty languages.
This book presents a Marx that is in many ways different from the one popularized by the dominant currents of twentieth-century Marxism. The dual aim of this edited volume is to contribute to a new critical discussion of some of the classical themes of Marx’s thought and to develop a deeper analysis of certain questions to which relatively little attention has been paid until recently.Contributions of globally renowned scholars, from nine countries and multiple academic disciplines, offer diverse and innovative perspectives on Marx’s points of view about ecology, migration, gender, the capitalist mode of production, the labour movement, globalization, social relations, and the contours of a possible socialist alternative.

The result is a collection that will prove indispensable for all specialists in the field and which suggests that Marx’s analyses are arguably resonating even more strongly today than they did in his own time.
<p>Collects an international array of authors from multiple disciplines to offer new perspectives on key topics</p><p>Includes the most updated philological discoveries on Marx, presenting his thought in a new light</p><p>A novel reinterpretation and reconsideration of Marx after and beyond twentieth-century Marxism</p>Marcello Musto is Professor of Sociology at York University, Toronto, Canada. He is author of Another Marx: Early Manuscripts to the International (2018), and The Last Years of Karl Marx: An Intellectual Biography (2020). Among his edited books there are The Marx Revival: Key Concepts and New Interpretations (2020), and Karl Marx’s Writings on Alienation (2021). His writings – available at www.marcellomusto.org – have been published worldwide in more than twenty languages.
SciencePalgrave Standard US (P5)Palgrave Standard (P5)EBOP41176Social Sciences009783030817664Marxist SociologyPolitical SociologySociology of WorkSocial Theory511000
89
Social Sciencesx978-3-030-81763-3MustoMarcello MustoMarcello Musto, York University, Toronto, ON, CanadaRethinking Alternatives with MarxEconomy, Ecology and MigrationXXXIII, 354 p. 4 illus.12021final69.9921.0074.8922.4759.9918.0079.9924.00Hard cover0Marx, Engels, and MarxismsSocial SciencesContributed volumeBook354HPSJHBPalgrave MacmillanSpringer International Publishing0Available2021-10-302021-10-302021-11-172021-11-1711. The Factory and the Family as Spaces of Capital (Himani Bannerji).- 2. Marx on Gender, Race, and Social Reproduction: A Feminist Perspective (Silvia Federici).- 3. Capital as a Social Relation: Form Analysis and Class Struggle (Bob Jessop).- 4. Commodity and the Postmodern Spectacle (Alfonso Maurizio Iacono).- 5. Primitive Accumulation as the Cause of Economic and Ecological Disaster (Kohei Saito).- 6. Marx and Environmental Catastrophe (Gregory Claeys).- 7. Finding a Way Out of the Anthropocene: The Theory of ‘Radical Needs’ and the Ecological Transition (Razmig Keucheyan).- 8. Accumulation and Its Discontents: Migration and Nativism in Marx’s Capital and Late Manuscripts (David Norman Smith).- 9. Marx on Migration and Industrial Reserve Army: Not to Be Misused! (Pietro Basso).- 10. Globalisation, Migrant Labour, and Capitalism: Past and Present (Ranabir Samaddar).- 11. The Experience of the Paris Commune and Marx’s Reflections on Communism (Marcello Musto).- 12. Communism as Probability and Contingency (Álvaro García Linera).- 13. Uniting Communism and Liberalism: An Unsolvable Task or a Most Urgent Necessity? (Michael Brie).
This book presents a Marx that is in many ways different from the one popularized by the dominant currents of twentieth-century Marxism. The dual aim of this edited volume is to contribute to a new critical discussion of some of the classical themes of Marx’s thought and to develop a deeper analysis of certain questions to which relatively little attention has been paid until recently. Contributions of globally renowned scholars, from nine countries and multiple academic disciplines, offer diverse and innovative perspectives on Marx’s points of view about ecology, migration, gender, the capitalist mode of production, the labour movement, globalization, social relations, and the contours of a possible socialist alternative. The result is a collection that will prove indispensable for all specialists in the field and which suggests that Marx’s analyses are arguably resonating even more strongly today than they did in his own time.
Marcello Musto is Professor of Sociology at York University, Toronto, Canada. He is author of Another Marx: Early Manuscripts to the International (2018), and The Last Years of Karl Marx: An Intellectual Biography (2020). Among his edited books there are The Marx Revival: Key Concepts and New Interpretations (2020), and Karl Marx’s Writings on Alienation (2021). His writings – available at www.marcellomusto.org – have been published worldwide in more than twenty languages.
This book presents a Marx that is in many ways different from the one popularized by the dominant currents of twentieth-century Marxism. The dual aim of this edited volume is to contribute to a new critical discussion of some of the classical themes of Marx’s thought and to develop a deeper analysis of certain questions to which relatively little attention has been paid until recently.Contributions of globally renowned scholars, from nine countries and multiple academic disciplines, offer diverse and innovative perspectives on Marx’s points of view about ecology, migration, gender, the capitalist mode of production, the labour movement, globalization, social relations, and the contours of a possible socialist alternative.

The result is a collection that will prove indispensable for all specialists in the field and which suggests that Marx’s analyses are arguably resonating even more strongly today than they did in his own time.
<p>Collects an international array of authors from multiple disciplines to offer new perspectives on key topics</p><p>Includes the most updated philological discoveries on Marx, presenting his thought in a new light</p><p>A novel reinterpretation and reconsideration of Marx after and beyond twentieth-century Marxism</p>Marcello Musto is Professor of Sociology at York University, Toronto, Canada. He is author of Another Marx: Early Manuscripts to the International (2018), and The Last Years of Karl Marx: An Intellectual Biography (2020). Among his edited books there are The Marx Revival: Key Concepts and New Interpretations (2020), and Karl Marx’s Writings on Alienation (2021). His writings – available at www.marcellomusto.org – have been published worldwide in more than twenty languages.
SciencePalgrave Standard US (P5)Palgrave Standard (P5)EBOP41176Social Sciences009783030817633Marxist SociologyPolitical SociologySociology of WorkSocial Theory663000
90
Social Sciences978-3-319-89583-3OlsenNiklas OlsenNiklas Olsen, University of Copenhagen, Copenhagen, DenmarkThe Sovereign ConsumerA New Intellectual History of NeoliberalismX, 308 p.12019final89.9927.0096.2928.8979.9924.0099.9930.00Hard cover0Consumption and Public LifeSocial SciencesMonographBook308JHBLJHBPalgrave MacmillanSpringer International Publishing0Available2018-09-102018-08-252018-09-122018-09-1211. Introduction.- 2. The Birth of the Neoliberal Sovereign Consumer.- 3. Liberating the Consumer: Ludwig Erhard and the Making of the Federal Republic.- 4. From Choice to Welfare: The Concept of the Consumer in the Chicago School of Economics.- 5. The Emergence of the Sovereign Consumer in Post-war Economics. - 6. Sovereign Consumers Enter the Scandinavian Welfare State: The Case of Denmark. - 7. Neoliberalism without Neoliberals.- 8. Epilogue. Olsen takes the contemporary analysis of neoliberalism in an exciting and productive new direction by providing a genealogy of the script and a study of this neoliberal persona. It is a thrilling achievement. —Samuel Moyn, Professor of Law and History, Yale University, USA This work provides us with a great example of the perplexing ways the original work of neoliberal intellectuals came to matter many years after their original conception.Olsen reconnects intellectual origins and subsequent manifestations of neoliberal consumerism. He does a terrific job where others fail in neoliberalism studies: clarifying both the common thread at the ideational level and the wider influences and variety of real world experiences. --- Dieter Plehwe, Research Fellow of the President’s Project Group, Berlin Social Science Center, GermanyThis book presents a new intellectual history of neoliberalism through the exploration of the sovereign consumer. Invented by neoliberal thinkers in the interwar period, this figure has been crucial to the construction and legimitization of neoliberal ideology and politics.Analysis of the sovereign consumer across time and space demonstrates how neoliberals have linked the figure both to the idea of democracy as a method of choice, and also to a re-invention of the market as the democratic forum par excellence. Moreover, Olsen contemplates how the sovereign consumer has served to marketize politics and functioned as a major driver in a wide-ranging transformation in political thinking, subjecting traditional political values to the narrow pursuit of economic growth.A politically timely project, The Sovereign Consumer will have a wide appeal in academic circles, especially for those interested in consumer and welfare studies, and in political, economic and cultural thought in the twentieth century.This book presents a new intellectual history of neoliberalism through the exploration of the sovereign consumer. Invented by neoliberal thinkers in the interwar period, this figure has been crucial to the construction and legimitization of neoliberal ideology and politics.Analysis of the sovereign consumer across time and space demonstrates how neoliberals have linked the figure both to the idea of democracy as a method of choice, and also to a re-invention of the market as the democratic forum par excellence. Moreover, Olsen contemplates how the sovereign consumer has served to marketize politics and functioned as a major driver in a wide-ranging transformation in political thinking, subjecting traditional political values to the narrow pursuit of economic growth. A politically timely project, The Sovereign Consumer will have a wide appeal in academic circles, especially for those interested in consumer and welfare studies, and in political, economic and cultural thought in the twentieth century.

<p>Includes nation-specific, comparative and transnational perspectives</p><p>Offers the first comprehensive and systematic analysis of the making and role of the sovereign consumer in modern and contemporary political economy</p><p>Illuminates a region (Scandinavia), a period (post 1970) and a theme (neoliberalism’s entrance into the public sector) that has never been explored in depth in the field before</p>Niklas Olsen is Associate Professor at the SAXO-Institute, and Chair of Centre of Modern European Studies, at the University of Copenhagen, Denmark.SciencePalgrave Standard US (P5)Palgrave Monograph (P6)EBOP41176Social Sciences009783319895833Economic SociologyPolitical SociologySocial PolicyInternational Political Economy’544000
91
Social Sciences978-3-030-07808-9OlsenNiklas OlsenNiklas Olsen, University of Copenhagen, Copenhagen, DenmarkThe Sovereign ConsumerA New Intellectual History of NeoliberalismX, 308 p.12019final89.9927.0096.2928.8979.9924.0099.9930.00Soft cover1Consumption and Public LifeSocial SciencesMonographBook (Paperback Initiative)308JHBLJHBPalgrave MacmillanSpringer International Publishing0Available2019-02-012019-01-312019-09-102019-10-0811. Introduction.- 2. The Birth of the Neoliberal Sovereign Consumer.- 3. Liberating the Consumer: Ludwig Erhard and the Making of the Federal Republic.- 4. From Choice to Welfare: The Concept of the Consumer in the Chicago School of Economics.- 5. The Emergence of the Sovereign Consumer in Post-war Economics. - 6. Sovereign Consumers Enter the Scandinavian Welfare State: The Case of Denmark. - 7. Neoliberalism without Neoliberals.- 8. Epilogue. Olsen takes the contemporary analysis of neoliberalism in an exciting and productive new direction by providing a genealogy of the script and a study of this neoliberal persona. It is a thrilling achievement. —Samuel Moyn, Professor of Law and History, Yale University, USA This work provides us with a great example of the perplexing ways the original work of neoliberal intellectuals came to matter many years after their original conception.Olsen reconnects intellectual origins and subsequent manifestations of neoliberal consumerism. He does a terrific job where others fail in neoliberalism studies: clarifying both the common thread at the ideational level and the wider influences and variety of real world experiences. --- Dieter Plehwe, Research Fellow of the President’s Project Group, Berlin Social Science Center, GermanyThis book presents a new intellectual history of neoliberalism through the exploration of the sovereign consumer. Invented by neoliberal thinkers in the interwar period, this figure has been crucial to the construction and legimitization of neoliberal ideology and politics.Analysis of the sovereign consumer across time and space demonstrates how neoliberals have linked the figure both to the idea of democracy as a method of choice, and also to a re-invention of the market as the democratic forum par excellence. Moreover, Olsen contemplates how the sovereign consumer has served to marketize politics and functioned as a major driver in a wide-ranging transformation in political thinking, subjecting traditional political values to the narrow pursuit of economic growth.A politically timely project, The Sovereign Consumer will have a wide appeal in academic circles, especially for those interested in consumer and welfare studies, and in political, economic and cultural thought in the twentieth century.This book presents a new intellectual history of neoliberalism through the exploration of the sovereign consumer. Invented by neoliberal thinkers in the interwar period, this figure has been crucial to the construction and legimitization of neoliberal ideology and politics.Analysis of the sovereign consumer across time and space demonstrates how neoliberals have linked the figure both to the idea of democracy as a method of choice, and also to a re-invention of the market as the democratic forum par excellence. Moreover, Olsen contemplates how the sovereign consumer has served to marketize politics and functioned as a major driver in a wide-ranging transformation in political thinking, subjecting traditional political values to the narrow pursuit of economic growth. A politically timely project, The Sovereign Consumer will have a wide appeal in academic circles, especially for those interested in consumer and welfare studies, and in political, economic and cultural thought in the twentieth century.

<p>Includes nation-specific, comparative and transnational perspectives</p><p>Offers the first comprehensive and systematic analysis of the making and role of the sovereign consumer in modern and contemporary political economy</p><p>Illuminates a region (Scandinavia), a period (post 1970) and a theme (neoliberalism’s entrance into the public sector) that has never been explored in depth in the field before</p>Niklas Olsen is Associate Professor at the SAXO-Institute, and Chair of Centre of Modern European Studies, at the University of Copenhagen, Denmark.SciencePalgrave Standard US (P5)Palgrave Monograph (P6)EBOP41176Social Sciences009783030078089Economic SociologyPolitical SociologySocial PolicyInternational Political Economy’454000
92
Social Sciences978-3-030-12813-5PanlilioCarlomagno C. PanlilioCarlomagno C. Panlilio, Pennsylvania State University, University Park, PA, USATrauma-Informed SchoolsIntegrating Child Maltreatment Prevention, Detection, and InterventionXXI, 127 p. 8 illus., 6 illus. in color.12019final59.9918.0064.1919.2654.9916.5064.9919.50Soft cover1Child Maltreatment Solutions NetworkSocial SciencesContributed volumeBook127JKSB1JMCSpringerSpringer International Publishing0Available2020-08-142019-03-292020-04-102020-04-101<div>Safe Touches: Creating a School Community to Prevent Child Sexual Abuse.- The Fourth R: Teaching Healthy Relationship Skills to Reduce Youth Risk Behaviors.- The Influence of Trauma Exposure on Children's Outcomes.- Trauma, Self-Regulation, and Learning.- Maltreatment as a Wicked Problem: Implications for Educational Settings.- Responding to Childhood Trauma at the Macro and Microsystem Levels: The Necessity for Trauma Sensitive Pedagogy.- Conclusions and Discussion.</div>This book provides an interdisciplinary framework for school intervention into child and adolescent maltreatment, highlighting the unique potential for schools to identify and mitigate the long-term impacts of childhood trauma on children’s educational well-being. Contributors evaluate recent efforts to incorporate trauma-informed approaches into schools, including strategic planning by administrators, staff training, prevention programming, liaising with local youth service agencies, and trauma-sensitive intervention with affected students.<div>
</div><div>Among the topics discussed:</div><div>• The developmental impact of trauma</div><div>• The role of schools and teachers in supporting student mental health</div><div>• Prevention programming to prevent child and adolescent sexual abuse</div><div>• Education policies to support students with traumatic histories</div><div>• Responding to childhood trauma at both macro and microsystem levels</div><div>
</div><div>Trauma-Informed Schools: Integrating Child Maltreatment Prevention, Detection, and Intervention is a valuable resource for child maltreatment researchers, educational and school psychologists, school social workers, students in early childhood and K-12 education, and education policy makers at all levels of government. It offers the necessary guidelines and insights to facilitate better learning for students who have experienced trauma, aiming to improve student well-being both inside and outside the classroom. </div>		<div>This book provides an interdisciplinary framework for school intervention into child and adolescent maltreatment, highlighting the unique potential for schools to identify and mitigate the long-term impacts of childhood trauma on children’s educational well-being. Contributors evaluate recent efforts to incorporate trauma-informed approaches into schools, including strategic planning by administrators, staff training, prevention programming, liaising with local youth service agencies, and trauma-sensitive intervention with affected students.</div><div>
</div><div>Among the topics discussed:</div><div>• The developmental impact of trauma</div><div>• The role of schools and teachers in supporting student mental health</div><div>• Prevention programming to prevent child and adolescent sexual abuse</div><div>• Education policies to support students with traumatic histories</div><div>• Responding to childhood trauma at both macro and microsystem levels</div><div>
</div><div>Trauma-Informed Schools: Integrating Child Maltreatment Prevention, Detection, and Intervention is a valuable resource for child maltreatment researchers, educational and school psychologists, school social workers, students in early childhood and K-12 education, and education policy makers at all levels of government. It offers the necessary guidelines and insights to facilitate better learning for students who have experienced trauma, aiming to improve student well-being both inside and outside the classroom. </div>		<p>Evaluates the long term effects of child maltreatment and trauma on academic achievement</p><p>Promotes understanding of the role of schools in prevention and intervention efforts</p><p>Identifies important issues and novel solutions in the field of child maltreatment that are not covered by professional societies, foundations, or government agencies</p>Carlomagno C. Panlilio, Ph.D. is an Assistant Professor in the Department of Educational Psychology, Counseling, and Special Education and a faculty member with the Child Maltreatment Solutions Network at the Pennsylvania State University. The overarching goal of Dr. Panlilio’s program of research is to understand the dynamic interplay between maltreatment, context, and development, and how these processes influence individual differences in learning. His research is guided by an interdisciplinary approach that draws from Developmental Science, Educational Psychology, Statistics, and Social Welfare to examine the multisystemic influences on early adversity and children’s learning. More specifically, he is interested in further explicating self-regulation and self-regulated learning as key developmental and learning processes that explain variability in the academic outcomes of children with a history of maltreatment. Prior to his faculty appointment, Dr. Panlilio practiced as a licensed clinical marriage and family therapist. He has worked in private practice, community agencies, treatment foster care, and a residential treatment facility for adolescents. He has been in clinical practice since 2005 and often worked with at-risk children and families. He previously served as the Vice Chair for the Maryland Board of Professional Counselors and Therapists, and also served as the Chair for the Ethics Committee. Dr. Panlilio earned his B.A. in Psychology from the California State University at Long Beach and an M.S. in Family Studies with a concentration in Couple and Family Therapy from the University of Maryland College Park. Dr. Panlilio earned his Ph.D. in Developmental Science and a certificate in Education, Measurement, and Statistics from the University of Maryland College Park.
ScienceProfessional Books (2)Science (SC)EBOP41176Social Sciences009783030128135Childhood EducationSchool PsychologyEarly Childhood EducationSocial Work454000
93
Social Sciences978-3-030-12810-4PanlilioCarlomagno C. PanlilioCarlomagno C. Panlilio, Pennsylvania State University, University Park, PA, USATrauma-Informed SchoolsIntegrating Child Maltreatment Prevention, Detection, and InterventionXXI, 127 p. 8 illus., 6 illus. in color.12019final99.9930.00106.9932.1089.9927.00109.9933.00Hard cover0Child Maltreatment Solutions NetworkSocial SciencesContributed volumeBook127JKSB1JMCSpringerSpringer International Publishing0Available2019-04-102019-03-292019-05-202019-05-201<div>Safe Touches: Creating a School Community to Prevent Child Sexual Abuse.- The Fourth R: Teaching Healthy Relationship Skills to Reduce Youth Risk Behaviors.- The Influence of Trauma Exposure on Children's Outcomes.- Trauma, Self-Regulation, and Learning.- Maltreatment as a Wicked Problem: Implications for Educational Settings.- Responding to Childhood Trauma at the Macro and Microsystem Levels: The Necessity for Trauma Sensitive Pedagogy.- Conclusions and Discussion.</div>This book provides an interdisciplinary framework for school intervention into child and adolescent maltreatment, highlighting the unique potential for schools to identify and mitigate the long-term impacts of childhood trauma on children’s educational well-being. Contributors evaluate recent efforts to incorporate trauma-informed approaches into schools, including strategic planning by administrators, staff training, prevention programming, liaising with local youth service agencies, and trauma-sensitive intervention with affected students.<div>
</div><div>Among the topics discussed:</div><div>• The developmental impact of trauma</div><div>• The role of schools and teachers in supporting student mental health</div><div>• Prevention programming to prevent child and adolescent sexual abuse</div><div>• Education policies to support students with traumatic histories</div><div>• Responding to childhood trauma at both macro and microsystem levels</div><div>
</div><div>Trauma-Informed Schools: Integrating Child Maltreatment Prevention, Detection, and Intervention is a valuable resource for child maltreatment researchers, educational and school psychologists, school social workers, students in early childhood and K-12 education, and education policy makers at all levels of government. It offers the necessary guidelines and insights to facilitate better learning for students who have experienced trauma, aiming to improve student well-being both inside and outside the classroom. </div>		<div>This book provides an interdisciplinary framework for school intervention into child and adolescent maltreatment, highlighting the unique potential for schools to identify and mitigate the long-term impacts of childhood trauma on children’s educational well-being. Contributors evaluate recent efforts to incorporate trauma-informed approaches into schools, including strategic planning by administrators, staff training, prevention programming, liaising with local youth service agencies, and trauma-sensitive intervention with affected students.</div><div>
</div><div>Among the topics discussed:</div><div>• The developmental impact of trauma</div><div>• The role of schools and teachers in supporting student mental health</div><div>• Prevention programming to prevent child and adolescent sexual abuse</div><div>• Education policies to support students with traumatic histories</div><div>• Responding to childhood trauma at both macro and microsystem levels</div><div>
</div><div>Trauma-Informed Schools: Integrating Child Maltreatment Prevention, Detection, and Intervention is a valuable resource for child maltreatment researchers, educational and school psychologists, school social workers, students in early childhood and K-12 education, and education policy makers at all levels of government. It offers the necessary guidelines and insights to facilitate better learning for students who have experienced trauma, aiming to improve student well-being both inside and outside the classroom. </div>		<p>Evaluates the long term effects of child maltreatment and trauma on academic achievement</p><p>Promotes understanding of the role of schools in prevention and intervention efforts</p><p>Identifies important issues and novel solutions in the field of child maltreatment that are not covered by professional societies, foundations, or government agencies</p>Carlomagno C. Panlilio, Ph.D. is an Assistant Professor in the Department of Educational Psychology, Counseling, and Special Education and a faculty member with the Child Maltreatment Solutions Network at the Pennsylvania State University. The overarching goal of Dr. Panlilio’s program of research is to understand the dynamic interplay between maltreatment, context, and development, and how these processes influence individual differences in learning. His research is guided by an interdisciplinary approach that draws from Developmental Science, Educational Psychology, Statistics, and Social Welfare to examine the multisystemic influences on early adversity and children’s learning. More specifically, he is interested in further explicating self-regulation and self-regulated learning as key developmental and learning processes that explain variability in the academic outcomes of children with a history of maltreatment. Prior to his faculty appointment, Dr. Panlilio practiced as a licensed clinical marriage and family therapist. He has worked in private practice, community agencies, treatment foster care, and a residential treatment facility for adolescents. He has been in clinical practice since 2005 and often worked with at-risk children and families. He previously served as the Vice Chair for the Maryland Board of Professional Counselors and Therapists, and also served as the Chair for the Ethics Committee. Dr. Panlilio earned his B.A. in Psychology from the California State University at Long Beach and an M.S. in Family Studies with a concentration in Couple and Family Therapy from the University of Maryland College Park. Dr. Panlilio earned his Ph.D. in Developmental Science and a certificate in Education, Measurement, and Statistics from the University of Maryland College Park.
ScienceProfessional Books (2)Science (SC)EBOP41176Social Sciences009783030128104Childhood EducationSchool PsychologyEarly Childhood EducationSocial Work454000
94
Social Sciences978-1-4039-4234-0PenningtonMartha C. Pennington; Pamela Rogerson-RevellMartha C. Pennington, University of London, London, UK; Pamela Rogerson-Revell, University of Leicester, Leicester, UKEnglish Pronunciation Teaching and ResearchContemporary PerspectivesXV, 500 p. 16 illus.12019final84.9925.5090.9427.2874.9922.5099.9930.00Soft cover0Research and Practice in Applied LinguisticsSocial SciencesMonographBook500CBCFHPalgrave MacmillanPalgrave Macmillan UK0Available2019-12-092019-11-282019-09-222019-09-221Chapter 1: The Nature of Pronunciation.- Chapter 2: Phonology in Language Learning.- Chapter 3: Framing the Teaching of Pronunciation.- Chapter 4: Pronunciation in the Classroom: Teachers and Teaching Methods.- Chapter 5: Using Technology for Pronunciation Teaching, Learning, and Assessment.- Chapter 6: Assessing Pronunciation.- Chapter 7: Beyond the Language Classroom: Wider Applications of Pronunciation Research and Practice.- Chapter 8: Relating Pronunciation Research and Practice. <div>
</div><div>
</div><div>
</div>		This collaborative work by two-well-known pronunciation specialists breaks new ground in presenting an applied, sociolinguistic orientation to pronunciation teaching and research that is both up-to-date and comprehensive in scope. It is a welcome addition to the pronunciation literature that should be on the reading lists of all language teachers and applied linguists.”<div><div>
</div><div>—Rodney H. Jones, University of Reading, UK
</div><div>
</div><div>“This book makes a valuable contribution by connecting research and practice while providing a comprehensive scope. This is much appreciated given the extensive amount of research in the field as well as in related areas.”
</div><div>
</div><div>—Jose Antonio Mompean Gonzalez, University of Murcia, Spain
</div><div>
</div><div>
</div><div>This book offers contemporary perspectives on English pronunciation teaching and research in the context of increasing multilingualism and English as an international language. It reviews current theory and practice in pronunciation pedagogy, language learning, language assessment, and technological developments, and presents an expanded view of pronunciation in communication, education, and employment. Its eight chapters provide a comprehensive and up-to-date analysis of pronunciation and the linguistic and social functions it fulfils. Topics include pronunciation in first and second language acquisition; instructional approaches and factors impacting teachers’ curriculum decisions; methods for assessing pronunciation; the use of technology for pronunciation teaching, learning, and testing; pronunciation issues of teachers who are second-language speakers; and applications of pronunciation research and pedagogy in L1 literacy and speech therapy, forensic linguistics, and health, workplace, and political communication. The chapters also critically examine the research base supporting specific teaching approaches and identify research gaps in need of further investigation. This rigorous work will provide an invaluable resource for teachers and teacher educators; in addition to researchers in the fields of applied linguistics, phonology and communication.
</div><div>
</div><div>
</div><div>Martha C. Pennington is Professorial Research Associate in Linguistics at the School for Oriental and African Studies and a Research Fellow in Applied Linguistics and Communication at Birkbeck College, both of the University of London, UK.
</div><div>
</div><div>Pamela Rogerson-Revell is Associate Professor in Applied Linguistics at the University of Leicester, UK.</div></div>		This book offers contemporary perspectives on English pronunciation teaching and research in the context of increasing multilingualism and English as an international language. It reviews current theory and practice in pronunciation pedagogy, language learning, language assessment, and technological developments, and presents an expanded view of pronunciation in communication, education, and employment. Its eight chapters provide a comprehensive and up-to-date analysis of pronunciation and the linguistic and social functions it fulfils. Topics include pronunciation in first and second language acquisition; instructional approaches and factors impacting teachers’ curriculum decisions; methods for assessing pronunciation; the use of technology for pronunciation teaching, learning, and testing; pronunciation issues of teachers who are second-language speakers; and applications of pronunciation research and pedagogy in L1 literacy and speech therapy, forensic linguistics, and health, workplace, and political communication. The chapters also critically examine the research base supporting specific teaching approaches and identify research gaps in need of further investigation. This rigorous work will provide an invaluable resource for teachers and teacher educators; in addition to researchers in the fields of applied linguistics, phonology and communication.<p>Explores pronunciation research and applications, and language variation</p><p>Integrates two subjects that are often regarded separately: phonology as a specialization within linguistic analysis, and pronunciation in the social context of communication</p><p>Takes a broader view of pronunciation by incorporating discourse-level issues and addressing different varieties of English</p><p>Provides case studies and project ideas that connect research and practice</p><div>Martha C. Pennington is Professorial Research Associate in Linguistics at the School for Oriental and African Studies and a Research Fellow in Applied Linguistics and Communication at Birkbeck College, both of the University of London, UK. She is the author of Phonology in Context (2007).</div><div>
</div><div>Pamela Rogerson-Revell is Associate Professor in Applied Linguistics at the University of Leicester, UK. She is the author of English Phonology and Pronunciation Teaching (2011).</div><div>
</div>		SciencePalgrave Standard US (P5)Palgrave Monograph (P6)EBOP41176Social Sciences009781403942340Applied LinguisticsPhonology and PhoneticsResearch Methods in Language and LinguisticsLanguage Teaching and LearningMultilingualismLanguage Policy and Planning668000
95
Social Sciences978-1-4039-4235-7PenningtonMartha C. Pennington; Pamela Rogerson-RevellMartha C. Pennington, University of London, London, UK; Pamela Rogerson-Revell, University of Leicester, Leicester, UKEnglish Pronunciation Teaching and ResearchContemporary PerspectivesXV, 500 p. 16 illus.12019final99.9930.00106.9932.1089.9927.00109.9933.00Hard cover0Research and Practice in Applied LinguisticsSocial SciencesMonographBook500CBCFHPalgrave MacmillanPalgrave Macmillan UK0Available2018-09-222018-09-112018-10-102018-10-101Chapter 1: The Nature of Pronunciation.- Chapter 2: Phonology in Language Learning.- Chapter 3: Framing the Teaching of Pronunciation.- Chapter 4: Pronunciation in the Classroom: Teachers and Teaching Methods.- Chapter 5: Using Technology for Pronunciation Teaching, Learning, and Assessment.- Chapter 6: Assessing Pronunciation.- Chapter 7: Beyond the Language Classroom: Wider Applications of Pronunciation Research and Practice.- Chapter 8: Relating Pronunciation Research and Practice. <div>
</div><div>
</div><div>
</div>		This collaborative work by two-well-known pronunciation specialists breaks new ground in presenting an applied, sociolinguistic orientation to pronunciation teaching and research that is both up-to-date and comprehensive in scope. It is a welcome addition to the pronunciation literature that should be on the reading lists of all language teachers and applied linguists.”<div><div>
</div><div>—Rodney H. Jones, University of Reading, UK
</div><div>
</div><div>“This book makes a valuable contribution by connecting research and practice while providing a comprehensive scope. This is much appreciated given the extensive amount of research in the field as well as in related areas.”
</div><div>
</div><div>—Jose Antonio Mompean Gonzalez, University of Murcia, Spain
</div><div>
</div><div>
</div><div>This book offers contemporary perspectives on English pronunciation teaching and research in the context of increasing multilingualism and English as an international language. It reviews current theory and practice in pronunciation pedagogy, language learning, language assessment, and technological developments, and presents an expanded view of pronunciation in communication, education, and employment. Its eight chapters provide a comprehensive and up-to-date analysis of pronunciation and the linguistic and social functions it fulfils. Topics include pronunciation in first and second language acquisition; instructional approaches and factors impacting teachers’ curriculum decisions; methods for assessing pronunciation; the use of technology for pronunciation teaching, learning, and testing; pronunciation issues of teachers who are second-language speakers; and applications of pronunciation research and pedagogy in L1 literacy and speech therapy, forensic linguistics, and health, workplace, and political communication. The chapters also critically examine the research base supporting specific teaching approaches and identify research gaps in need of further investigation. This rigorous work will provide an invaluable resource for teachers and teacher educators; in addition to researchers in the fields of applied linguistics, phonology and communication.
</div><div>
</div><div>
</div><div>Martha C. Pennington is Professorial Research Associate in Linguistics at the School for Oriental and African Studies and a Research Fellow in Applied Linguistics and Communication at Birkbeck College, both of the University of London, UK.
</div><div>
</div><div>Pamela Rogerson-Revell is Associate Professor in Applied Linguistics at the University of Leicester, UK.</div></div>		This book offers contemporary perspectives on English pronunciation teaching and research in the context of increasing multilingualism and English as an international language. It reviews current theory and practice in pronunciation pedagogy, language learning, language assessment, and technological developments, and presents an expanded view of pronunciation in communication, education, and employment. Its eight chapters provide a comprehensive and up-to-date analysis of pronunciation and the linguistic and social functions it fulfils. Topics include pronunciation in first and second language acquisition; instructional approaches and factors impacting teachers’ curriculum decisions; methods for assessing pronunciation; the use of technology for pronunciation teaching, learning, and testing; pronunciation issues of teachers who are second-language speakers; and applications of pronunciation research and pedagogy in L1 literacy and speech therapy, forensic linguistics, and health, workplace, and political communication. The chapters also critically examine the research base supporting specific teaching approaches and identify research gaps in need of further investigation. This rigorous work will provide an invaluable resource for teachers and teacher educators; in addition to researchers in the fields of applied linguistics, phonology and communication.<p>Explores pronunciation research and applications, and language variation</p><p>Integrates two subjects that are often regarded separately: phonology as a specialization within linguistic analysis, and pronunciation in the social context of communication</p><p>Takes a broader view of pronunciation by incorporating discourse-level issues and addressing different varieties of English</p><p>Provides case studies and project ideas that connect research and practice</p><div>Martha C. Pennington is Professorial Research Associate in Linguistics at the School for Oriental and African Studies and a Research Fellow in Applied Linguistics and Communication at Birkbeck College, both of the University of London, UK. She is the author of Phonology in Context (2007).</div><div>
</div><div>Pamela Rogerson-Revell is Associate Professor in Applied Linguistics at the University of Leicester, UK. She is the author of English Phonology and Pronunciation Teaching (2011).</div><div>
</div>		SciencePalgrave Standard US (P5)Palgrave Monograph (P6)EBOP41176Social Sciences009781403942357Applied LinguisticsPhonology and PhoneticsResearch Methods in Language and LinguisticsLanguage Teaching and LearningMultilingualismLanguage Policy and Planning796000
96
Social Sciences978-981-10-8886-5Pereira RodersAna Pereira Roders; Francesco BandarinAna Pereira Roders, Delft University of Technology, Delft, The Netherlands; Francesco Bandarin, UNESCO Advisor, Paris, FranceReshaping Urban ConservationThe Historic Urban Landscape Approach in ActionXXXV, 570 p. 166 illus., 126 illus. in color.12019final159.9948.00171.1951.36139.9942.00179.9954.00Hard cover0Creativity, Heritage and the City2Social SciencesContributed volumeBook570HDJFCSpringerSpringer Nature Singapore0Available2019-02-282019-02-072019-03-112019-03-111Part 1 Africa.- Part 2 Arab States.- Part 3 Asia and the Pacific.- Part 4 Europe and North America.- Part 5 Latin America and the Caribbean.<div>This volume focuses on the implementation of the 2011 UNESCO Recommendation on the Historic Urban Landscape (HUL approach), designed to foster the integration of heritage management in regional and urban planning and management, and strengthen the role of heritage in sustainable urban development.</div><div>Earlier publications and research looked at the underlying theory of why the HUL approach was needed and how this theory was developed and elaborated by UNESCO. A comprehensive analysis was carried out in consultation with a multitude of actors in the twenty-first-century urban scene and with disciplinary approaches that are available to heritage managers and practitioners to implement the HUL approach.</div><div>This volume aims to be empirical, describing, analyzing, and comparing 28 cities taken as case studies to implement the HUL approach. From those cases, many lessons can be learned and much guidance shared on best practices concerning what can be done to make the HUL approach work.</div><div>Whereas the previous studies served to illustrate issues and challenges, in this volume the studies point to innovations in regional and urban planning and management that can allow cities to avoid major conflicts and to further develop in competitiveness. These accomplishments have been possible by building partnerships, devising financial strategies, and using heritage as a key resource in sustainable urban development, to name but a few effective strategies.</div><div>For these reasons, this volume is primarily pragmatic, linked to the daily work and challenges of practitioners and administrators, using specific cases to assess what was and is good about current practices and what can be improved, in accordance with the HUL approach and aims.</div><div>This volume focuses on the implementation of the 2011 UNESCO Recommendation on the Historic Urban Landscape (HUL approach), designed to foster the integration of heritage management in regional and urban planning and management, and strengthen the role of heritage in sustainable urban development.</div><div>Earlier publications and research looked at the underlying theory of why the HUL approach was needed and how this theory was developed and elaborated by UNESCO. A comprehensive analysis was carried out in consultation with a multitude of actors in the twenty-first-century urban scene and with disciplinary approaches that are available to heritage managers and practitioners to implement the HUL approach.</div><div>This volume aims to be empirical, describing, analyzing, and comparing 28 cities taken as case studies to implement the HUL approach. From those cases, many lessons can be learned and much guidance shared on best practices concerning what can be done to make the HUL approach work.</div><div>Whereas the previous studies served to illustrate issues and challenges, in this volume the studies point to innovations in regional and urban planning and management that can allow cities to avoid major conflicts and to further develop in competitiveness. These accomplishments have been possible by building partnerships, devising financial strategies, and using heritage as a key resource in sustainable urban development, to name but a few effective strategies.</div><div>For these reasons, this volume is primarily pragmatic, linked to the daily work and challenges of practitioners and administrators, using specific cases to assess what was and is good about current practices and what can be improved, in accordance with the HUL approach and aims.</div><p>Presents abundant co-created innovations on the integration of heritage management in regional and urban planning and management</p><p>Provides a multitude of lessons and best practices, defined by practitioners for practitioners in regional and urban planning and management</p><p>Offers a global perspective on the implementation of the HUL approach in 28 cities worldwide</p>Ana Pereira Roders is full Professor of heritage and values at Delft University of Technology (TU Delft), the Netherlands. She is also currently member of the governing board of the International Centre on Space Technology for Natural and Cultural Heritage (HIST), Chinese Academy of Sciences, China. Ana has a wide range of work experience abroad and interdisciplinary cooperation, spanning the fields of architecture, urban planning, law, environmental management and computer sciences. Since 2008, Ana cooperates closely with UNESCO and the World Heritage Centre in particular, concerning primarily the 1972 World Heritage Convention and the 2011 Recommendation on the Historic Urban Landscape. She led the creation of global platforms such as Protected Urban Planet (2011) and the Global Observatory on the Historic Urban Landscape (GO-HUL, 2015). Ana is the founding co-editor of the Journal Cultural Heritage Management and Sustainable Development, published by Emerald. She presented in 2015 at TEDxHamburg “How cities become resource efficient”. Recently, she joined the RegioStars Awards 2018, European Commission, as senior jury member, under the category “Cultural Heritage”. Her recent publications include: Going Beyond: Perceptions of Sustainability in Heritage Studies (part 2), co-authored with Marie-Theres Albert and Francesco Bandarin, also published by Springer in 2017.Francesco Bandarin is an architect and urban planner, specialized in urban conservation. He holds degrees in Architecture (Venice, IUAV) and City and Regional Planning, (UC Berkeley). He has been a Professor of Urban Planning and Urban Conservation at the University IUAV of Venice, Italy (1979-2016). From 2000 to 2018, he worked at UNESCO as Director of the World Heritage Centre and as Assistant Director-General for Culture. He is currently an Advisor for Urban Heritage of the UNESCO Director-General. He is a member of the Steering Committee of the Aga Khan Trust for Culture, and of the Board of the Fondazione Santagata for the Economics of Culture in Turin. He has served as a President of several international Juries, including the 2014 Venice Architecture Biennale and of the Shenzhen Creative Design Award (SCDA). His recent publications include The Historic Urban Landscape: Managing Heritage in an Urban Century, 2012, and Reconnecting the City: The Historic Urban Landscape Approach and the Future of Urban Heritage, 2015, both co-authored with Ron van Oers and published by Wiley-Blackwell.ScienceProfessional Books (2)Science (SC)EBOP41176Social Sciences009789811088865ArchaeologyCultural HeritageAnthropology1069000
97
Social Sciences978-90-481-8902-1PolLouis G. Pol; Richard K. ThomasLouis G. Pol, University of Nebraska, Omaha College of Business Administration, Omaha, NE, USA; Richard K. Thomas, The University of Mississippi, University, NE, USAThe Demography of Health and HealthcareX, 302 p.32013final199.9960.00213.9964.20179.9954.00219.9966.00Hard cover0The Springer Series on Demographic Methods and Population Analysis13Social SciencesMonographBook302JHBDMBNSpringerSpringer Netherlands0Available2012-08-172011-11-072012-09-302012-09-301,978-0-306-46337-2,978-0-306-46336-5,978-94-017-4284-9,978-0-306-47376-01. Health Demography: An Evolving Discipline.- 2. Health and Healthcare: An Introduction.- 3. Population Size, Distribution and Concentration.- 4. Population Composition.- 5. Fertility.- 6. Mortality.- 7. Migration.- 8. Morbidity. 9. Data Sources for Health Demography.- 10. The Demographic Correlates of Health Status.-11. Demographic Correlates of Health Behavior.- 12. Health Demography and Public Policy.- Index.In this 3rd edition of the definitive work on health demography, Pol and Thomas offer an updated view of the field and a current perspective on the applications of health demography to contemporary issues.  The significance of health demography within the field of population studies has continued to increase and this work provides background on the healthcare arena and systematically presents the various aspects of demography as they relate to healthcare.  This addition has been streamlined to focus on the important aspects of health demography and enhanced through the addition of charts, maps and other graphics.  All statistics and tables have been updated and the most current references are included.  A separate chapter on morbidity has been included and the final chapter focuses on the public policy interface with health demography.  Case studies and sidebars are included throughout the book to illustrate the applications of demography within the healthcare arena.  Recent developments in U.S. healthcare are highlighted to give the text a very contemporary presence.'At last! ...a book on health demography which draws together these two important and useful disciplines... and provides a central resource for students as well as professionals who need access to demographic methods, measures, and concepts. ... The authors demonstrate the relevance and applicability of demographic principles to health care in a clear, thorough manner.' (Applied Demography) 'A well-written, effectively organized work that clarifies the role of health demography.' (Choice)In this 3rd edition of the definitive work on health demography, Pol and Thomas offer an updated view of the field and a current perspective on the applications of health demography to contemporary issues.  The significance of health demography within the field of population studies has continued to increase and this work provides background on the healthcare arena and systematically presents the various aspects of demography as they relate to healthcare.  This addition has been streamlined to focus on the important aspects of health demography and enhanced through the addition of charts, maps and other graphics.  All statistics and tables have been updated and the most current references are included.  A separate chapter on morbidity has been included and the final chapter focuses on the public policy interface with health demography.  Case studies and sidebars are included throughout the book to illustrate the applications of demography within the healthcare arena.  Recent developments in U.S. healthcare are highlighted to give the text a very contemporary presence. <p>The third edition of the first and still only book on Health Demography</p><p>The third edition of the first book to draw together the important disciplines of health and demography</p><p>Revised, updated, and enhanced edition</p>ScienceProfessional Books (2)Science (SC)EBOP11648Humanities, Social Sciences and Law009789048189021Population and DemographyPublic HealthPopulation EconomicsSociology730000
98
Social Sciences978-94-007-9279-1PolLouis G. Pol; Richard K. ThomasLouis G. Pol, University of Nebraska, Omaha College of Business Administration, Omaha, NE, USA; Richard K. Thomas, The University of Mississippi, University, NE, USAThe Demography of Health and HealthcareX, 302 p.32013final199.9960.00213.9964.20179.9954.00219.9966.00Soft cover0The Springer Series on Demographic Methods and Population Analysis13Social SciencesMonographBook (Paperback Initiative)302JHBDMBNSpringerSpringer Netherlands0Available2014-01-262014-01-252010-11-022014-03-311,978-0-306-46337-2,978-0-306-46336-5,978-94-017-4284-9,978-0-306-47376-01. Health Demography: An Evolving Discipline.- 2. Health and Healthcare: An Introduction.- 3. Population Size, Distribution and Concentration.- 4. Population Composition.- 5. Fertility.- 6. Mortality.- 7. Migration.- 8. Morbidity. 9. Data Sources for Health Demography.- 10. The Demographic Correlates of Health Status.-11. Demographic Correlates of Health Behavior.- 12. Health Demography and Public Policy.- Index.In this 3rd edition of the definitive work on health demography, Pol and Thomas offer an updated view of the field and a current perspective on the applications of health demography to contemporary issues.  The significance of health demography within the field of population studies has continued to increase and this work provides background on the healthcare arena and systematically presents the various aspects of demography as they relate to healthcare.  This addition has been streamlined to focus on the important aspects of health demography and enhanced through the addition of charts, maps and other graphics.  All statistics and tables have been updated and the most current references are included.  A separate chapter on morbidity has been included and the final chapter focuses on the public policy interface with health demography.  Case studies and sidebars are included throughout the book to illustrate the applications of demography within the healthcare arena.  Recent developments in U.S. healthcare are highlighted to give the text a very contemporary presence.'At last! ...a book on health demography which draws together these two important and useful disciplines... and provides a central resource for students as well as professionals who need access to demographic methods, measures, and concepts. ... The authors demonstrate the relevance and applicability of demographic principles to health care in a clear, thorough manner.' (Applied Demography) 'A well-written, effectively organized work that clarifies the role of health demography.' (Choice)In this 3rd edition of the definitive work on health demography, Pol and Thomas offer an updated view of the field and a current perspective on the applications of health demography to contemporary issues.  The significance of health demography within the field of population studies has continued to increase and this work provides background on the healthcare arena and systematically presents the various aspects of demography as they relate to healthcare.  This addition has been streamlined to focus on the important aspects of health demography and enhanced through the addition of charts, maps and other graphics.  All statistics and tables have been updated and the most current references are included.  A separate chapter on morbidity has been included and the final chapter focuses on the public policy interface with health demography.  Case studies and sidebars are included throughout the book to illustrate the applications of demography within the healthcare arena.  Recent developments in U.S. healthcare are highlighted to give the text a very contemporary presence. <p>The third edition of the first and still only book on Health Demography</p><p>The third edition of the first book to draw together the important disciplines of health and demography</p><p>Revised, updated, and enhanced edition</p>ScienceProfessional Books (2)Science (SC)EBOP11648Humanities, Social Sciences and Law009789400792791Population and DemographyPublic HealthPopulation EconomicsSociology4745000
99
Social Sciences978-3-030-04728-3ReinhardtJonathon ReinhardtJonathon Reinhardt, University of Arizona, Tucson, AZ, USAGameful Second and Foreign Language Teaching and LearningTheory, Research, and PracticeXIX, 311 p. 7 illus., 3 illus. in color.12019final89.9927.0096.2928.8979.9924.0099.9930.00Hard cover0New Language Learning and Teaching EnvironmentsSocial SciencesMonographBook311CBJNVPalgrave MacmillanSpringer International Publishing0Available2019-01-142018-12-312019-01-162019-01-161<div>Chapter 1. Introduction.- Chapter 2. Gaming.- Chapter 3. Play.- Chapter 4. Game.- Chapter 5. Learning.- Chapter 6. Game-enhanced L2TL.- Chapter 7. Game-informed L2TL.- Chapter 8. Game-based L2TL.- Chapter 9. Research.- Chapter 10. Conclusion.

</div>		<div>This book offers a comprehensive examination of the theory, research, and practice of the use of digital games in second and foreign language teaching and learning (L2TL). It explores how to harness the enthusiasm, engagement, and motivation that digital gaming can inspire by adopting a gameful L2TL approach that encompasses game-enhanced, game-informed, and game-based practice. The first part of the book situates gameful L2TL in the global practices of informal learnful L2 gaming and in the theories of play and games which are then applied throughout the discussion of gameful L2TL practice that follows. This includes analysis of practices of digital game-enhanced L2TL design (the use of vernacular, commercial games), game-informed L2TL design (gamification and the general application of gameful principles to L2 pedagogy), and game-based L2TL design (the creation of digital games purposed for L2 learning). Designed as a guide for researchers and teachers, the book also offers fresh insights for scholars of applied linguistics, second language acquisition, L2 pedagogy, computer-assisted language learning (CALL), game studies, and game design that will open pathways to future developments in the field.</div><div>
</div><div>Jonathon Reinhardt is Associate Professor of English Applied Linguistics and Second Language Acquisition and Teaching at the University of Arizona, USA. </div><div>
</div>		This book offers a comprehensive examination of the theory, research, and practice of the use of digital games in second and foreign language teaching and learning (L2TL). It explores how to harness the enthusiasm, engagement, and motivation that digital gaming can inspire by adopting a gameful L2TL approach that encompasses game-enhanced, game-informed, and game-based practice. The first part of the book situates gameful L2TL in the global practices of informal learnful L2 gaming and in the theories of play and games which are then applied throughout the discussion of gameful L2TL practice that follows. This includes analysis of practices of digital game-enhanced L2TL design (the use of vernacular, commercial games), game-informed L2TL design (gamification and the general application of gameful principles to L2 pedagogy), and game-based L2TL design (the creation of digital games purposed for L2 learning). Designed as a guide for researchers and teachers, the book also offers fresh insights for scholars of applied linguistics, second language acquisition, L2 pedagogy, computer-assisted language learning (CALL), game studies, and game design that will open pathways to future developments in the field.<div>
</div><div>
</div>		<p>Demonstrates how research into autonomous, informal learning in voluntary, self-directed contexts can inform gameful learning in formal ones</p><p>Combines theory, research, and practice, to provide a framework for exploring the practice of gaming; the theories of play, games, and learning; and the implications of research on gameful L2TL</p><p>Argues that practitioners should be involved in all stages of the creation of digital games for second language learning, and that development should be informed by theory and practice</p>Jonathon Reinhardt is Associate Professor of English Applied Linguistics and Second Language Acquisition and Teaching at the University of Arizona, USA. His research focuses on technology-enhanced second and foreign language pedagogy and learning, especially with emergent technologies like social media and digital gaming.<div>
</div><div>
</div>		SciencePalgrave Standard US (P5)Palgrave Monograph (P6)EBOP41176Social Sciences009783030047283Applied LinguisticsDigital Education and Educational TechnologyGame DevelopmentLanguage EducationLanguage Teaching and Learning560000
100
Social Sciences978-1-137-34879-1RyanL. Ryan; U. Erel; Alessio D'AngeloL. Ryan; U. Erel; Alessio D'AngeloMigrant CapitalNetworks, Identities and StrategiesXX, 288 p.12015final109.9933.00117.6935.3199.9930.00119.9936.00Hard cover0Migration, Diasporas and CitizenshipPalgrave Social Sciences CollectionMonographBook288JHBJFFNPalgrave MacmillanPalgrave Macmillan UK0Available2015-02-202015-02-202015-02-202015-02-201Preface. Floya Anthias PART I: CAPITALS Introduction. Understanding 'Migrant Capital' 1. Thinking Migrant Capitals Intersectionally: Using a Biographical Approach; Umut Erel 2. Embodied Cultural Capital and the Study of Ethnic Inequalities; Maja Cederberg 3. Breaking through the Glass Ceiling: Intercultural Communication and the Career Experiences of Skilled Immigrant Managers; Suhair Deeb and Harald Bauder 4. The Role of Care in Developing Capitals among Caribbean Migrant Families; Tracey Reynolds PART II: MIGRANTS' ACTIVISM AND CIVIC ENGAGEMENT 5. Migrant Organisations: Embodied Community Capital?; Alessio D'Angelo 6. Diaspora, the Internet and Social Capital; Janroj Keles 7. Ethnic Social Capital and Political Participation of Immigrants; Barbara Herman and Dirk Jacobs PART III: EMBEDDING AND INTEGRATING NETWORKS 8. Embedding in Motion: Analysing Relational, Spatial and Temporal Dynamics among Highly Skilled Migrants; Louise Ryan and Jon Mulholland 9. Looking Inside the Ethnic Enclave: Inequality, Social Capital and Transnationalism; Jose Luis Molina, Hugo Valenzuela-Garcia, Miranda Jessica Lubbers, Alejandro Garcia-Macias, and Judith Pampalona 10. Paths of Legal Integration and Migrant Social Networks: The Case of Filipina and Romanian Female Domestic Workers in Italy; Tiziana Caponio 11. Network Embeddedness of Migrants: Exploring Variations across Three Neighbourhoods in Vienna; Philipp Schnell, Josef Kohlbacher and Ursula Reeger 12. A Spectrum of Integration: Examining Combinations of Bonding and Bridging Social Capital and Network Heterogeneity amongst Australian Refugee and Skilled Migrants; Roger PatulnyMigrant Capital covers a broad range of case studies and, by bringing together leading and emerging researchers, presents state-of-the-art empirical, theoretical and methodological perspectives on migration, networks, social and cultural capital, exploring the ways in which these bodies of literature can inform and strengthen each other.Floya Anthias, Roehampton University, UK Harald Bauder, Ryerson University, Canada Tiziana Caponio, University of Turin, Italy Maja Cederberg, Oxford Brookes University, UK Suhair Deeb Ryerson University, Canada Alejandro García-Macías, Universidad Autónoma de Aguascalientes, Mexico Dirk Jacobs, Université Libre de Bruxelles, Belgium Barbara Herman, Université Libre de Bruxelles, Belgium Janroj Keles, Brunel University, UK Josef Kohlbacher, Austrian Academy of Sciences, Austria Miranda Jessica Lubbers, Universitat Autònoma de Barcelona, Spain Jose Luis Molina, Universitat Autònoma de Barcelona, Spain Jon Mulholland, Middlesex University, UK Judith Pampalona, Universitat Autònoma de Barcelona, Spain Roger Patulny, University of New South Wales, Australia Tracey Reynolds, London South Bank University, UK Philipp Schnell, University of Vienna, Austria Ursula Reeger, Austrian Academy of Sciences, Austria Hugo Valenzuela-García, Universitat Autònoma de Barcelona, SpainSciencePalgrave Standard US (P5)Palgrave Monograph (P6)EBOP41146Palgrave Social Sciences Collection009781137348791SociologyHuman MigrationRace and Ethnicity StudiesSociological MethodsHuman RightsSocial Structure4679000